ABL 50&5000&505&510 &520dd PDF

ABLSO0
Blood Gas System

ABLSO, ABL500, ABL505, ABLSIO, ABL520
Service
Manual
D
ii
i
5
:
5
P
!
si
E
50
5
a
i
e
5
f RADIOMETERm
g ORd
a lometer A/S, Denmark, 1989, All Rights Reserved. 0
COPENHAGENi
Preface
GENERAL
The purpose of this Service Manual is to give a
basic understanding of the instrument and to give
INFORMATION
\
the instructions necessary for servicing it.
m
The manual has been divided into 10 main sections CHECKOUT and
which are:
GENERAL INFORMATION, which gives a short ADJUSTMENT
ail-round description of the instrument.
CHECKOUT AND ADJUSTMENT, concerning

the electronical and mechanical checkouts
and adjustments.
TROUBLESHOOTING
3 TROUBLESHOOTING, which provides inter-
DISMANTLING and
pretation of error messages and gives propo-
sals for quick and systematic location of
faults.
e 4 DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS, concer-

REPLACEMENTS
ning mechanical diassemblies.
5 MAINTENANCE, which include the mainte-

(
nance procedures for customers and for ser-
MAINTENANCE
vice.
6 PROGRAMS, which gives details about the

software as seen from a functional point of
view. It also contains descriptions of the spe-
cial programs used for servicing the instru-
PROGRAMS
ment.
ELECTRONICS DESCRIPTION, which describes

the electronics in detail. ELECTRONICS
MECHANICS DESCRIPTION, which describes
DESCRIPTION
the mechanics in detail, Wet Section and Gas
Mixer.
9 SPARE PARTS LIST, which gives a list of the

MECHANICS
spare parts available for servicing the instru-
ment.
DESCRIPTION
10 DRAWINGS, showing mechanical compo-
nents and their placement, wiring diagram
for the electronics. SPARE PARTS LIST
The Service Manual will be revised by means of Ser-
vice Notes, whenever extentions or changes, im-
a portant for servicing, have been made either to the
instrument or the Service Manual itself.
DRAWINGS
CONTENTS
Service Policy
Test Equipment and Tools
Service Notes
1. General Information Section Page

1 1
Introduction
Gas Mixer 1 1
Wet Section 1 2
Electronics 1
2. Checkout and Adjustment

Igroduction 2
Power Supply 2.1
Electrode channels 2.2
Temperature (wet section) 2.3
Waste 2.4
Gas Mixer 2.5
Valves 2.6
Pumps and Main Valve 2.7
Liquid Sensors 2.8
Inlet Module 2.9
Printer 2.10
Serial Communication 2.11
CRT Monitor 2.12
Photolamp 2.13
Photo diode channels 2.14
Hemolyzer 2.15
Monochromator 2.16
Software Upgrade 2.17
3. Troubleshooting
Introduction 3
Operator Record 3.1
Sample Record 3.2
Transducer Record 3.3
System Records, General 3.4
System Records, Last Cali bration 3.5
System Records, Last Measurement 3.6
System Records, Last Manual Calibration 3.7
Other Record 3.8
Electronics and Software Error Messages 3.9
4. Dismantling and Replacements

4 1
Introduction
4 2
Procedures
5. Maintenance
Introduction 5
User 5.1
Service (yearly) 5.2
Revised 92.02.14 Contents-l

CONTENTS
a
Section Page
6. Programs
Introduction 6
User programs 6.1
Wet Section Measurement Programs 6.2.1
Wet Section Calibration Programs 6.2.2
Wet Section Maintenance Programs 6.2.3
Selftest Programs 6.3
Service Programs 6.4
7. Electronics Description
Introduction 7
Main Computer (901-782) 7.1.1
Main Computer (902-146) 7.1.2
Main Memory 7.2
Numerical Keyboard 7.3
RSISO, Serial Output 7.4
Printer and Printer Control 7.5
Wet Secti n Control, and 7.6
Wet SI ction Distribution 7.6
pH, pO2 and pCO2 Preamplifiers 7.6
Gas Mixer Interface 7.7
CRT-Monitor 7.8
CRT-Deflection 7.8
Video Amplifier 7.8
Power Supply 7.9
RSI 100, Serial Interface 7.10
floppy Disk Control 7.11
Monochromator Interface 7.12
8. Mechanics Description
Introduction 8
Wet Section 8.1
Optical System 8.1.1
Gas Mixer 8.2
9. Spare Parts List

Introduction 9
Modules 9.1
Components/modules 9.2
Spare Parts Kits 9.3
Software Versions 9.4
10. Drawings
Survey 10
Mechanic Drawings 10.1
Electronic Drawings 10.2
Contents-2 Revised 92.02.14

CONTENTS
Service Policy
Test Equipment and Tools
Service Notes
1. General Information Section Page

Introduction 1 1
Gas Mixer 1 1
Wet Section 1 2
Electronics 1
Qjgtkw\ aw3 fwX+rne~~

2
Introduction
Power Supply 2.1
Electrode channels 2.2
Temperature (wet section) 2.3
Waste 2.4
Gas Mixer 2.5
Valves 2.6
Pumps and Main Valve 2.7
LiquldAensors 2.8
Inlet Module 2.9
Printer 2.10
Serial Communication 2.11
CRT Monitor 2.12
Photolamp 2.13
Photo diode channels 2.14
Hemolyzer 2.15
Monochromator 2.16
Software Upgrade 2.17
3. Troubleshooting
Introduction 3
Operator Record 3.1
Sample Record 3.2
Transducer Record 3.3
System Records, General 3.4
System Records, Last Cali bration 3.5
System Records, Last Measurement 3.6
System Records, Last Manual Calibration 3.7
Other Record 3.8
Electronics and Software Error Messages 3.9
4. Dismantling and Replacements

Introduction 4 1
Procedures 4 2
5. Maintenance
Introduction 5
User 5.1
Service (yearly) 5.2
Revised 92.02.14 Contents-l

r:m
i -
SERVICE POLICY
Introduction
The service policy for the ABLTM500 has been outlined to obtain a maximum degree of reliability and
a minimum of repair time.
This is obtained by demanding the advanced and time-consuming troubleshooting, repair and test-
ing to be carried out at the factory.
Further, a combination of comprehensive troubleshooting procedures in the service manual, a variety
of selfcheck and service programs, and a high degree of modulization enables the service engineer to
quickly localize a fault in theABL500.
Continuous reliability is ensured by using the test equipment, procedures and spare parts listed in this
service manual.
Service Policy (repair level) In General

The policy is outlined below in general for the various groups of spare parts. In the spare parts list the
service policy (and thereby the repair level) is specified for each part of the ABLSOO.
Parts which are difficult or perhaps impossible to repair due to their complexity, the technology used,
critical assembly or the advanced test equipment needed for verifying their function after repair,
must not be repaired outside the factory.
However, parts which may be repaired and tested using relatively simple equipment either may or
should be repaired in the field according to the guidelines listed.
The level to which the various assembJies may be repaired or dismantled, is indicated in the spare
parts list, either written specifically in words or by simply listing the subparts available for that par-
ticular assembly.
Electronics
All PCBs are defined as modules which must be returned to the factory for replacement under the
trade-in arrangement for modules. Repairs are not to be carried out in the field.
I _
1, The reason for this is, that most of the electronics are based on the surface mounted technology
i m
(SMT) which involves a high component density and thereby a high complexity. Repair of such PCBs
requires advanced troubleshooting, repair and test facilities, which are only available at the factory.
For the few PCBs based on conventional technology (leaded components), such as the Power Supply
PCB, we have decided to follow the same policy to ensure a continuous reliability of the ABLSOO.
Since repair of the electronics is not allowed in the field, detailed circuit diagrams have not been in-
cluded in the Service Manual.
Modules which must be returned to the factory for repair are marked with an M in the spare parts
list (M for Module replacement).
One exception is the complete CRT Monitor which may to some extend be repaired to component
level. Therefore, the complete CRT Module is defined as a module which may be returned to the fac-
tory for replacement under the trade-in arrangement.
The CRT Monitor is therefore marked with an C in the spare parts list (C for Component replace-
ment).
Service Policy -1
SERVICE POLICY
Gas Mixer
The gas mixer may to some extent be repaired to component level. The membrane pump, stepping
motor, etc. may be replaced in the field. However, parts such as the mixing coils cannot be repaired in
the field. Therefore, the complete gas mixer is defined as a module which may be returned to the fac-
tory for replacement under the trade-in arrangement.
Wet Section
Most of the electromechanical and pure mechanical parts of the wet section may be repaired to com-
ponent level; tubings, valves and pump motors and the like are regarded as components. The various
programs enables the service engineer to check and adjust the various parts and also to verify their
function after repair.
Some mechanical reassemblings and adjustments are critical for their function. Such parts are not to
be dismantled further than indicated in the spare parts list. A valve, for instance, is not to be disman-
tled and this is indicated by not listing any subparts in the spare parts list.
None of the wet section parts are included in the trade-in arrangement for modules; they can either
be repaired in the field or replaced by a new part.
Exceptions From The Service Policy

In order to ensure a continued reliability of the ABLSOO, it% important that the guidelines and restric-
tions employed in the service policy are followed.
Exceptions from the service policy will not be tolerated unless special permission has been given be-
forehand from the service department at Radiometer Medical A/S.
ABLTM500 IS a trademark of Radiometer A/S, Denmark and is registered in the USA.
Service Policy -2
TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
Introduction
Below is given a list of the various test equipment and tools required for servicing ABL500/510/520.
Description Code
PHA860 pH Meter Tester 390-079
DMM - Digital Multi Meter, 4+ digits Any
Temperature Measuring Unit 901-239
Loop-back and Pass-through Test Plug for 9 pole D-connectors 902-028
Loop-back Test Plug for 5 pole connectors 902-029
Dummy Electrode (pHlpCO2) for connection to PHA860 902-049
Dummy Electrode (pOz), 100 MQ 9&+050
Nozzle for Air Flow Adjustment of Gas Mixer 920-7 10
Mounting Tool for Main Valve Gaskets 920-709
Tubing tweezers, 920-627
6k100, 0.05 % resistor 152-332
Gas Mixer Tester, A7303 904- 177
Spring for mechanical alignment of Printer Unit 920-7 13
Spanner for Hemolyzer adjustment 013-926
Adjustment dial (ABL510/520) 920-700
Boot PCB 902- 198
Program disk kit, English/German 905-048
Program disk kit, English/French 905-049
Program disk kit, English/Italian 905-050
Program disk kit, English/Spanish 905-05 1
Revised 91.07.29 Test Equipment and Tools -1

SERVICE NOTES
i l
Introduction
In the event of important changes in procedures or components taking place, the Service Manual will be
upgraded by means of Service Notes, which will be forwarded to all implicated Radiometer Distributors.
These future Service Notes for the ABL500 should be inserted here in chronological order.
l Code Subject Inserted by Date

917-217 Update of Service Manual 9008
917-225 Inclusion of ABL510 information 9011
917-240 Information Notice 9108
917-241 ABL500/510/520 software change 9109
917-245 New CRT Monitor in ABL5XX 9111
917-246 Software improvement on RSl50/100 9111
917-258 New Printer Control PCB, 902-241 9207
917-272 pO2 drift after short power break 9302
917-273 Inclusion of ABL50 Information in ABL5xx SM 9302
917-279 CRT Adjustment Procedure 9305
917-280 Adaptation Kit for CRT Monitor 9305
917-281 Gas Mixer Membrane Pump 9305
9306
0 917-282
917-283
Rubber tube 840-043 and 841-759
ABL50 Software Revision 9306
REVISED 93.06.17 SERVICE NOTES - 1

SERVICE NOTES
Code Notes
917217 Update of the Service Manual. Check-out, troubleshooting, dismantling and mainte-
nance procedures changed. Programs, spare parts list and drawings updated.
917-225 Inclusion of ABL510 information. Electronics, optical pans, procedures, programs, and
spare parts.
917- 232 Inclusion of ABL520 information. Revised hardware due to e.g. FEPRBMs and
reduced power consumption.
917-237 Update of the Service Manual. Check-out, troubleshooting, dismantling, spare parts
list. Addition of software versions.
917-240 Informations on pumps and tubing.
917-241 Update of the Service Manual. Spare Parts List section 9.4 Software Versions.
917-242 Update of the Service Manual. Check-out, troubleshooting, Wet Section programs,
mechanical description, spare parts and mechanical drawings.
917-245 Update the Service Manual to include New DesignCRT Monitor.
917-246 Introduce RSl50/100 version 2 software, increasing the buffer capacity for each
channel.
917-249 Inclusion of ABL505 information. Electronic, procedures, program, spare parts and
drawings.
917-258 New Printer Control PCB, 902-241 with reduced power consumption and better opto-
couplers.
917-272 pO2 drift after short power breaks. Fitter capacitors causing polarization voltage to
drop.
917-273 Inclusion of ABL50 information. Electronic, procedures, program, spare parts and
drawings.
917-279 Inclusion of Section 2.12 CRT adjustment procedures.
917-280 Adaptation of CRT Monitor 902-186 to early runs of Top Part 902-l 39.
917-281 Replacement Instructions for Gas Mixer Membrane Pump.
917-282 Rubber tube for old type of ABL500 with the narrow grove.
917--283 Software revision for ABL50 - four errors corrected.
SERVICE NOTES - 2 REVISED 93.06.17

MEDICAL SERVICE NOTES
Code 917-217 Issue 9008A Instrument: ABL500
Distribution General
SUBJECT: Service manual update
BACKGROUND: The service manual has been revised. Your attention is especially drawn to the
following:
Section 3 has been extended to comprise Electronic and software error mess-
ages.
Section 4 has been extended to comprise Mechanical alignment of printer

unit.
Two new service programs have been added to section 6: Shut down proce-
dure (Wet section service program) and Clear all data in RAM (Other service
programs).
DOCUMENTATION: Please discard the following pages of the existing ABLSOO service manual:
Section 2, Checkout and Adjustment. All pages.
Section 3, Troubleshooting. Page 3-16 through 3-41.
Section 4, Dismantling and Replacements. Page 4-10 through 4-12
Section 5, Maintenance. Page 5.2-6.
Section 6, Programs. All pages.
Section 9, Spare Parts List. All pages.
Section 10, Drawings. Page 1 O-2 through 1 O-5.
instead, please insert the revised pages enclosed with this Service Note.
RADIOMETER-_
C O P E N H A G E N0
-d
b
l MEDICAL SERVICE NOTES

Code 917-225 Issue 9011A Instrument ABL510
Subject ABL510 Service Information
Background The ABL500 Service Manual has been updated to include the information about
the ABL510.
Documentation Please discard the following existing sheets:

@
Front Inner front page
Front Test Equipment
Front Contents
Front Service Notes
Section 1 General Information Al I sheets
Section 3 Troubleshooting All sheets
Section 4 Dismantling All sheets
Section 5.2 Maintenance Pages 3-6
Section 6 Programs All sheets
Section 6.1 User Programs All sheets
Section 6.2 Wet Section Control Programs All sheets *)
Section 6.4 Service Programs All sheets
Section 7 Electronics All sheets
Section 7.6 Wet Section Interface All sheets
Section 7.7 Gas Mixer Interface Pages 1-2
Section 7.9 Power Supply All sheets
Section 9 Spare Parts List All sheets
Section 10 Drawings Pages l-6 and 9-22
and insert instead the revised sheets enclosed with this Service Note.
In addition, please add the following new Sections:
Section 2 2.13,2.14,2.15,and2.16
Section 7.12 Monochromator Interface
Section 8.1-l Optical System
*) It has been reported that the detailed program descriptions have no field ser-
vice relevance. We have, therefore, replaced them by the program sum-
maries included with this Service Note. If you wish to keep the detailed de-
scriptions, please store them in a separate binder.
C o d e 917-232 Issue 9104A Instrument ABLSOO
Subject ABL500/5 1 O/520 Service Information.
0dN.J~OU~d/
summary In connection with the ABL520 release, some changes have been introduced
from the following production runs:
ABL500 run 50 onwards.

ABL51 O/520 run 8 onwards.
New power supply board 902-154 includes 2 ring net relays only. For ABL500 run
50 onwards/ABL510/520 run 8 onwards only.
Existingboard907-786for ABL500 run 1 - 49/ABL510/520 run 1 - 7 only.
New Wet Section Control Board 902-157 consumes less power and includes the
waste interface circuits. Fully compatible to all ABL500/510/520 from run 1.
Existing board 901-774. Limited compatibility. For details, please refer to section
7.6.
New Main Computer Board 902-146 includes electrical erasable PROM S (FLASH-
P R O MS ). Makes Main Memory Board superfluous. For ABLSOO run 50 on-
wards/ABL510/520 run 8 onwards on/y.
Existing board 901-782 for ABL500 run 1 - 49/ABL51 O/520 run 1 - 7 only.
New waste detection system is calibration-free and consumes less power. For de-
tails, please refer to section 7.6.
New RSl50 902-148 consumes less power. Includes ring net relay. Fully com-
patible to all ABL500/51 O/520 from run 1.
7.4.
New RSllOO 902-147 consumes less power. Includes ring net relay. Fully com-
patible to all ABL500/510/520 from run 1.
7.10.
Miscellaneous:
New mains transformer. Common secondary winding for the option boards.
Reduced rinse solution consumption (ABL510/520 only).
Minor cabinet changes, e.g. painting is now white-structure, printer paper
knife is now non-transparent, gas cylinder compartment redesigned.
Documentation Please replace the obsolete service manual pages with the revised and new
sheets enclosed with this service note.
RADIOMETERm
0
C O P E N H A G E N il
Code 917-237 Issue 9 107A Instrument: ABL5XX
SUBJECT: Service Manual update
BACKGROUND: The Service Manual has been revised. Your attention is especially drawn to the
following:
Test Equipment and Tools - 1.
Sections 2.14,3.3 and 4 reflect changes to diode current limits.
Section 2.15 correction to cuvette compensation adjustment.
Section 4 has been extended to comprise Installation of Main Computer PCB

and Interface PCBs RSlSO/lOO.
Section 5.2 has been updated to reflect the latest changes in the parts replaced
during yearly maintenance.
Section 9 has been divided into three sections. The latest changes in the parts list
have been added. A section has been added to comprise Software Versions.
DOCUMENTATION: Please discard the following pages of the existing ABLSOO Service Manual:
Test Equipment and Tools - 1.

Section 2.14 all pages.
Section 3.3, page 3.3-5 through 3.3-6.
Section 4, Page 4-l 5 through 4-16.
Section 9 all pages.
Instead, please insert the revised pages enclosed with this Service Note.
RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGEN u
Code 9 17-240 I s s u e 9108A Instruments ABL5XX
Subject Information Notice
Background There have been several changes in the Spare Parts List as well as additional in-
formation to the Service Manual which we would like to emphasize.
Spare parts 1. Pump Tubing 842-170 has been replaced by 842-194. The new Tubing can be
used in all the ABL5XX instruments.
2. The Pump Housing with Rotor 901-753 has been replaced by 902-188. The
new Pump can be used in all ABL5XX. However, there is a color difference
between the two code numbers. Please note that the new Pump 902-188 can
only use the new Pump Tubing 842-194.
The new Pump Housing has been implemented as follows:
AB L500 Run 54 and onwards.
ABL51 O/520 Run 20 and onwards.
3. The Rotor for the Pumps is now made avaiable as a separate spare part item,
code No. 923-628. The rotor fits both Pump Housing types.
If you have problems with the Rollers in the Pump you may only need to re-
place the Rotor and not the complete Pump.
4. The Tubing for Vl has been given a separate spare part number, code No.
841-757. New softer material.
5. The Tubing 841-644 for V2 in ABLSOO has been replaced by 841-750, this is
the same Tubing as the one used in ABL510/520. This is to eliminate intermit-
tent high ~02 readings on a few ABLSOOs.
6. The front part of Valves V4/5 is now available as a separate spare part. This
means that you do not have to replace the solenoids when you have a
broken Nipple.
Questions 1. Why have we increased the holding voltage for the Valves?
The background for increasing the voltage was an in-depth test of the hold-
ing force versus the applied holding voltage. It was found that by increasing
the voltage the holding force was increased significantly when passing a cer-
tain point in the supply voltage. The double voltage was selected as this volt-
age was above the point found in the test. The low voltage used earlier is not
a problem, the change was made to get an optimal function of the Valves.
RADIOMETERm
0
COPENHAGEN ii
SERVICE NOTES
from Radiometer Medical A/S
917-241 September 24,199l
SUBJECT: ABL500/51 O/520 software change to version 4.
BACKGROUND: The existing software has been modified in the following respect:
1. QC outliners are excluded from statistical calculations.

2. The user is warned before data is lost from the disk.
3. The following errors have been corrected:
Disk error, device error, if it is attempted to select from the log-screen (with
more than 4.000 measurements or 4.000 calibrations or 2.000 QC measure-
ments).
Data management breakdown when the total number of measurements,
calibrations and QC measurements exceeds 65,000.
Data log breakdown if QC measurements exceed a certain number.
IMPLEMENTATION: ABL500 from run 53 onwards and ABL51 O/520 from run 22 onwards are shipped
with the new software.
UPDATING: The following updating kits are available from stock free of charge:
ABL500 run 1-49: (EPROMs) English Part No.: 905-054

German 905-055
French 905-056
ABL500 run 50-52: (FLASHPROMs) English 905-080

German 905-081
French 905-082
ABL510 run 1-7: (EPROMs) English 905-058

German 905-059
French 905-060
ABL510 run 8-21: (FLASHPROMs) English 905-083

German 905-084
French 905-085
ABL520 run l-7: (EPROMs) English 905-062

German 905-063
French 905-064
RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGENi
SERVICE NOTES RADIOMETER MEDICAL A/S
917-241 Paae 2
UPDATING (cont.): ABL520 run 8-21: (FLASHPROMs) English 905-086

German 905087
French 905-088
Each kit includes the software (either EPROMsor a Disk), update instructions, and
a Users Handbook insert.
Please note that the kits are bilingual (except the English EPROM
kits) i.e. the German and French have English as their second language. The
English EPROM kiis are English-only in order to save EPROMs.
Some of the kiis may not yet be on stock or be incomplete due to limited
capacity of EPROMs and UH-inserts. We will do our outmost to fulfil your
0
-
orders, possibly with part delivery of UH-inserts later.
We recommend that all instruments are updated. You are kindly requested to
return the replaced EPROMs immediately upon completion of the updating.
Please note that all data in the internal log will be lost when updating ABLs
with main processor software version lower than 6.32. Therefore, make a
log-printout before updating!
DOCUMENTATION: Please discard the following pages of your ABLSOO service manual:
Section 9.4 Software Versions, all pages.
Instead, please insert the revised pages enclosed with this service note.
0
. SERVICE NOTES
MI Radiometer Medical A/S
917-242 October 31,1991
SUBJECTS: 1. ABL500 service manual general update.
2. Erroneous silk-screening on early version of power supply board 902-l 54.
On version 1 of 902-l 54, the power supply board which was introduced in
ABL500 from run 50 and ABL51 O/520 from run 8, the connector pins of J2
are in reverse order with pin No. 12 being closest to J3.
1 0
/
The silk-screening was corrected (pin No. 1 being closest to J3) from board
version 2 onwards. The board version No. is printed on the component side.
Version 1: 971-462Kl Sl KM1 . Version 2: 971-462K2S2KM2.
3. Extended tHb range at monochromator adjustment.
The new tHb range is 11 .O - 17.0 g/dL or 6.82 - 10.54 mmol/L.
DOCUMENTATION: Please discard the following pages of your ABL500 service manual:
Contents Page 2
Section 2.1 Page 2.1-2
Section 2.13 Page 2.13-l
Section 2.16 Pages 2.16-l and 2.16-2
Section 3 Page 3-2
Section 3.4 Page 3.44
Section 8.1 .l Page 8.1 .l-2
.@ Section 9.2 All pages
Section 9.4 All pages
Section 10.1 Pages lO.l-3,10.1-5, 10.1-15, 10.122 and 10.1-23.
RADIOMETERS
0
COPENHAGENii
SERVICE NOTES
POIII Radiometer Medical A/S
917-24s November IS,1991
Subject New CRT Monitor in ABLSxx
Background To further improve the New Design ABL5xx we are introducing a new CRT Monitor
which provides the following benefits:
The front surface of the CRT tube is frosted which prevents reflections being
caught in the screen. This improves the readability from any angle.
The front of the tube includes an extra layer of glass which functions as a
protection shield (against blows etc.). The tube is UL-recognized as an implosion
protected type.
This enables us to remove the plastic protection shield which was needed for the
original tube. The plastic shield was prone to catch dust (also on the inner side)
which meant that cleaning was necessary during e.g. the yearly maintenance.
The new tube is a 9 kV type (the original was 11 kV), this means that the radiation
for the new tube is less than for the original. The radiation for the original is,
however, below the limit stated in the standards.
Faint vertical shadows could be observed across the original screen - these have
been eliminated on the new monitor.
Introduction The new CRT Monitor and its subparts will be included in:
ABL500 of R60 onwards
ABL51 O/520 of R30N06 onwards
Spare parts Description NeWI Old %
CRT Deflection PCB 902-l 84 901-770
Video Amplifier PCB 902-l 85 901-771
CRT Monitor, complete 902-l 86 902-060
Panel, MMI Front 923-657 923-617
l RADIOMETERS
0
COPENHAGENi
917-245 Page 2
The new parts are all defined as components, that is, they are not included in the
Trade-In Arrangement for modules. They are, however, priced so the net price equals
the trade-in price for the old version parts.
Compatibility The new parts are not compatible with the old neither mechanically nor electrically. Do
not attempt to use new parts in place of old or vice versa.
-
917-246 Paae 2
Act ion We recommend that the software is upgraded in all ABL5XXs, however, since it
is very unlikely that the error occurs, we suggest the upgrade to be carried out in
connection with other service on the instruments (e.g. in connection with the
yearly maintenance).
Spare part The new PROM, code 368-863, is available from stock free of charge.
_
SERVICE NOTES
0 POD Radiometer Medical A/S
917-246 November 30.1991
Subject Software improvement on RSl50/100
Background Earlier the RSl50/100 would only accept to store one single ASTM message (e.g.
one patient result) at a time. If a second message was sent to the RSI before it
had completed the transmission to an external computer, it would abort the
second message which would then be lost.
The above would only happen in very extreme cases as a result of a combination
of several factors:
the baud rate for the external computer is low, e.g. 300 or 600 baud.
the internal printer is set to off (causing less activity on the internal ring
network).
two other instruments are connected to the ABL5XX (ICA2, KNA2,OSM3)

causing multiple transmissions as results are received from external
instruments at different times.
the Send key is activated at a fast rate.
Till now we have only received one report concerning a lost message.
New software The buffers on the RSl50/100 have been rearranged so each channel now has
more than 10 kbyte available (the buffer assigned for the unused fourth channel
on RSIl 00 has been divided between the other three channels). This enables
l each buffer to store up to three ASTM messages - in addition, the RSI will now
also accept more than one message to be stored.
Introduction The revised software (version 2.00) will be introduced generally in:
RSl50 (902-148) of RUN 2 onwards
RSIl 00 (902-147) of RUN 3 onwards
The revised software has, however, already been included in PCBs in our stock
and will also be included in the earlier versions of RSl50/100 (902-021/901-773)
returned for repair.
RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGENi
SERVICE NOTES
917 - 249 Instrument: ABL5XX February 14,1992
SUBJECT: In connection with the ABL505 release, the service manual has been updated.
DOCUMENTATION: Please note that the entire section 6.2 has been maked up into section 6.2.1
Wet Section Measurement Programs, 6.2.2 Wet Section Calibration Programs,
and 6.2.3 Wet Section Maintenance Programs.
Please discard the following pages of the existing ABL500 service manual:
Contents All pages

Section 1 General Information. Page 1 -l/2, l-314
Section 2.2 Electrode Channels All pages
Section 3 Troubleshooting All pages
Section 3.1 Operator Record All pages
Section 3.2 Sample Record All pages
Section 3.3 Transducer Record All pages
Section 3.4 System Records, General All pages
Section 3.5 From Last Calibration All pages
Section 3.6 From Last Measurement All pages
Section 3.7 From Last Manual Cal. All pages
Section 3.8 Other Records All pages
Section 4 Dismantling and Repl. Page 4-9/I 0,4-l l/l 2,4-19120
Section 5.2 Yearly Maintenance All pages
Section 6.2 Wet Section Control Progr. All pages
Section 6.3 Self Test Programs Page 6.3-i/2
Section 6.4.1 Service Progr. (Wet Section) Page 6.4.1-l/2
Section 6.4.2 Service Progr. (Other) Page 6.4.2~5/6, 6.4.2-l 9/20
Section 7 Electronics Page 7-112, 7-3
Section 7.1.2 Main Computer Page 7.1.2-l/2
Section 7.6 Wet Section Control Page 7.6-17118, 7.6-19120
Section 7.9 Power Supply Page 7.9~5/6
Section 7.10 RSIl 00 Serial Interface Page 7.1 O-3/4
Section 7.11 Floppy Drive Page 1
Section 8.1 Wet Section Mechanics Page 8.1-l/2,8.1-3/4
Section 9 Spare Parts List All pages
Section 9.1 Modules All pages
Section 9.2 Components/Modules All pages
Section 9.3 Kits All pages
Section 9.4 Software Versions All pages
Section 10.1 Mechanic Drawings Page 10.1-21/22, lO.l-23/24,
lO.l-25/26
RADIOMETERS
0
COPENHAoENi
. SERVICE NOTES
POITI Radiometer Medical A/S
917 - 258 Instrument: ABL5XX July 16, 1992
Subject: New Printer Control PCB, 902-241
Background: To further improve the New Design ABL5XX we are introducing a new Printer Control
PCB which provides the following benefits:
a) A new and more reliable type of opto-coupler is included for connection to the
internal ring network.
b) QD32 is protected against a negative input voltage (using a diode).
c) The power consumption is reduced (by approximately 12% on the 5 V supply).
d) The production time is reduced by having components only on one side of the
PCB.
Introduction: The new Printer Control PCB is introduced in the production of new ABL5XXs by the
end of September 1992, but is released as a spare part now.
Compatibility: The new Printer Control PCB is fully compatible with the original PCB.
However, the cable between the Printer Control and Main Computer PCBs is
soldered onto 902-241, whereas the two parts were separate in the original design.
Important Note: All 901-781 which are recycled through theTrade-in System are upgraded to include
the changes in paragraphs a) and b) above. This means that these upgraded boards
0 will be just as reliable as the new PCB since the reduction of the power consumption
alone does not increase the reliability.
So, therefore we will continue to use the original Printer Control PCB, 901-781, as
a spare part.
RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGENi
. SERVICE NOTES
917 - 272 Instrument: ABL5xx February 11,1993
Subject: ~02 drift after short power break
Background: When the instrument is turned off, the polarisation voltage on the ~02 electrode is
supplied from a battery. The switching between the battery and normal voltage
supply is done by a FET transistor.
In some cases during power down, the switching is delayed due to the fact that the
capacitors for the positive and the negative voltage on the electrode amplifier are
not discharged at the same rate.
This causes in some cases the pO2 electrode to be without polarisation voltage for a
short time. If the instrument is switched on again within short time i.e. not going into
cold start, there might be a Flush Error and ~02 drift on the first Flush and calibra-
tion.
The problem has been rectified by changing the filter capacitors in the power supply
for the ~02 amplifier.
Action: If experiencing this problem, replace the Wet Section Board.

Boards supplied from Radiometer Distribution stock after February 1, 1993 have
been modified.
Spare part: Wet Section Board 901-774 or 902-l 57
RADIOMETER-
C O P E N H A G E0
N;
, SERVICE NOTES
917 - 273 Instrument: ABL50 (ABLSXXI Februarv 15.1993
Subject: Inclusion of ABL50 Information in ABL5XX Service Manual
Documentation: In connection with the inclusion of ABL50, a number of sections and pages have
bee revised and a couple of new are added according to the list below:
Replace Sections:
1
2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 2.10, 2.11 and 2.17.
0 3 page l/2, 3.3 page 13114, 3.4 page 9110,
4 page 718, page 1 l/l 2, page 19120,
5.2 page 314, page 516
6, 6.1, 6.2.1 page 314, 6.2.2 page 314, page 718, page 9/l 0, page 1 l/l 2, 6.3.
7, 7.1 and 7.1 .1-l.
8 page l/2, 8.1 page 3/4, ABL50/500/51 O/520 wet section principle diagrams
9,9.1,9.2, and 9.4.
Add Sections:
3.10
4 pages 21/22,23/24, and Up/Downgrade procedure.
6.5 and 6.5.1.
7.1.3
0 10.2 add drawing: 25121-A4 ABL5xx video connection to Scan input.
RADIOMETERS
0
COPENHAGENi
SERVICE NOTES
0 from Radiometer Medical A/S
Instrument: ABL5xx May 12,1993
SUBJECT: CRT adjustment procedure.
DOCUMENTATION: Please insert the attached section 2.12 into the ABL500 service manual.
0 RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGENC,
. SERVICE NOTES
i mm Radiometer Medical A/S
917 - 280 Instrument: ABL5xx May 12,1993
SUBJECT: Adaptation of the CRT Monitor 902-l 86 to top part 902-I 39.
BACKGROUND: The monitor including tube, deflection board and video board is available as a
spare part. It is intended as a replacement unit in case of a defective CRT
tube in the top part 902-139 distributed with the following instruments:
ABL500 run 50 onwards

ABL51 O/520 run 8 onwards
0
1
However, the first 34 runs of the top part were equipped with an aluminum
front panel which does not fit the CRT monitor 902-I 86 and some adaptation
parts, enclosed in the kit listed below, are therefore necessary in case the
monitor needs to be replaced.
905-274 monitor replacement kit:
Front panel part no. 978-756 (1 PC.)

Wedge for keypad 923-662 (1 PC.)
Screw, self tapping 021-415. (6 PCS.)
Screw, self tapping 021-410 (3 PCS.)
Washer 042-410 (3 PCS.)
Mounting instruction 985-714 (1 PC.)
The kit is available from stock free of charge.
Run 1 - 34 of top part 902-139 were distributed with the following instruments:
ABL500 run 50 - 59
ABL505 run 1 - 2
ABL510/520 run 8 - 29
DOCUMENTATION: The spare parts list has been updated according to the above (and a few
other items). Please discard the existing sheet 9.2-l/2 from the service
manual and insert instead the revised one ehclosed with this service note.
SERVICE NOTES
917 - 281 Instrument: ABL5xx Mav 13.1993
SUBJECT: Gas Mixer Membrane Pump.
BACKGROUND: The membrane pump circulatesatmosphericair at a flow rate of 180 ml per minute
in order to obtain the correct equilibrium conditions for the creation of the
calibration gasses.
Acontrol system keeps the flow constant by regulating the pump speed, e.g. if the
flow drops due to a pump which is defective or not mounted correctly the control
system tries to compensate by increasing the pump speed. If the air flow is not
brought back into its regulation field within acertain time the system status reports
GAS ERROR B and eventually the pump motor may stall.
We have received reports about stalling motors in connection with pump

replacements. The reason may be that the pump is defective or not mounted
correctly.
In case of a malfunctioning pump it may not be sufficient just to remount

or replace the defective pump. In addition it may be necessary to switch the
ABL off and on in order to load the default pump speed (600 rpm) from
memory.
PUMP REPLACEMENT 1. Select the gas mixer service program and ensure that the air pump is not
INSTRUCTION: running (gas mixer off) before you proceed with the next step.
2. Remove the left side-panel of the measuring station (behind the gas bottle)
and dismantle the old membrane pump.
3. Mount the new membrane pump by pressing it entirely down into the
chassis slot with the white tube towards the motor. Connect the 2 tubings
to the pump (transparent tubing to white nipple, black tubing to black
nipple).
4. Press the white nylon ring over the bearing of the motor axle. Ensure that
the bearing is pressed completely into the ring.
5. Ensure that the edge of the motor housing does not touch the rubber part
of the membrane pump. If it does, loosen the two fixation screws and turn
the motor away from the pump.
6. Start the air pump (gas mixer on) and check that the gas mixer is running
correctly within half a minute. If it does not, proceed with step 8 overleaf.
7. Reconnect the left side-panel and leave the service program.
0 RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGENi
917 - 281 Page 2
If the ABL gasmixer is not running correctly after replacement of the membrane pump:
8. Minimize the start up time by selecting the time saving settings in the
service program (Rinse only at power on) and switch the ABL off and on.
9. Select the gas mixerservice programandstart theairpump (gas mixeron).

If the gas mixer is still not running correctly the membrane pump may be
defective and should be replaced.
IMPORTANT: The potentiometers on the gas mixer control board need no adiustment in
connection with replacement of the membrane pump (only necessary if the
pressure transducers or the gas mixer control board has been replaced). 0
-
SERVICE NOTES
917-282 Instrument: ABL500 June 11,1993
Subject: Rubber tubes 840-043 and 841-759.
Background: In the ABL500 the SBS solution is preheated by having the tube, from the SBS
bottle to LS5, placed in a grove in the thermostatted plate for the measuring
chamber. The same is the case for the tube 841-759 from V4 to the LS3 housing/
preheater 3 (no. 23 on the drawing 22523-A4 in the service manual).
The groves in the plate have been widened and the geometri changed. The
diameter of the rubber tube has been increased at the same time. This change
was introduced in the production in the summer of 1990.
Unfortunatelly this means that the the tubes 840-043 and 841-759 now supplied
as spare parts can not go into the groves in older ABL500s which have the narrow
groves in the thermostatted plate.
A new tube, code number 840-l 04, is introduced for replacement of 840-043 and
841-759 in the above-mentioned places.
The new tube is only for use in old ABLs with the narrow grove.
If replacing the tube for the SBS bottle and the V4/LS3 housing in older ABL500s
with the narrow grove, use the tube 840-l 04.
To distinguish between where to use 840-043 or 840-l 04 please see the sketch
below, which shows the difference in the outlook of the groves in the thermostatted
plates.
Do not use the thinner tube 840-104 in newer ABL5XXs with the wide grove
as the heat transfer from the plate to the tube will not be optimal.
Spare part: Rubber tube 0.8/2mm 840-l 04
Documentation: Discard the pages SERVICE NOTES-i/2 and lO.l-25/26 in the ABLSOO service
- manual and replace with the revised pages enclosed with this Service Note.
Thermostatted plate: Thermostatted plate:

I
eb
,)
1
Old type with the narrow grove. New type with the wide grove.
Use rubber tube 840-l 04. Use rubber tube 840-043.
RADIOMETER-
0
COPENHAGENi
SERVICE NOTES
917 - 283 Instrument: ABLSO June 17,1993
Subject ABLSO Software Revision
Background We have found some software errors in the present version of the software,
version 1 .OO. The errors are:
Printed parameters (on PRSl5 or ticket printer) does not correspond with the
parameters selected in setup and displayed.
Selected Displayed Printed
HC03 and ABE HC03 and ABE HC03 and ABE

HC03 and SBE HC03 and SBE HC03 and ABE
SBC and ABE SBC and ABE SBC and SBE
SBC and SBE SBC and SBE SBC and SBE
Manual printout of the measurement result has an incorrect printing date if the
printout is called at a later date than the actual time of the measurement. The
printed date was incorrectly set equal to the measurement date.
Calibration results for pH (low and high) is always displayed and printed as
4.47xxxxxxxxxxxxx.
The error occurs if you interrupt a normal cold start up after having upgraded
to software version 1 .OO by removing the top of the thermostatted box prior to
the startup rinse. The symptom is caused by the fact that the two values are
not properly initialized during startup.
This error may be remedied by letting the ABLSO perform an uninterrupted
cold startup or by using the Clear all RAM facility.
In the Gas mixer check service program the CO* valve was not opened
when activating key 3 (Gas mixer on). This caused the gas mixer to mal-
function in the service program.
Implementation These errors have been corrected in the new software version 1 .OlG and 1 .Ol J
(see overleaf) which is included in ABL50 of Run 16 onwards.
The following instruments of earlier Runs have been modified prior to shipment
from Copenhagen:
140R0013N001 140R0013N005 140R0014N006 140R0015N005

140R0013N003 140R0013N006 140R0014N010
140R0013N004 140R0014N004 140R0015N002
RADIOMETER-
I _I .
COPENHAGEN-
917 - 283 Page 2
Action We recommend that the software is upgraded to version 1 .Ol when it is conven-
ient. Please refer to the service manual, Section 2.17, Page 5 for the upgrade
procedure.
Parts The Memory Cards containing the new software are available from stock under
the following part numbers:
914-001 English/Japanese, Vl .Ol J

914-006 English/German, Vl .Ol G
On receipt of the new Memory Cards, please return your version 1 .OO to
RADIOMETER DISTRIBUTION A/S for reuse.
Documentation Please:
Discard the existing Service Notes sheet (survey of service notes included in
the manual), and insert instead the sheet enclosed with this service note.
Insert this front page in the Service Notes section in front of the service manual.
Discard the existing sheet, Section 9.4, Pages 5 and 6, and insert instead the
sheet enclosed with this service note.
a 1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Introduction
The ABL500 is a fully automated blood gas analyzer which measures pH, pCOp and p02 on liquid samples
and pC02 and p02 on gas samples.
The ABL50 measures the same parameters as ABL500, but on liquid samples only.
In addition to the above parameters the ABL510 measures tHb and s02., and ABL520 tHb, ~02, MetHb and
COHb.
The ABL505 measures pH, pCO2, pO2 and electrolytes K+, Na+, and Ca++ or Cl-.
Gas Mixer
The Gas Mixer produces three gas mixtures using of pure COP (from a cylinder) and surrounding
atmospheric air (drawn in by means of a membrane pump). The gas mixtures are used for calibration of
the two gas electrodes pCOp and pOz and for flushing the inlet system. The gas mixtures and their use are
outlined below:
Gas 1: 5.61% CO2 and 19.76% 02, 45 ml/min;
used for the first point calibration of both gas electrodes and for flushing the inlet system,
Gas 2: 11.22% COP and 18.58% Oz, 45 ml/min;
used for the second point calibration of the pC02 electrode, and
Gas 3: 100% CO2 from cylinder, 40 mllmin;
used for zero-point calibration of the p0, electrode.
The gas mixer is only running, that is, producing gas mixtures when an activity needing gasses is taking
place in the Wet Section. This is to minimize the CO2 consumption.
A block diagram of the Gas Mixer is given in Figure 8.2.1.
Wet Section and electrode chambers
Introduction
The wet section is found in the front part of the base unit. All parts which may contain liquid (tubings,
reference well etc.) are placed on the front side of the wet section mounting plate, whereas all the electronics
( such as pump motors , wires and PCBs) are placed on the rear side. This is to prevent a liquid spillage
from damaging any electronics.
Three principle diagrams for the wet section are given in section (ABL500/50, ABL51 O/520 and ABL505)
are given in section 8.1 .l.
Thermostatted Box
The heart of the thermostatted box is the electrode chamber which include the three electrodes, pH, pC02
and p0, in the left branch and up to three electrolyte electrodes in the right branch (ABL505).
All liquids and gasses on which the ABL is to perform measurements (during measurementsorcalibrations)
are thermostatted to 37YX0.1C to assure correct measurement conditions (human conditions).
Thermostatting of the samples is carried out by a number of preheaters (active and passive). The
thermostatted box itself is thermostatted using a heating foil on rear of the thermostatted box mounting plate
which also functions as a passive preheater for the SBS and rinse solutions.
Outsidethe thermostatted box are two active preheaters, one heating both rinse solution and sample before
it enters the main valve and one between the main valve and the electrode chamber.
REVISED 93.01 .I5 1-l

GENERAL INFORMATION
0
Optical system (ABL510/520 only)

The optical system includes a light source, a hemolyzer unit in which the measurement cuvette is placed,
and a monochromator unit. The light source is controlled to provide a constant light intensity. The hemolyzer
unit is thermally coupled to the heated base plate of the wet section and is physically located in the
thermostatted box (the temperature of the sample will be 37 C *l C. The function of the monochromator
unit is to split the light which is not absorbed by the blood sample into a continuous spectrum so that the
light intensity transferred at specific wavelenghts may be measured.
Liquid flow
The liquid and gas flow in the wet section is controlled by two pumps which determine flow speed and
direction. The flow path itself is controlled by five valves and a main valve with 9 positions. The flow is
monitored using five liquid sensors.
Electronics
The electronics of the ABL is built-up of a number of intelligent PCBs (including a CPU) which means that
the computer power is distributed. The main function of the various PC& is described briefly below. A block
diagram of the electronics is given in Figure 7.1 or 7.2.
Standard PCBs:
Wet Section Control PCB

This PCB is connected in the Internal Ring Network and performs the control and monitoring of the function
of the wet section. It is built up around a 8032 CPU. The PCB may receive a command from the Main
Computer PCB such as perform a total calibration. Then the Wet Section Control PCB carries out the
necessary control actions in the wet section. It continuously monitors the function and reports the status
to the Main Computer PCB. The PCB is mounted vertically behind the Wet Section.
Electrode Preamplifier PCBs

Each of the leadless electrodes are connected to the Wet Section Control PCBvia an Electrode Preamplifier
PCB. The PCBs are situated directly on top of the individual electrodes and perform an amplification of the
electrode signal and function, in addition, as impedance converters.
Wet Section Distribution PCB

This PCB is used as an interconnection PCB between the Wet Section Control PCB and the electro-
mechanical parts of the Wet Section. As its name indicates, the PCB mainly includes plugs and connectors.
It does, however, also include the LEDs and phototransistors for the liquid sensors.
Gas Mixer Interface PCB

This PCB is connected to the Wet Section Control PCB and functions as an interface between the
electronics of the Wet Section Control PCB and the electromechanics of the Gas Mixer. It includes drivers
for the pump and valves and monitors for the barometric pressure, air flow, and COP pressure transducers.
0
l-2 REVISED 93.01 .I5
e GENERAL INFORMATION
Power Supply
This PCB performs two functions. One, to supply voltages - it receives the AC voltages from the secondary
of the mains transformer, passes them through fuses, regulates two voltages (+12.1 V and +5 V for the Main
Computer PCB) and transfer the remaining AC voltages directly to the PCBs. Another, to be an
interconnection PCB for the Internal Ring Network.
ABL500/505/51 O/520 PCBs:
Main Computer PCB

This PCB is the central board in the instrument. It performs the overall control and monitoring. The PCB
includes two CPUs; a 80186 (main processor) which controls and monitors the activities taking place in the
instrument, it interfaces to the onboard RAM memory (1 Mbyte fortemporary storage and forstorage of data
to the CRT screen), the watch, the DUART, and the I/O ports. In addition, it interfaces to the second CPU,
a 8032 (I/O processor), which is dedicated for some time-consuming input/output functions to/from the Main
Computer PCB (e.g. softkeys and alpha numerical keyboard). In ABL500/51 O/520 of Run 50/8/8 onwards
the PCB also includes 1.3 Mbytes FEPROM for storing the software programs and, in addition, the floppy
disk controller.
Main Memory PCB (ABL500/510/520 below Run 50/8/8 only)

This PCB is connected directly to the Main Computer PCB and includes the software for the main CPU. The
software is contained in nine 128 kbyte chips (a total of 1 .154 Mbyte). In addition, the PCB includes a 32
kbyte E2PROM chip for storage of user entered data.
CRT-Deflection PCB
This PCB is connected directly to the Main Computer PCB. On the basis of the synchronization signals
received from the Main Computer PCB, the PCB generates the signals for controlling the electron beam
of the CRT screen.
Video Amplifier PCB

This PCB is connected to the CRT-Deflection PCB and includes an amplifier for the video signal. The PCB
is physically mounted on the base of the CRT tube.
0
-
Printer Control PCB
The function of the Printer Control PCB is to receive data from the Main Computer PCB via the Internal Ring
Network and print it on the therm0 printer. The Printer Control PCB includes its own 8OC535 CPU.
Numerical Keyboard PCB

This PCB is connected directly to the Main Computer PCB and includes an interface to the membrane
keypad and the finger wheel situated in the Numerical Keyboard.
Softkeypad
This keypad is connected directly to the Main Computer PCB and is physically situated below the CRT
screen.
Monochromator Interface (ABL510/520 only)

This PCB controls the lamp and the hemolyzer of the optical system used for measuring the oxy parameters.
In addition, it collects and amplifies the current signals obtained from the photo diodes situated in the
Monochromator Unit. The PCB is connected to the Wet Section Control PCB.
a REVISED 93.01.15 l-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
0
ABLSO PCBs:
Main Computer PCB

This PCB is the central board in the instrument. It performs the overall control and monitoring. The PCB
includes one CPU; a 80188EB which controls and monitors the activities taking place in the instrument. It
interfaces to the onboard RAM memory (128 Kbyte Static), FPROM memory (512 Kbyte), Memory Card
(maximum 512 Kbyte), Real Time Clock and error LEDs. Further more it contains drivers fortwo serial ports,
one parallel port and the Ring Net which controls the Wet Section, Keypad with Display and optional RSl50
interface.
Keypad with Display PCB

This PCB controls the Display, Keyboard and the communication to the Main Computer via the Ring Net.
It contains a 8OC32 CPU which interfaces to the onboard RAM memory (32 Kbyte Static), PROM memory
(64 Kbyte) and Ring Net driver. Further more it contains, LCD Display Power Supply with contrast
adjustment and a Watchdog. 0
Optional PCBs:
Floppy Disk Control PCB (ABL500/510/520 below Run 50/8/8 only)

This PCB controls the floppy disk drive, it transfers data between the Main Computer PCB and the floppy
disk, and it monitors how much space is left on the disk. The Floppy Disk Control PCB and Floppy Disk Drive
are situated in the top part of the ABL.
RSl50, Serial Output PCB (ABL50/500/505/510/520)

This PCB provides an RS-232-C connector which may be used for connecting the ABL to an external
computer.
FlSllOO, Serial Interface PCB (ABL500/505/510/520)

This PCB provides three RS-232-C connectors which may be used for connecting the ABL to external
computers, printers (e.g. ticket printer), etc. The connectors may also be configured to be inputs for other
instruments, e.g. the ICA2. 0
0
I-4 REVISED 93.01.15
2. CHECKOUT AND ADJUSTMENT
introduction
This section describes how the ABL is checked and realigned.
The ABL must have been switched on for half an hour before performing any of the described
checkouts and adjustments.
Test Equipment A sheet denoted Test Equipment in front of this Service Manual gives an
overview of the special test equipment needed for servicing the ABL. The test equipment needed for
the individual procedures is mentioned in the various paragraphs.
Test equipment such as the PHA860 must be grounded to the ABL during the checkouts and
alignments.
PHA860 polarity switch On PHA860s with serial numbers from 29R19N01, the polarity of the
output voltage is indicated underneath the POLARITY switch. On PHA860s with serial numbers below
29R19N01, the POLARITY switch should be set to position (ANION) - fl if a positive output voltage is
required and to position M + (CATION) if a negative output voltage is required.
PHA860 output voltage Always use a DVM to fine adjust the output voltage of the PHA860.
Tolerances In the procedures where the electronics may be adjusted, it will be noted that
two tolerances are included, one for checkout and one for adjustment. The checkout tolerance is the
broadest to allow for drift during operation which may occur after adjustment.
CAUTIONS Carry out only the adjustments described in this Section, unless instructed to do
so by the Service Department at Radiometer Medical A/S.
Repairs must not be attempted on any M modules, without specific authori-
zation or instructions from the Service Department at Radiometer Medical A/S.
Revised 91.04.05 2-l

2.1 POWER SUPPLIES
0
Please note that no adjustments are required for
the voltage supplies, only checkouts.
Mains Supply
1. Check the mains supply according to the Setting [V]
(nominal) Range [VI
setting and the table:
Please note that if the mains supply is offset 240 204 - 264
by e.g. +3 % from its nominal value, all AC 220 187-244
voltages and unregulated DC voltages will 200 170-220
also be offset by +3 %. The procedures for 140 119- 134
these voltages imply that the mains supply is 120 102- 132
equal to its nominal value. 100 85-110
Power Supply PCB 901-786

The voltages below refer to ABLSOO runs 1 through 49 and ABL510/520 runs 1 through 7.
The check limits for the supplies assume that the ABL has been switched on for at least half an hour and
that no activities are taking place in the wet section, printer, etc.
1. Fold down the right-side panel including the Power Supply PCB (two screws on the rear side).
2. Check for 18.5 VAc f 2.0 VAC between J2l4 and J2/5.
3. Check for +5.10 V f 0.15 V between TP2 (+5.1 V, SENSEl) and TP3 (0 V, SENSE2). This is the
voltage actually applied to the Main Computer PCB.
4. Check that the voltage between TPl (+5.1 V) and TP4 (0 V) is not above 5.50 V. This is the voltage
applied to the cable connected to the Main Computer PCB.
(The difference between the voltages obtained in items 3 and 4 expresses the power loss in the cable from
the Power Supply and the Main Computer PCBs).
5. Check for +12.0 V +0.5 V/-O.3 V between TP7 (+12 V) and TP8 (0 V).
6. Check for 29.2 VAc f 3 VAc between J2/2 and J2/3 (AC voltage for the Printer Control PCB).
7. Check for 29.2 VAC f 3 VAc between J2/6 and J2/7 (AC voltage for the Wet Section Control and Gas
Mixer PCBs).
8. ABL510/520 only. Check for 11 .O V ,,c f 1.1 VAC between Jl/5 and Jl/6 (AC voltage for the
Monochromator Interface PCB).
0 REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.1 - 1

POWER SUPPLIES
c
The limits given in item 9 assume that the supplies are not loaded. In case an option is mounted, the limits
are instead 9.6 V,c f 1 .O VA,.
9. Check for 9.9 VAC f 1 .O VAc between J2/9 and J2/10 (AC voltage for the Option 1 PCB).
Check for 9.9 VAC f 1 .O V,,c between J2/11 and J2/12 (AC voltage for the Option 2 PCB).
Check for 9.9 VAc rt 1 .O VAC between Jl/l and Jl/2 (AC voltage for the Option 3 PCB).
Check for 9.9 VAc f 1 .O V,, between Jl/3 and Jl/4 (AC voltage for the Option 4 PCB).
Power Supply PCB 902-154

The voltages below refer to ABLSOO of run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 of run 8 onwards, ABL505 and
ABL50.
1. Fold down the right-side panel including the Power Supply PCB (two screws on the rear side).
0
2. Check for 18.0 VAC f 2.0 VAC between J2/4 and J2/5.
3. Check for +5.10 V f 0.15 V between TP2 (+5.1 V, SENSEl) and TP3 (0 V, SENSE2). This is the
voltage actually applied to the Main Computer PCB.
4. Check that the voltage between TPl (+5.1 V) and TP4 (0 V) is not above 5.50 V. This is the voltage
applied to the cable connected to the Main Computer PCB.
(The difference between the voltages obtained in items 3 and 4 expresses the power loss in the cable from
the Power Supply and the Main Computer PCBs).
5. Check for +12.0 V +0.5 V/-O.3 V between TP7 (+I2 V) and TP8 (0 V).
6. Not ABLSO. Check for 31 .O VAC f 3.0 VAC between J2/2 and J2/3 (AC voltage for the Printer Control
PCB).
7. Check for 28.0 VAc f 3.0 VAC between J2/6 and JZY7 (AC voltage for the Wet Section Control and 0
Gas Mixer PCBs).
8. ABL510/520 only. Check for 11 .O VAc f 1.5 VAc between J2/11 and J2/12 (AC voltage for the
Monochromator Interface PCB).
The limits given in item 9 assume that the supplies are not loaded. In case an option is mounted, the limits
are instead 9.7 V,c f 1 .O VAC.
9. Check for 10.0 V,c f 1 .O VAC between J2/9 and 52/l 0 (AC voltage for the Option PCBs).
0
2.1 - 2 REVISED 92.11 .Ol
POWER SUPPLIES
0
Wet Section Control PCB 901-774
Please note that ground for the voltages mentionen below is found at J24/1.
1. Check for +33 V +9 V/-5 V at J24/2 (supply voltage for pumps and main valve).
2. Check for +23.4 V f 1.2 V at J24/3 (supply voltage for valves).
3. Check for +15 V f 0.7 V at J24/4 (positive supply voltage for liquid sensor and ND converter circuits).
4. Check for +5000 mV f 20 mV at J24/5 (reference voltage for V/F and D/A converters).
5. Check for +lO.O V f 0.6 V at J24/6 (supply voltage for measuring chamber light).
6. Check for +5.0 V f 0.5 V at J24/7 (supply voltage for digital circuits).
0
7. Check for -15 V f 0.7 V at J2418 (negative supply voltage for liquid sensor and ND converter circuits).
Wet Section Control PCB 902-157

Please note that ground for the voltages mentionen below is found at J24/1.
1. Check for +33 V +7 V/-5 V at J24/2 (supply voltage for pumps and main valve).
2. Check for +23.4 V f 1.2 V at J24/3 (supply voltage for valves).
3. Check for +15 V f 0.7 V at J24/4 (positive supply voltage for liquid sensor and ND converter circuits).
4. Check for +5000 mV f 20 mV at J24/5 (reference voltage for V/F and D/A converters).
5. Check for +9.6 V f 0.5 V at J24/6 (supply voltage for measuring chamber light).
6. Check for +5.0 V f 0.5 V at J24/7 (supply voltage for digital circuits).
0
7. Check for -15 V f 0.7 V at J24/8 (negative supply voltage for liquid sensor and ND converter circuits).
6. Check for +18 V +4 V/-2 V at J24/10 (supply voltage for fan).
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.1 - 3

2.2 Electrode channels
0
Introduction
Please note that no adjustments are required for the pH, K+, Na+, Ca++/CI- and pC0, electrode channels.
All voltages, gains, and offsets are preadjusted at the factory. For the pD, channel a zero point calibration
may be performed.
Only checkouts are to be carried out - if the checkouts fail, the defective part should be replaced.
The K+, Na+ and Ca++/Cl- channels refer to ABL505 only.
p0, channel
A zero point calibration of the @*channel MUST be carried out in case the pD, Preamplifier Unit or the Wet
Section Control PCB has been replaced - or when necessary.
0 pH, K+, Na+, Ca+*/CI- and pC0, channels

Please note the electrode voltages indicated on the display in the service program, are the true electrode
voltages.
The software assumes that the entire electrode chain is connected (Preamplifier Unit and Wet Section
Control PCB). When applying for example -200 mV to the preamplifier using the dummy electrode and the
PHA860, the display will read -200 mV. If the preamplifier isdisconnected and the -200 mV is instead applied
directly to the plug on the Wet Section Control PCB, the display will read only -20 mV. This is due to the
fact that the preamplifier has a x10 gain which is now bypassed, see below.
Preamplifier ; Buffer A/D converter
++-D_rl
Electrode plug
I
Preamplifier : Wet Section Control Board
PHA860 setting
Please read the paragraph concerning setting and adjusting the PHA860 in Section 2 prior to checking the
electrode channels.
l
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.2-l
ELECTRODE CHANNELS
pH, K+, Na*, Ca++/CI- Channels
Quick check
1 Enter the electrode check(out) service program.
2 Check that the counter values (#) displayed for 0 Vr and 2.5 Vr are within limits:
0 Vr: [21850 ; 274001 (#)
2.5 Vr: [46800 ; 584001 (#)
3 Remove the pH electrode (respective K+,Na+, Ca++/CI- electrodes) and instead mount the dummy
electrode (Code 902-049) for connection to a PHA860. Ground the PHA860 to the ABL.
4 Set the PHA860 to 0.0 mV (source resistance 0 0) and check that the displayed electrode signal is
0.0 mV *I .O mV (zero point).
Then change the source resistance to 1000 MQ and check that the displayed electrode signal does -
not change by more than 1 .O mV.
5 Set the PHA860 to -200.0 mV (source resistance 0 Q) and check that the displayed electrode signal
is -200.0 *3.0 mV (sensitivity).
Then change the source resistance to 1000 MR and check that the displayed electrode signal does
6 Exit from the electrode checkout program, remove the dummy electrode, remount the pH electrode
and reassemble the ABL.
Thorough check
1 Withdraw the Wet Section to its service position.
2 Fold down the Wet Section Control PCB (two screws on rear).
Wet Secfion Control PCB only

3a
3b
Disconnect the pH Preamplifier from the Wet Section Control PCB (J16).
Disconnect the K+ Preamplifier from the Wet Section Control PCB (J17).
0
3c Disconnect the Na+ Preamplifier from the Wet Section Control PCB (J18).
3d Disconnect the Ca++/CI- Preamplifier from the Wet Section Control PCB (J19).
4 Locate J22 on the Wet Section Control PCB and check the following voltages:
(Ground is at pin 2)
Pin 1: +5.70 V f 0.5 V (positive supply voltage).
Pin 3: - 5.70 V f 0.5 V (negative supply voltage).
Pin 4: +2500 mV f 10 mV (reference voltage for A/D converter).
6a (pH): Using a PHA860, apply 0.0 mV to J16/1 (Ground to J16/2) and check that the displayed
electrode signal is 0.0 mV f 1 .O mV (zero point).
2.2-2 REVISED 92.11 .Ol

l ELECTRODE CHANNELS
6b (K+): Using a PHA860, apply 0.0 mV to Jl7/1 (Ground to Jl7/2) and check that the displayed
6c (Na+): Using a PHA860, apply 0.0 mV to Jl8/1 (Ground to J18/2) and check that the displayed
6d (Ca+*/Cl-): Using a PHA860, apply 0.0 mV to Jig/l (Ground to Jl9/2) and check that the displayed
7a (pH): Then apply - 2000 mV to Jl6/1 (Ground is at Jl6/2) and check that the displayed electrode
signal is - 200.0 mV f 1 .O mV (sensitivity).
7b (K+): Then apply - 2000 mV to Jl7/1 (Ground is at Jl7/2) and check that the displayed electrode
0 signal is -200.0 mV f 1 .O mV (sensitivity).
7c (Na+): Then apply - 2000 mV to Jl8/1 (Ground is at Jl8/2) and check that the displayed
electrode signal is - 200.0 mV f 1 .O mV (sensitivity).
7d (Ca+*/CI-): Then apply - 2000 mV to Jl9/1 (Ground is at Jl9/2) and check that the displayed
electrode signal is - 200.0 mV f 1 .O mV (sensitivity).
Wet Section Control PCB and Preamplifier

& (PH): Reconnect the pH Preamplifier to the Wet Section Control PCB (J16).
8b (K+): Reconnect the K+ Preamplifier to the Wet Section Control PCB (J17).
6 c (Na*): Reconnect the Na+ Preamplifier to the Wet Section Control PCB (J18).
6d (Ca*+/Cl-): Reconnect the Ca++/CI- Preamplifier to the Wet Section Control PCB (Jig).
9 Carry out the quick check described on the previous page.
pC0, Channel
0 Quick check
2 Check that the counter values (#) displayed for 0 Vr and 2.5 Vr are within limits: I
0 Vr: (21850 ; 274001 (#)
2.5 Vr: [46800 ; 584001 (#).
3 Remove the pC0, electrode and instead mount the dummy electrode (Code 902-049) for connection
to a PHA860. Ground the PHA860 to the ABL.
4 Set the PHA860 to 0.0 mV (source resistance 0 Q) and check that the displayed electrode signal is
0.0 mV f 1 .O mV (zero point).
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.2-3

ELECTRODE CHANNELS
0
5 Set the PHA860 to - 200.0 mV (source resistance 0 Q) and check that the displayed electrode signal
is -200.0 f 3.0 mV (sensitivity).
6 Exit from the electrode checkout program, remove the dummy electrode, remount the pC0, electrode
Thorough check
1 Withdraw the Wet Section to its service position (nine screws marked A on Drawing 22523-A4).
2 Fold down the Wet Section Control PCB (two screws on rear).
Wet Section Control PC6 only

3 Disconnect the pC0, Preamplifier from the Wet Section Control PCB (J14). 0
4 Locate J15 on the Wet Section Control PCB and check the following voltages:
a) Pin 1: +5.70 V f 0.5 V (positive supply voltage).
b) Pin 3: - 5.70 V f 0.5 V (negative supply voltage).
c) Pin 4: +2500 mV f 10 mV (reference voltage for A/D converter).
6 Using a PHA860, apply 0.0 mV to J14/1 (Ground to J14/2) and check that the displayed electrode
signal is 0.0 mV f 1.0 mV (zero point).
7 Then apply -2000 mV to J14/1 (Ground is at J14/2) and check that the displayed electrode signal is
-200.0 mV f 1 .O mV (sensitivity).

8 Reconnect the pC0, Preamplifier to the Wet Section Control PCB (J14). 0
/--
p0, Channel
Quick check
2 Check that the values displayed for the following parameters are within the limits given:
0 Vr: [425 ; 9001 (#)
- 2.5 Vr: [31800 ; 39650](#)
Pol-r: I-1 200.00 ; -1250.00) (mV)
Pol-e: [-625.00 ; -635.00] (mV)
Batt: [-2700.00 ; -3400.00] (mV).
0
2.2-4 REVISED 92.11 .Ol
ELECTRODE CHANNELS
0
3 Remove the p0, electrode and check that the displayed electrode signal is 0 pA f 15 pA (zero point).
4 Mount the dummy electrode (Code 902-050, 100 MQ resistor) in place of the p0, electrode, and
check that the displayed electrode signal is +6300 pA f 100 pA (sensitivity). Items 3 and 4 verify that
the p0, Preamplifier is working correctly.
5 Exit from the electrode checkout program, remove the dummy electrode, remount the p0, electrode
Thorough check
1 Withdraw the Wet Section to its service position (nine screws marked A on Drawing 22523-A4).
2 Fold down the Wet Section Control PCB (two screws).
.o Wet Section Control PCB only

3 Disconnect the p0, Preamplifier from the Wet Section Control PCB (J12).
4 Wet Section Control PCB:

Locate J13 on the Wet Section Control PCB and check the following voltages:
a) Pin 1: +I 0.5 V f 0.5 V (positive supply voltage).
b) Pin 3: - 11 .O V f 1 .O V (negative supply voltage).
c) Pin 4: - 2500 mV f IO mV (reference voltage for A/D converter).
d) Pin 6: - 630.0 mV f 5.0 mV (polarization voltage for the electrode).
6 Check that the displayed value for the -1.2 V reference voltage (pol-r) is -1225 mV f 25 mV.
7 Check that the displayed battery voltage (Batt) is 3000 mV +400/- 300 mV.
r
0 8 Set the PHA860 to -630.0 mV (source resistance 0 SI), and apply the voltage to Jl2/1 (Ground to Jl2/
2) and check that the displayed electrode signal is 0 pA f 50 pA (zero point).
9 Then set the PHA860 to -1260 mV (source resistance 0 a) and and check that the displayed electrode
signal is 6300 pA f 100 pA (sensitivity).

10 Reconnect the p0, Preamplifier to the Wet Section Control PCB (J12).
11 Enter the p0, zero cal(ibration) service program.
12 Remove the top part of the thermostatted box and disconnect the p0, Preamplifier from the p0,
electrode.
13 Press Calibr(ate). After approximately four seconds a new offset current is displayed - check that
this value is within: [6000.00 ; 6350.00) (PA).
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.2-5
ELECTRODE CHANNELS
.
14 Press Save if the value is within limits. (Please note that if Save is pressed when the new offset
current is outside [SOOO.OO ; 7050.00], a ? will be displayed and the new offset current will be
deleted.
2.2-6 REVISED 92.11 .Ol

2.3 TEMPERATURE (WET SECTION)
0
Please note that no adjustmentsare requiredfortheTemperature Channels. All voltages, gains and
offsets are preadjusted at the factory. Do not remove the cover of the thermostatted box.
Hint: Displayed temperature < 2 C: The NTC resistor is open or disconnected.

Displayed temperature > 50 C: The NTC resistor is shorted.
Quick check
1 Enter the temperature check(out) service program.
2 Check that the values displayed for the following parameters are within the limits given:
0 Vr: [5950 ; 92001 (W
5 Vr: [36000 ; 551751 (#)
Ref-37: [26900 ; 445001 (#I
Ref-37 is the reference resistor for the temperature regulation circuit, 6.1 kL.
This check verifies that the reference resistor and the A/D converter are working.
3 ABLSOO runs l-49, ABL510/520 runs 1-7:

Check that the voltage displayed for V-Supp is within: [28.00 ; 42.001 [VI.
This check verifies that the supply for the heating elements is OK.
3a ABLCOO run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 run 8 onwards., ABL505, ABLSO:

Check that the voltage displayed for V-Supp is within: [28.00 ; 40.001 WI.
This check verifies that the supply for the heating elements is OK.
4 Check that the temperatures displayed for Block and Sense are both within 37.00 C *O.lO C.
Check also that the difference between the two temperatures is less than 0.05 C.
During a warm up period or in case of an error, the temperature difference could be larger.
5 Check that the temperatures displayed for Heatl and Heat2 are both 37.00 C *l .OO C.
0 6 Exit from the temperature checkout program.
7 Enter Service Program no. 9 Check of Various Modules.

Start and stop the fan to verify its function.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.3-1
TEMPERATURE (WET SECTION)
0
Thorough check
Withdraw the Wet Section to its service position (nine screws markedA on drawing 22523-A4).
Fold down the Wet Section Control PCB (two screws on rear).
ABLSW nrns 1_49/ABL510/520 runs 1-7:

(Ground is at pin 1).
a) Pin 5: +5000 mV *20 mV (reference voltage for ND converter).
b) pin 2: [28.0 V ; 42.0 v] (supply voltage for heating elements).
3a ABL5W run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 run 8 onwards, ABL505, ABLSO:

(Ground is at pin 1).
a) Pin 5: +5000 mV *20 mV (reference voltage for A/D converter).
(supply voltage for heating elements).
0
b) pin 2: [28.0 V ; 40.0 V]
4 Enter the temperature checkout program (wet section service program no. 2).
5 Locate Jl on the Wet Section Distribution PCB (AUX), connect a 6k100 0.05 % resistor (Code 152-
332) between J1/2 and J1/3 and check that the displayed value for AUX is 37.00 C *0.07 C (check
of temperature circuit).
6 Disconnect Preheater 1 and Preheater 2 from the Wet Section Distribution PCB and check that the
impedance between pin 3 and 6 of the respective preheater is 180 f 54 L.
7 Proceed with the quick check described on the previous page.
0
2.3 - 2 REVISED 92.11 .Ol
2.4 WASTE
0
Introduction
Two detection systems exist. One is used in ABL5CKf runs l-49, ABL5101520 runs 1-7 and is based on
a thermal conductivity measurement of the waste container and compare the thermal condition of two
sensors. The necessary electronic hardware is mounted on a separate interface board. The system needs
calibration if the Waste Interface Board or the Wet Section Control Board are replaced.
The second system, which is used in ABLSOO run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 run 8 onwards, ABL505
ABL58, is also based on measurement of thermal conductivity, but uses a different algorithm and one
sensor only. The necesary hardware is mounted on the Wet Section Control Board. The system is
calibration- free.
ABL5W run l-49 and ABL510/520 run l-7:
0 Please note that it may take up to 10 minutes from the time the status of the waste container has changed
until the ABL gives the correct indication.
In the procedures below, the Waste Empty Constant is referred to as WEC and corresponds to VWAsrs
(in mV) divided by 10.
Hint: VwaSte c 500 mV: Waste detector disconnected or defective.

VwaSte > 4500 mV: Waste detector defective.
Checkout
1 Enter the waste calibration program (wet section service program no. 5).
i
2 Wiih an empty waste container, check (after 10 minutes) that the displayed waste sensor value is
within the range:
500 c V < lOvWEC+300 [mV].
3 With a full waste container, check (after 10 minutes) that the displayed waste sensor value is within
the range:
1 OvWEC+300 c V e 4500 [mV]. ,I-
e
4 With removed waste container, check (after 10 minutes) that the displayed waste sensor value is
within the range (same as for an empty waste container):
500 c V < lOvWEC+300 [mV].
5 Withdraw the Wet Section to its service position (nine screws marked A on drawing 22523-A4).
6 Disconnect the waste detector from the Wet Section Distribution PCB at the waste detector end and
check that the value after a short time decreases to below 500 mV (in fact the value will be close to
0 mV). When reconnecting the plug again, make sure that it is correctly oriented.
The limits used in the procedures above are illustrated in the figure overleaf where the WEC as an example
equals 240. The messages empty, full, and bad shown in the figure may be obtained if the procedure
is carried out using the check of various modules (wet section service program no.9) instead.
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.4 - 1

WASTE
0
,..,I
~
0 500
I I I
I I
bad empty full bad
or removed
Calibration
1 Mount an empty waste container.
2 Enter the waste calibration program (wet section service program no. 5).
3 Wait 10 minutes; then press Calibrate to store the new WEC value.
Please note that only VW,,.sTE values in the range from 2200 mV through 3200 mV should be saved.
The acceptable range for VWAsTE is illustrated in the figure on the previous page (thick line).
If the value is outside the limits, the system is probably defective.
0
2.4 - 2 REVISED 92.11 .Ol
WASTE
ABL500 run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 run 8 onwards, ABL505, ABLSO:
Checkout (No calibration is necessary)

1 ABL50: Enter the waste detect check service program.
Other ABLs: Enter the waste calibration service program. Ignore the two upper screen lines
Waste empty constant and Actual waste sensor voltage.
2 The three waste sensor voltages each of which reflects the sensor output at 3 different moments
in the measuring sequence, VT(ambj, VTthighj and VT(~~,,,). The voltages are updated as the heating/
cooling cycle isruns.
All ABLa except ABL50: By pressing the Calibr. softkey the actual waste sensor voltages will
be erased and those obtained during the next measuring sequence will be displayed. (Calbr. is
actually a dummy name as no calibration takes place).
3 Wait a couple of minutes until all 3 waste sensor voltages are redisplayed. It may take between 1
l/2 and 5 l/2 minutes depending where on the actual sensor temperature curve you press the
softkey. Check that the difference between the waste sensor voltage for VT(lo,,,j and VTthighj is in
accordance with the table below, e.g. with an empty waste container and VTtamb.) between 1980 and
2170 mV (ambient temperature between 21 and 27 C) the waste sensor voltage difference should
be between 90 and 185 mV.
If the W sensor values are not as indicated, the sensor orthe Wet Section Control Board are defective
and should be replaced.
Delta waste sensor voltage (VT low - VT high)

Waste container
condition VT(amb.j ~2170 mV 1980 mV<Vr(,,i,S ~2170 mV VT@rnb.)<l980 mV
(t,&l c) (21 C<t,b<27%)
No container mounted* > 200mV > 185 mV ~170 mV
Empty lOO-200mV 90 - 185mV 85-170mV
Full 0-100mV 0-90mV 0-85mV
7 This limit is not used by the software as the uncertainty of the thermal conductivity without waste
container, is too high, i. e. for the ABL, only two waste container conditions exist, empty or full.
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.4 - 3

2.5 GAS MIXER (ELECTRONICS AND MECHANICS)
0
The voltage supplies and the A/D converter for the Gas Mixer signals should be checked before carrying
out any of the checkouts and adjustments of the Gas Mixer which involve the use of the electronics.
Supply Voltages
Please note that no adjustments are required for the voltage supplies which have all been preadjusted at
the factory.
1. On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for between +28.0 and +42.0 V at J24/2 (supply voltage for
the air pump and valves). Ground is at J24/1.
On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for +15.0 V f 0.7 V at J24/4 (positive supply voltage for the
monitor circuits). Ground is at J24/1.
On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for -15.0 V f 0.7 V at J24/8 (negative supply voltage for the
4. On the Gas Mixer Interface PCB, check for + 5000 mV f 20 mV at TPl/i 4 (reference voltage for the
monitor circuits). Ground is at TPl/l.
A/D Converter (on Wet Section Control PCB)

The A/D converter used for the Gas Mixer signals is located on the Wet Section Control PCB.
1. On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for + 5000 mV f 20 mV at J24/5 (reference voltage for the
ND converter). Ground is at J24/1.
2. Enter the Temperature check(out) service program.
0 3. Locate J26 on the Wet Section Control PCB and apply +2300 mV using a PI&60 with the source
resistance set to 0 Sz. Connect +2300 mV to J26/2 and ground to J26/1.
4. Check that the displayed value for V-TEST is:
On 901-774: +2300 mV f 10 mV
On 902-l 57: +715mV*lOmV
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.5-1
2.5 GAS MIXER (ELECTRONICS AND MECHANICS)
0
The voltage supplies and the ND converter for the Gas Mixer signals should be checked before carrying
out any of the checkouts and adjustments of the Gas Mixer which involve the use of the electronics.
Supply Voltages
Please note that no adjustments are required for the voltage supplies which have all been preadjusted at
the factory.
1. On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for between +28.0 and +42.0 Vat J24/2 (supply voltage for
the air pump and valves). Ground is at J24/1.
2. On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for +I 5.0 V f 0.7 V at J24/4 (positive supply voltage for the
0
3. On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for -15.0 V f 0.7 V at J24/8 (negative supply voltage for the
4. On the Gas Mixer Interface PCB, check for + 5000 mV f 20 mV at TP1/14 (reference voltage for the
monitor circuits). Ground is at TPl/l.
A/D Converter (on Wet Section Control PC%)

The A/D converter used for the Gas Mixer signals is located on the Wet Section Control PCB.
1. On the Wet Section Control PCB, check for + 5000 mV f 20 mV at J24/5 (reference voltage for the
A/D converter). Ground is at J24/1.
2. Enter the Temperature check(out) service program.
0 3. Locate J26 on the Wet Section Control PCB and apply +2300 mV using a PHA860 with the source
resistance set to 0 Q. Connect +2300 mV to J26/2 and ground to J26/1.
4. Check that the displayed value for V-TEST is:
On 901-774: +2300 mV f 10 mV
On 902-l 57: +715mV*lOmV
0
GAS MIXER
0
CO, Flow Regulator
This checkout/adjustment should always be carried out in case the CO, flow regulator has been replaced.
Checkout
1. Connect the flow meter (5-l 00 mUmin) as shown in Figure 2.5.1 (left part) below.
Gas Mixer Gas Mixer

I
p+i-1
Exhaust
0
Towe; (Gas 1 + Gas 2)
To wet section
i (Gas 3)
Figure 2.5.1.
2. Enter the Electrode check(out) service program, and press Gas1 (fill); the gas mixer will deliver
Gas1 for 60 seconds.
3. When the gas mixer has stabilized (after 15 seconds), check that the total gas flow (Gas1 + Gas2)
is 90 f 10 mUmin. If outside, skip items 4 and 5 below and jump to the adjustment procedures.
4. Press Stop to stop the gas mixer, if not already stopped automatically. Connect the flow meter (5
100 mUmin) as shown in Figure 2.5.1 (right part) above. Then press Gas3 (fill) to restart the gas
mixer which will now deliver gas3 for 60 seconds.
5. When the gas mixer has stabilized (after 15 seconds), check the flow for 40 f 10 mUmin (please note
that if the gas mixer tester A7303 is used, it will indicate a flow of only 32 mUmin when the flow is
correct -this is due to the fact that the A7303 is calibrated using atmospheric air which has a higher
viscosity than pure COJ.
0
Adjustment
To carry out the adjustment a U-shaped yoke, see Figure 2.5.2 below, should be used.
1 2 m m 1 -> The yoke should be made of 1 S-1.8 mm wire
Figure 2.5.2.
1. Connect the flow meter (5-100 mUmin) as shown in Figure 2.5.1 (left part) above.
2. Enter the Electrode check(out) service program, and press Gas1 (fill); the gas mixer will deliver
Gas1 for 60 seconds.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Oi 2.5 - 3
GAS MIXER
0
3. When the gas mixer has stabilized (after 15 seconds), adjust the CO, flow regulator until the total flow
is 90 f 2 mUmin using the above mentioned yoke. Then checkthe flow of each individual gas mixture
(Gas1 and Gas2) for 45 f IO mUmin.
4. Press Stop to stop the gas mixer, if not already stopped automatically. Connect the flow meter (5
100 mUmin) as shown in Figure 2.51 (right part) above. Then press Gas3 (fill) to restart the gas
mixer which will now deliver gas3 for 60 seconds.
5. When the gas mixer has stabilized (after 15 seconds), check the flow for40 f 10 mUmin (please note
that if the gas mixer tester A7303 is used, it will indicate a flow of only 32 mUmin when the flow is
correct - this is due to the fact that the A7303 is calibrated using atmospheric air which has a higher
viscisity than pure C02).
6. Check and adjust, if necessary, the differential regulator, see Page 7.

0
CO2 Pressure Monitor
The monitor must be checked/adjusted if the CO2 pressure transducer or the CO2 flow regulator has been
replaced.
1. Enter the gas mixer service program.
2. Check that the Con p voltage displayed equals 100 f 30 mV.

If outside, adjust RI 10 on the Gas Mixer Interface PCB until the voltage displayed is 100 f 10 mV.
3. Press Gas mixer on (the gas mixer is turned on) and check that the mean voltage after stabilisation
(15 seconds) is 1900 f 50 mV.
- If the voltage is outside the limits, proceed as follows:
- Check the total flow is 90 f 10 mUmin, see Page 3 of this section (paragraph concerning CO2 0
flow regulator).
Adjust, if outside limits.
- Check the differential pressure for < 0.7 mm water column, see page 6 of this section
(paragraph concerning differential pressure regulator).
Adjust, if outside limits. L
- Then repeat the COP pressure monitor adjustment from item 1.
- Adjust RI 13 on the Gas Mixer lnteface PCB until the mean voltage displayed is 1900 f 10 mV.
4. If RI 13 has been adjusted in item 3, press Gas mixer off and Gas mixer on (to turn the gas mixer
off and then on again), and then check after stabilisation (15 seconds) that the voltage is 1900 f 20
mV.
0
2.5 - 4 REVISED 92.11 .Ol
GAS MIXER
0
Air Flow
The air flowthrough the pump which should be 180 mUmin is measured indirectly by measuring the amount
of air taken in from the surroundings (only 82 of the 180 mUmin is applied to the mixing coils, whereas the
remaining 98 mUmin are recirculated; this means that 82 mUmin is taken in from the surroundings, see
Figure 2.5.3 below).
82 mllmin
from surroundings
II I-R- Differential
pressure regulator
Figure 2.5.3.
Checkout
This checkout should always be carried out in case any part of the atmospheric air side has been replaced.
1. Remove the screws securing the gas mixer, and then turn the gas mixer inside the ABL (this is to
obtain access to the air exhaust hole of the differential pressure regulator which is found on the rear
side of the gas mixer when looking at it through the left side of the ABL).
2. Loosen the screw securing the air exhaust cover plate and then turn the plate away from the exhaust
hole.
3. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2.5.4 below (use as short tubings as possible).
82 f 10 ml/min Differential
b pressure regulator
Figure 2.5.4.
4. Enter the gas mixer service program and press Gas mixer on to start the gas mixer (delivers Gasl).
5. When the gas mixer has stabilized (after 15 seconds), check the flow for 82 f 10 mUmin.
If within limits, exit from the service program, remove the test equipment and reassemble the ABL.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.5 - 5
GAS MIXER
0
If outside limits, check the mean air flow voltage for 1900 f 50 mV.
- If the air flow voltage is within limits, adjust the air flow monitor as described below.
- If the air flow voltage is outside limits, check the air pump speed for a value below 1200 rpm - if
above, replace the membrane pump.
- Check the gas mixer for disconnected, blocked or leaking tubings; check filters, stepping motor,
air intake on the differential pressure regulator, membrane inside the differential pressure
regulator, pressure transducer, Gas Mixer Interface and Wet Section Control PC&.
Air Flow Monitor
Checkout and Adjustment
1. Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2.5.4 above (use as short tubings as possible). 0
2. Enter the gas mixer service program.
3. Check that the air flow voltage displayed equals 100 f 30 mV (with the gas mixer off).
If outside limits, adjust R210 on the Gas Mixer Interface PCB until the voltage is 100 f 10 mV.
4. Press Gas mixer on (the gas mixer is turned on) and check that the flow after stabilization (15
seconds) is 82 f 10 mUmin. If within limits, exit from the service program, remove the test equipment
If the flow is outside limits, use the Decrease (air flow) and Increase (air flow) keys to adjust the
pump speed until the flow is 82 f 5 mUmin.
5. Then adjust R213 on the Gas Mixer Interface PC6 until the displayed voltage varies symmetrically
around 1900 mV.
6. If R213 has been adjusted in item 5, press Gas mixer off and then Gas mixer on (to turn the gas
mixer off and then on again) and then check after stabilizatm (15 seconds) that the air flow is 0
regulated to be 82 f 5 mUmin.
Please note, that if the air pump speed after adjustment of the air flow monitor is above 1200 rpm, the
membrane pump should be replaced.
Differential Pressure Regulator
This checkout/adjustment should always be carried out in case the membrane of the differential pressure
regulator has been replaced.
Before carrying out thischeckout/adjustment, boththe C&pressure monitor and the airflow monitor should
be checked and adjusted, if necessary.
0
2.5 - 6 REVISED 92.11 .Ol
GAS MIXER
0
Checkout
1. Remove the stoppers on the two test nipples situated on the differential pressure regulator and
connect instead the test equipment as shown in Figure 2.5.5 below (use as short tubings as possible).
CO2 side
Differential
Adjustment screw
pressure regulator
f
left input
i
I Air side
Figure 25.5.
2. Enter the electrode check(out) service program and press Gas1 (fill).
3. Zero the differential manometer (inject Manometer Liquid, type S5224 or similar, until the front-end
reaches the long mark on the right slant gauge).
4. Measure the differential pressure.

If the differential pressure is > 0.7 mm manometer liquid (indicated by the short marks), proceed with
the adjustment procedures outlined below; otherwise, disconnect the test equipment and remount
the stoppers at the test nipples.
Adjustment
1. If the manometer liquid moves to the right (COP pressure > air pressure), tighten the adjustment screw
very little (turn clockwise) until the manometer liquid does not move when shifting between the
ZERO and MEASURE positions on the differential manometer.
-
If the manometer liquid moves to the left (CO* pressure < air pressure), loosen the adjustment screw
very little until the manometer liquid does not move when shifting between the ZERO and
MEASURE positions on the differential manometer.
2. Disconnect the test equipment and carefully remount the stoppers at the test nipples.
3. Check that the total output flow (Gas1 + Gas2) is still within limits (refer to the paragraph concerning
the COP flow regulator).
If the flow has changed, it could be caused by a leak in one of the stoppers.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.5 - 7
2.6 VALVES
0
Please note that no adjustments are required for the valves; only checkouts.
Quick check
1 Enter the valve test service program.
2 Select the valve which should be tested.
3 Activate Pull and release and check (audibly and visually) that the valve is pulled momen-tarily.
4 Activate Pull and hold and check that the valve is pulled and held (visually).
The valve is released again by activating Release all.
Please note that it is possible to pull and hold all the valves one after the other.
5 Exit from the valve test program - all valves are released upon exit.
Thorough check
Wet Section: 1 Check the +24 V supply on the Wet Section Control PCB between J24/1 (0 V) and
J24/3 (+24 V) for +23.4 V 1tl.2 V.
2 On the Wet Section Distribution PCB, disconnect the valves in succession and
check that the +24 V above is pin 1 of each of the valve plugs (J25 through J30).
3 For each valve, check that the impedance of the coil is 123 L 210 L.
4 Proceed with the quick check described above.
Gas mixer: la ABL500 runs 1_49/ABL510/520 runs 1-7:

Check that the +33 V supply between J24/1 (0 V) and J24/2 (+33 V) on the Wet
Section Control PCB is within (28.0 V ; 42.0 V].
lb ABL500 run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 run 8 onwards, ABL505, ABL50:

Check that the +33 V supply between J24/1 (0 V) and J24/2 (+33 V) on the Wet
Section Control PCB is within [28.0 V ; 40.0 v].
2 On the Gas Mixer Interface PCB, disconnect the plug J5 and check that the +33
V above is present on pins 3, 5, 7, and 9 respectively (on the PCB) - ground is
present at TP1/20.
3 For each valve, check that the impedance of the coil is 288 L +25 L. The pin
numbers refer to the plug.
VI : pins 1 and 3
V2: pins 4 and 5
V3: pins 6 and 7
V4: pins 8 and 9
4 Proceed with the quick check described above.
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.69 1

2.7 PUMP and MAIN VALVE
0
Please note that no adjustments are required for the pumps and the main valve.
1 Enter the pump and main valve (MV) test service program.
2 Select which part is to be tested.
3 Exit from the pump and flow selector test program after completion of the test.
Pumps
1 Set the speed to 60 uL/s using Increase and Decrease, then press Start/stop (to stop the pump
without deleting the setup).
2 Disconnect the tubings connected to the pump tubing, and connect instead two test tubings, one
going to a liquid supply beaker and one to a measuring beaker.
3 Press StarVstopto start the pump -when the liquid starts flowing into the measuring beaker, press
Start/stop to stop the pump.
4 Press Start/stop to start the pump and at the same time start a stop watch. When 60 seconds has
elapsed, press Start/stop again to stop the pump.
5 Check that the measuring beaker contains 3.6 ml +0.9 /_0.7 ml.
Main Valve
1 Use Increase and Decrease to move the Main Valve between its various positions.
Please refer to Section 4, Page 7 for a leakage test procedure for the Main Valve.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.7 - 1
2.8 LIQUID SENSORS
Please note that no adjustments are required for the liquid sensor channels. All voltages, etc, are
preadjusted at the factory.
1 Call a liquid sensor adjustment (LS adj. in the maintenance menu).
2 When completed, enter the liquid sensor test service program.

Please note that LS1 through LS4 are empty and LS5 is full upon entry directly from th READY mode.
3 Check that the calibration values for each sensor is above 30 counts.
If below, troubleshoot the failing liquid sensor as described below and then repeat procedure
from item 1.
4 Press Fill (liquid sensors), and check after completion theat the present value is below the latest
calibration value for each liquid sensor.
5 Press Empty, and check after completion that the present value is above the latest calibration value
for each liquid sensor.
Quick check values:

Calibration: 30 < counts < 550
Empty: counts > latest calibration value
Full: counts < latest calibration value
Full Empty
I I I I
I I
60 % 100%
(0 ZZts) (min. 30 counts) (Empty value
(calibration value) during last
calibration
min. 34 counts)
Troubleshooting of failing liquid sensor

1 Make sure that the flow path is clean.
2 Check the fitting of the optical fibres at both ends.
3 Disconnect the optical fibres at the transmitter/receiver end (Wet Section Distribution PCB).
4 Connect instead another optical fibre directly from the transmitter to the receiver.
5 Call a liquid sensor adjustment and check the calibration value.

Calibration value > 30 counts: the original optical fibre or the liquid sensor itself is defective.
Calibration value < 30 counts: the transmitter/receiver or the Wet Section Control PCB is defective.
-
2.9 INLET MODULE
0
This checkout may be used to find out whether the Inlet Module is defective in case the service
program (Check of various modules or Modules check) indicate an error.
Checkout
1 Remove the Inlet Module from the ABL.
2 Place the module on the work bench with the rear side upwards as shown.
VII,, 00 01 Flap
0
0 0 0
0
GND 0 00 Inlet
3 Check that the resistance between Flap and GND is in accordance with:
Flap closed: 0 Q.
Flap open: infinite a.
4 Check that the resistance between Inlet and GND is in accordance with:
Aspirate button deactivated: Approx. 237 k&Z.
Aspirate button activated: Approx. 100 kQ.
REVISED 92.11 .Oi 2.9 - 1

2.10 PRINTER (ABL500/505/510/520)
0
Please note that no electronic adjustments are required for the Printer Control PCB.
Please note that a test printout is given overleaf.
Quick Check (via soff keys)

1 Enter the printer test program (other service program no. 2).
2 Press Therm0 head CAL and then Start test printout.
3 Check after completion of the test printout that:

_ the printout includes a dotted line (40 small dots) at the top (caused by the therm0 head CAL),
_ all the checked parameters are OK and/or within the limits given,
all dots are present in the three thick horizontal lines (lines unbroken), and
the printing intensity is acceptable.
4 Exit from the service program.
Printer Unit test (printer only)

1 Power Supply PCB, locate J2/2 and J2/3 and check that the AC voltage for the Printer Control PCB
is 29.2 V AC f 3.0 V.
2 Momentarily short circuit the two pins of TP401 (calls a therm0 head CAL).
The same function may be obtained by momentarily shorting TPi/l (0 V) to TP1/5 (TEST).
3 Momentarily short circuit the two pins of SW1 01 (calls a test printout).
After completion of the test printout, check the parameters listed in item 3 of the quick check above.
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.10 - 1

PRINTER
24 VOLT SUPPLY :
OPAHP. S U P P L Y :. E
OPRMP. O U T P U T
PRINTER CURRENT ; E
P R I N T E R HERD T E M P . : OK
C U R R E N T FRCTOR : + 09x C-25%;+35%1
2 4 V O L T FRCTOR : + 01x
IMPEDANCE FACTOR : - 10X
TEHPERRTURE FRCTOR :+ 24x [-56X;+l21Xl
PRINTER HERD TEMP. : 28OC C+5~C;+5SCl
f#$%&()*+,-./012345678S:;<=>?@R8CDEFGHlJK
LllNOPORSTUVWXYZC~l- abcdef~hl.)klmnopqrstuvwx
uz<: ~-aCUCela3Sc~eBTTI# It 8o&bl3uusu f2lL I*BlbirP(k
+I$%& <h+ ,- ./0123456789:;<=>7~6CDEFGHIJKLPINDPQRSTUUWXY2~~3^_
L-J n
e 8%3O@tiu f&I*
n ’ am”++
2.11 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
0
1 Enter the loop-back test service program.
2 Select the channel to be tested.
3 Connect the test plug required for the channel in question according to the table below.
4 Start the test and check that the status message Test OK or OK appears. In case of a fault,
the message Test failed or Failed will appear.
The test runs continuously so that it is possible to check for bad connections by working with the
wires, connectors etc. during the test.
0
r- ABL500/505/510/520
Channel
RS150/100 1
ABL50
Channel
WI50
Test Plug
Barcode Reader 902-028 2

Port 2
Numerical
and 902-029
Alphanumerical
Keybords
1) In case the red LED on the rear of the %150/l 00 is permanently on or is blinking, the test
cannot be initiated since the PCB is disconnected from the ring network.
2) The slide switch on the test plug should be set to position loop back.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 2.11 -1

2.12 CRT MONITOR
@
Introduction
This section includes checkout and adjustment procedures for the ABL5XX CRT monitor.
Two procedures exist, one for early instruments with CRT deflection board 901-770 and video amplifier
board 901-771 (top part 901-818 and 902-l 39 run l-34) and one for later instruments with CRT deflection
board 902-l 84 and video amplifier board 902-l 85 (top part 902-139 run 35 onwards).
The two procedures are quite similar and includes checkout and adjustment of the horizontal and vertical
parameters, light, contrast and focus. The adjustments are performed on the CRT deflection board and the
Video amplifier board.
Figure 2.12.1 indicates the frame size and the relative vertical and horizontal picture position.
,o Adjustment of the picture geometry (horizontal and vertical picture centering) is performed by help of
magnets on the CRT tube. Such adjustment requires special instrumentation and s&i//and must not
beattemptedcarried through in the field. In case of considerable unlinearity (trapezium and/or pillow
distortion) the entire CRT monitor must be replaced.
WARNING. For safety reasons the CRT tube must not be replaced in the field. In case of a defective
CRT tube the entire CRT monitor must be replaced.
WARNING. High Voltage! Do not disconnect the CRT anode lead from the tube while the ABL is
on power!!
If the anode lead is to be disconnected (replacement of the CRT deflection board):
Switch off the mains power, disconnect the top part cover and discharge the anode to chassis by
a screwdriver before disassembling the anode cap.
2.12.1 CRT Deflection Board 901-770 and Video Amplifier Board 901-771
2.12.1 .l Checkout and adjustment of horizontal parameters

0 Horizontal synchronization. Check that the picture is not tilting or has a tendency to do so in connection
with picture changes. If necessary, select the vertical-line test picture in other service program no. 6 (test
picture 3). Short circuit J6 and adjust R23 (L. FREQ.) on the CRT deflection board until the picture is as
vertical as possible. Disconnect the short from J6. Seal the potentiometer after the adjustment.
Horizontal position. Check that the picture is positioned in the middle of the frame. If necessary, adjust
R33 (L. PHASE.) on the CRT deflection board. Seal the potentiometer after the adjustment.
Horizontal linearity. Select the vertical-line test picture in other service program no. 6 (test picture 3).
Check the linearity, i.e. that the distance between the lines is constant across the picture. If necessary,
adjust Ll (lower coil) on the CRT deflection board for best linearity. Use a non-metallic trimming tool,
quadratic 3 x 3 mm.
Picture-width. Checkthe picture-width withfeference tofigure2.12.1. If necessary, adjust L2 (upper coil)

on the CRT deflection board. Use a non-metallic trimming screwdriver (3 mm).
WRITTEN 93.04.20 2.12 - 1

CRT MONITOR
2.12.1.2 Checkout and adjustment of vertical parameters.
Vertical synchronization/position. Check that the picture is not scrolling or has a tendency to do so in
connection with picture changes. If necessary, adjust R52 (F. FREQ.) on the CRT deflection board until the
picture synchronizes. Fine-adjust for correct position with reference to figure 2.12.1. Seal the potentiometer
after the adjustment.
Vertical linearity. Select the horizontal-line test picture in other service program no. 6 (test picture 2).
Check the linearity, i.e. that the distance between the lines is constant. If necessary, adjust R59 (F. LIN.)
on the CRT deflection board for best linearity. Seal the potentiometer after the adjustment.
Picture-height. Checkthepicture-height with referencetofigure2.12.1. If necessary, adjust R69 (F. AMP.)

on the CRT deflection board. Seal the potentiometer after the adjustment.
5mm 5mm
7
J -
I
8 mr
7-
-JIT
08 mm
k
2mm
T 145 mm ..
Figure 2.12.1 Layout of Ready Picture
0
2.12 - 2 WRITTEN 93.04.20
/
CRT MONITOR
; 0
2.12.1.3 Contrast
The video amplitude has been factory adjusted for a normal contrast, i.e. a contrast which is considered
to be convenient for most users at normal light intensity. However, the contrast may be adjusted by R2 on
the video amplifier board. Seal the potentiometer after the adjustment. Please note that a very high contrast
may distort the picture.
2.12.1.4 Brightness
Check that the users brightness control (rear of cabinet) has a good covering range. If necessary, adjust
R6 (internal potentiometer LIGHT) on the CRT deflection board. Seal the potentiometer after the
adjustment.
t 0 2.12.1.5 Focus
Select the Ready-Picture. Adjust for normal light intensity. Check that the focus is good in the center as
well as in the corners. If necessary, adjust for best compromise by potentiometer R4 (FOCUS) on the CRT
deflection board. Do not sea/ the potentiometer after the adjustment (high voltage on the potentiometer).
2.12.2 CRT Deflection Board 902-l 84 and Video Amplifier Board 902-l 85
The potentiometers need not to be sealed.
2.12.2.1 Checkout and adjustment of horizontal parameters
Horizontal synchronization. Check that the picture is not tilting or has a tendency to do so in connection
with picture changes. If necessary, select the vertical-line test picture in other service program no. 6 (test
picture 3). Short circuit P4 (near ICI) and adjust PR4 (H. FREQ.) on the CRT deflection board until the
picture is as vertical as possible. Disconnect the short of P4.
Horizontal position. Check that the picture is positioned in the middle of the frame. If necessary, adjust
PR5 (PHASE) on the CRT deflection board.
Horizontal linearity. Select the vertical-line test picture in other service program no. 6 (test picture 3).
Check the linearity, i.e. that the distance between the lines is constant across the picture. If necessary,
adjust Ll (lower coil) on the CRT deflection board for best linearity. Use a non-metallic trimming tool,
quadratic 3 x 3 mm.
Picture-width. Checkthe picture-width wii h reference to figure 2.12.1. If necessary, adjust L2 (upper coil)
on the CRT deflection board. Use a non-metallic trimming screwdriver (3 mm).
0
WRITTEN 93.04.20 2.12-3
CRT MONITOR
2.12.2.2 Checkout and adjustment of vertical parameters
Vertical synchronization/position. Check that the picture is not scrolling or has a tendency to do so in
connection with picture changes. If necessary, adjust PR2 (V. SHIFT) on the CRT deflection board until
the picture synchronizes. Fine-adjust for correct position with reference to figure 2.12.1.
Vertical linearity. Select the horizontal-line test picture in other service program no. 6 (test picture 2).
Check the linearity, i.e. that the distance between the lines is constant. If necessary, adjust PR3 (V. LIN.)
on the CRT deflection board for best linearity.
Picture-height. Check the picture-height with reference to figure 2.12.1. If necessary, adjust PRl
(HEIGHT) on the CRT deflection board.
2.12.2.3 Contrast 0
The video amplitude has been factory adjusted for a normal contrast, i.e. a contrast which is considered
to be convenient for most users at normal light intensity. However, the contrast may be adjusted by PRl
(CONTR.) on the video board. Please note that a very high contrast may distort the picture.
2.12.2.4 Brightness
Check that the users brightness control (rear of cabinet) has a good covering range. If necessary, adjust
PR7 (internal potentiometer PRE. BRIGHT.) on the CRT deflection board.
2.12.2.5 Focus
Select the Ready-Picture. Adjust for normal light intensity. Check that the focus is good in the center as
well as in the corners. If necessary, adjust for best compromise by potentiometer PR8 (FOCUS) on the
CRT deflection board.
2.12 - 4 WRITTEN 93.04.20

. 2.13. PHOTOMETER LAMP
CAUTION Do not loosen the screw marked 6 in Drawing 23741-A4.
Adjusting the Lamp Unit

This procedure is carried out in case the Lamp Unit, or the Hemolyzer Unit has been replaced and in
case the mentioned parts have been dismantled.
1 Place the Wet Section in the service position and fold down the Wet Section Control PCB.
2 Check that the lamp functions. Replace if necessary.
3 Slightly loosen the screw securing the Lamp Unit to the Hemolyter Unit (marked 4 in Dra-
wing 23741-A4).
0
4 Call Wet Section Service Program 13, Photodiode checkout.
5 Press rr Fill electr. chamber to fill the cuvette.
6 Press Lamp on/off to turn on the photometer lamp.
7 Swing the Lamp Unit forth and back until the maximum mean diode current [nAl is obtained
(bottom parameter in the middle column).
Then tighten the screw firmly.
Adjusting the lamp (bulb)

This procedure is carried out in case the Lamp (bulb) has been replaced.
-1 Loosen the lock nut on the lamp socket hex-head adjustment screw (marked 5 in Drawing
23741-A4).
2 Adjust the socket hex-head screw until the maximum mean diode current [nA] is obtained.
Then tighten the lock nut.
Please note that the mean photodiode current must be within 30 - 400 nA (if outside, check the
various parts of the optical system).
3 Tighten the lock nut and exit from the service program.
4 Call a CAL1 calibration and check after completion that the tHb zero point status is within 30 -
400 nA.
Revised 91.10.04 2.13-1

. 2.14. PHOTODIODE CHANNELS
This procedure is to be carried out in case the optical system has been dismantled or when suspecting
an error.
2 Check the + 1 S V, and - 1 S V supplies on the Wet Section Control PCB and the 11 VAC on the
Power Supply PCB.
3 Call Wet Section Service Program 13, Photodiode check-out.
4 Disconnect the photodiode lead for the channel to be checked and the ground lead from the
Monochromator interface PCB. see the drawing below.
@3 Q4
@S @6 The plugs are colour

coded, see the table
@GND
overleaf.
-5 Connect instead the code 617-849 Test Cable between the PHA860 and the analog channel in
question (black plug on Test Cable to ground socket on Monochromator Interface PCB).
0 6 Set the voltage of the PHA860 to + 100.0 mV 20.2 mV and the out-put resistance to 10 MQ
(this applies 10 nA to the channel).
7 Check that the displayed diode current is within 10 nA f 3 nA.
a Set the out-put voltage of the PHA860 to + 1000 mV + 2 mV (this applies 100 nA to the chan-
nel).
9 Check that the displayed diode current is within 100 nA t 30 nA.
10 Reconnect the photodiode lead.
11 Press Fill electr. chamber to fill the cuvette.
12 Press Lamp on/off to turn on the lamp.
Revised 91.07.29 2.14-1

PHOTODIODE CHANNELS
13 When the reading has stabilized, check that each of the diode currents are within the limits gi-
ven in the table below.
If outside, check the Lamp Unit, the Hemolyzer Unit and the Monochromator Unit.
2.14-2 Revised 91.07.29

2.15. HEMOLYZER
Hemolyzer Driver
This procedure is to be carried out in case the Hemolyzer Unit or the Monochromator Interface PCB
has been replaced.
The procedure is to adjust the kernel of Tl on the Monochromator Interface PCB until the lowest
possible voltage is measured across the hemolyzer crystals -this is also the point where the noise from
the hemolyzer is loudest. (The cuvette should be full to amplify the noise).
The oscillator has the following data: Frequency: approx. 30.5 kHz
Amplitude: approx. 25-100 VP, or
approx. 1 O-35 VRM~
0 2 On the PCB on the Lamp Unit, lift the hemolyzer plug a little to get access to the two pins lea-
ding to the hemolyzer crystals; then connect a DVM between the two pins.
Call Service Program 13, Photodiode checkout.
Press Fill electr. chamber to fill the cuvette.
Press Hemol. on/off to turn on the hemolyzer driver circuit.

NOTE: If the correct adjustment cannot be achieved within 60 seconds, turn off the hemo-
lyzer, wait 60 seconds and then turn it on again. The reason for this is that most of
the power applied to the crystal is converted into heat. Too much heat causes the re-
sonance frequency to change which could result in an incorrect adjustment.
..
6 Adjust Tl on the Monochromator Interface PCB until the lowestpossible:
- peak/peak amplitude (using an oscilloscope) or
- RMS voltage (using a DVM or a moving coil meter which is able to measure AC voltages at
frequencies up to 40 kHz)
0 is measured across the hemolyzer crystal.
Check at the same time that the hissing sound from the hemolyzer is present.
NOTE: Tl is accessible through the circular hole in the metal casing shielding the Monoch-
romator Interface PCB.
When using a DVM or a moving coil meter which cannot measure up to 40 kHz, connect a dio-
de in series with the meter (half wave rectification) and measure the mean voltage.
The diode must be orientated with its anode towards TP2/1 and its cathode towards the meter.
Revised 91.07.29 2.15-l

HEMOLYZER
Cuvette Compensation
This procedure is to be carried out in case the Hemolyzer Unit or the Wet Section Control PCB has be-
en replaced.
What the procedure does is, that it measures and stores the length of the light path through the cu-
vette and at the same time performs a tHb calibration.
NOTE: Please note that the photometer lamp and the hemolyzer driver must be chec-
ked/adjusted before carrying out this procedure.
Ensure that the instrument is READY and that the latest tHb zero point calibration has been
completed without questionmarks.
Open an ampoule with S2190 and aspirate the contents into a syringe.
Open the inlet flap and press Blood if not selected. Then inject at least 200 PL 52190 and clo-
se the inlet flap.
When the measurement has completed, call Other Service Program 11, Cuvette compensation.
Check that the parameters shown are within the limits given.
Press Save and check that Current calibration factor is set to 1.000 and that Current tHb
cuvette factor is set to Calculated tHb cuvette factor.
Exit from the service program.
Perform a measurement on 52190 and check that the tHb is within limits.
2.15-2 Revised 91.07.29

. 2.16. MONOCHROMATOR (so7 = 100 %)
Introduction
This adjustment is normally only to be carried out in some cases if the measured ~02 on a blood
sample with ~02 = 100 % is outside the range 100 % + 0.4 % /- 0.6 % after replacing the Monochro-
mator Adaptor or the Monochromator Unit (or when the two parts have been taken apart).The
procedure requires the use of blood saturated 100 % (for preparation of the blood sample, see over-
leaf), a Code 920-700 Adjustment Dial and a torque wrench (4 kpcm).
1 In the corrections setup program (#20), reset corrections for ~02.
2 Carry out a Protein Removal program to clean the cuvette and then call a CAL1 calibration.
3 Call Wet Section Service Program 14, ~02 100 % adjustment.

Please note that the program MUST be called directly from the ready mode where Menu is
e
visible (to ensure that the wet section is empty at entry).
4 Prepare the blood sample, see overleaf.
5 Open the inlet flap, inject the sample, and close the inlet flap.
When the acoustic alert is heard, the ~02 value is displayed (as sample #l).
6 Important: If cturb > 0.200 mmol/L or

tHb is outside [ 11 .O ; 17.01 g/dL or [6.82 ; 10.541 mmol/L
exit from the service program and restart the procedure from item 1 with an-
other blood sample.
7 If ~02 is within 100.0 % +0.4 % /-0.6 %, proceed with item 14 below. If it is not, proceed with
item 8.
8 Loosen the lock nut on the free side of the Monochromator Unit.
0 9 Mount the Code 920-700 Adjustment Dial on the adjustment screw of the Monochromator
Unit.
10 so2 >lOO.l %: Turn the Adjustment Dial a little clockwise and press Repeat meas. to up-
date the screen according to the new adjustment (the new result is dis-
played as sample #l, the previous results are pushed one step down).
so2 < 99.9 %: Turn the Adjustment Dial counter-clockwise then a little clockwise. Then
press Repeat meas. to update the screen according to the new adjust-
ment (the new result is displayed as sample #l, the previous results are
pushed one step down).
11 Repeat item 10 until SOI is within 100.0 % fi 0.1 %. Note that the final movement of the Ad-
justment Dial must be carried out clockwise.
Revised 9 1.10.04 2.16-1

MONOCHROMATOR
12 Remove the Adjustment Dial and tighten the lock nut (torque: 4 kpcm). If this torque is ex-
ceeded, it may change the adjustment.
13 Press Repeat meas. to update the screen and check that the ~02 is still within the limits. If
not, repeat the adjustment.
14 Exit from the service program.
15 Call a CALI calibration.
16 Check that the new zero point status of the photometer is above the lower limit (30 nA). If the
new status value is close to the lower limit, use Wet Section Service Program 13, Diode
checkout to check that all the individual diode currents are above their lower limits.
Preparation of blood sample with ~02 = 100 %

Note that the blood must be taken from a healthy adult non-smoker and tHb must be within:
[ 11 .O ; 17.01 g/dL or [6.82 ; 10.541 mmol/L.
1 Collect an 0.5 ml blood sample in a 10 ml test tube. Make sure that a suitable anticoagulant
(i.e. sodium heparinate 1000 I.U./ml) is added to the blood and that blood and anticoagulant
are well mixed.
2 Oxygenate the blood by allowing a gas mixture of 5.7 % CO2 balanced with 02 to bubble
through the blood for at least three minutes (the CO2 must be present to adjust the pH value
of the blood since it influences ~02).
The oxygenation can alternately be carried out as follows: Tilt the tube to give the blood the
largest possible surface area (forming a thin liquid film) and roll it between your hands for at
least three minutes.
3 Fill the sample into a syringe or capillary tube. Note that the sample should be used as soon as
possible after preparation.
2.16-2 Revised 91.10.04

2.17 SOFTWARE UPGRADE
0
ABLSOO from run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 from run 8 onwards, ABL505
The main programs of the above ABLs are stored in electrically erasable FEPROMs (flashproms).
The procedures for upgrading the program software requires the use of the built-in diskdrive (or an external
service drive and a software disk. Rarely it is also necessary to use a Boot PCB.
Programming Procedure for ABLs Without Disk Drive.
1. Select Rinse only at power on in the Service Setup (No. 5) of Other Service Programs (Menu - Util.
- Other Util. - Service - Other).
2. Turn the ABL main power off.
3. Loosen carefully the disk drive blind plate below the printer. The blind plate can easily be removed
0 by first lifting out the right side.
4. Check that the strap settings of your service disk drive are in accordance with the instructions in
section 4, page 4-9 and connect the two blind plate cables to the disk drive connectors.
.
5. Turn the ABL main power on.
6. Select Software Upgrade in Other Service Programs (Menu - Util. - Other Util. - Service - Other)
7. Insert the upgrade disk in the disk drive and press the Prog. softkey.
The interpreter program FLASH.HEX will be loaded into the ABL ram. The loading process can be
followed on the screen.
8. By using a small screwdriver or similar, set the SW switch (next to the serial number plate on the rear
panel) ON (left position as seen from the ABL front) when the loading is successfully finished.
0 The SW switch is an on/off switch for the FEPROM programming voltage.
CAUTION: Do NOT set SW-switch OFF and

Do NOT turn power OFF and
J Do NOT remove floppy disk
during software upgrade.
After a while the FEPROM erasing/programming/verifying procedure starts. It takes approximately

4 minutes to complete the procedure.
9. Set the SW switch OFF (right position as seen from the ABL front) when instructed to do so by the
screen text.P
10. Turn the main power off.
0
REVISED 92.09.11 2.17 - 1
SOFTWARE UPGRADE
11. Remove the upgrade disk from the service disk drive, disconnect the two cables and reconnect the
blind plate into the ABL front panel.
12. Restart the ABL by turning the main power on. The restart time is 15 minutes.
In case of an error during the upgrade procedure, an error code will be displayed on the screen. For
decoding, please refer to section 3.9, page 8.
Programming Procedure for ABLs With Built-in Disk Drive
1. Select Software Upgrade in Other Service Programs (Menu - Ml. - Other Util. - Service - Other)
2. Replace the normal data disk in the disk drive by the software upgrade disk and press the Prog.
softkey. -
3. By using a small screwdriver or similar, set the SW switch (next to the serial number plate on the rear
panel) ON (left position as seen from the ABL front) when the loading is successfully finished.
The SW switch is an on/off switch for the FEPROM programming voltage.

Do NOT remove floppy disk

4. Set the SW switch OFF when instructed to do so by the screen text.

0
5. Turn the main power off, replace the software upgrade disk with the normal data disk, and re-
start the ABL by turning the main power on again. The restart time is 15 minutes.
In case of &I error during the upgrade procedure, an error code will be displayed on the screen. For
2.17 - 2 REVISED 92.09.11

SOFTWARE UPGRADE
BOOT PROCEDURE Using The Boot Board 902-198.
If a fatal error occurs during the software upgrade, e.g. a main power drop when the FEPROMs have been
erased, the microcomputer does not know how to get started and the boot program must be loaded into the
ABL by means of the Boot Board and the following procedure:
1,
2. Carefully connect the Boot Board into TPI on the Main Computer Board accessible through a cut in
the CRT compartment bottom. The connector key should be directed towards the rear.
3. Insert the upgrade disk in the disk drive.
4. Turn the main power on.
Now a Boot Prom menu appears on the screen. Do not select the RAM choice (1) as it is intended
for the ABL production department and requires a special terminal.
If the SW switch on the rear panel is ON (left position as seen from the ABLfront) when the main power
is turned on, a softkey test is called. Carry out the test and continue with step 5.
5. Select Diskboot by pressing softkey 2.
6. By using a small screwdriver or similar, set the SW switch on the rear panel (next to the serial number
plate on the rear panel) ON (left position as seen from the ABL front) when the loading is successfully
finished.

i Do NOT turn power OFF and

7. Set the SW switch on the rear panel OFF (right position as seen from the ABL front) when instructed
to do so by the screen text.
8. Turn the main power off and remove the Boot Board.
REVISED 92.09.11 2.17 - 3

SOFTWARE UPGRADE
9. For ABLs without disk drive: Remove the upgrade disk from the service disk drive, disconnect
the two cables and reconnect the blind plate into the ABL front
panel.
For ABLs with disk drive: Replace the software upgrade disk with the normal data disk.
10. Restart the the ABL by turning the main power on again. The restart time is 15 minutes.
In case of an error during the upgrade procedure, an error code will be displayed on the screen. For
2.17 - 4 REVISED 92.09.11

SOFTWARE UPGRADE
ABLSO
1. Switch off the ABL, mount the Memory Card in the slot on the edge of the Main Computer PCB.
2. Locate the software upgrade switch which is accessible through a hole in the chassis just above the
Memory Card slot. Using a pen or similar press and hold the software upgrade switch while switching
on the ABL and release the switch after two seconds.
The programming is now in progress. During the programming the four LEDs next to the Memory Card
connector indicate the stage of the programming, see the table below (CR717 is the upper LED).
If anything goes wrong during the programming, the programming halts and some of the LEDs start flashing
and the acoustic alarm sounds at 1 second intervals; the table below provides interpretation of the fault and
a corrective action.
NOTE: The message RINGNET COMMUNICATION ERROR may appear during the programming.
This does, however, not influence the programming.
3. When the acoustic signal sounds and all LEDs are off (after up to 120 seconds) the programming is
complete. Switch off the ABL, remove the Memory Card and switch on the ABL again.
4. The message System setup invalid - default selected. Press continue! appears.
Press Continue and then check that the ABL starts up correctly.
CR CR CR CR Corrective Action
717 709 708 805 Interpretation
0 0 0 0 Initialization or termination NA
0 0 I 0 Checksum error in Memory Card Try reprogramming. Replace Memory Card.
0 1 0 0 Incorrect programming voltage. Try reprogramming.
Replace Main Computer PCB.
0 1 I 0 Device code error for FPROM(s) Try reprogramming.
0 I 1 0 Replace Memory Card.
0 II 1 I 1 0 Replace Main Computer PCB.
I 0 0 0 Main Computer RAM test error. Try reprogramming.
Replace Main Computer PCB.
1 0 I 0 FPROM erase error. Try reprogramming.
I 0 1 0 Replace Main Computer PCB.
1 0 I 0
1 I1 0 0 FPROM programming error. Try reprogramming.
I 1 0 0 Replace Memory Card.
I I 0 0 Replace Main Computer PCB.
1 n1I 1 0 FPROM verify error. Try reprogramming.
m1 1 1 0 Replace Memory Card.
n1I 1 1 0 Replace Main Computer PCB.
I
/
0 = LED off 1 =LEDon I = LED flashing
WRITTEN 92.11 .Ol 2.17 - 5
- \
m 3. TROUBLESHOOTING
I%
GENERAL INFORMATION
Monitoring The ABL performs a multitude of checks during operation. If these checks are not
facilities satisfactory, the errors are registered in relevant records in the System status.
All records are also filed in the System status log.
The ABL may, depending on the severity of a detected error:
- interrupt its present activity
- carry on, but question the results
- disregard invalid data entry,
Question marks in front of measured and derived parameters indicate that the measurement results are
unreliable due to errors.
AB L500/505/510/520
Messages The ABL indicates the presence of a record by issuing messages on the screen in the
instrument status field (upper left) on the second and third line.
The following general messages can be displayed, one at a time, on line 2 in the
following order of priority:
Measurement aborted during measurement
Calibration aborted during calibration
Maintenance aborted during one of the maintenance programs
Insufficient sample during measurement
Inhomogeneous sample during measurement
No Cleaning solution (1) during cleaning
No Salt-bridge solution (2) during refill/rinse/Cal l/Cal 2/Total cal
No Cal 1 solution (3) during refill/Cal l/Cal 2/Total cal
No Cal 2 solution (4) during refill/Cal 2/Total cal
No Rinse solution (5) during refill/rinse/Cal l/Cal 2/Total cal
The messages disappear after a rinse is completed.
The following messages can be displayed, one at a time, on line 3 in the following order
of priority:
Check record in System status in case of system record
Messages in System status in case of operator, sample, and transducer
records.
To enter System
Status Press the softkeys: M &nu / System status. (The System status softkey isvisible in this
case).
Description and Presentation of Records
Record groups All detected errors are divided into 4 groups displayed in a pop-up window. Only the
groups that the record belongs to are visible, together with the corresponding softkey.
The other record groups aredisplayed with low light intensity, and the softkeys forthem
are not displayed. The record groups are:
REVISED 93.01.15 3-I

TROUBLESHOOTING
Operator record caused by incorrect operator action. (section 3.1)
Sample record refer to a sample during measurement. (section 3.2)
Transducer
record are detected during monitoring of transducers and electrodes. (section 3.3)
System record refers to mechanical or electronic errors, faulty gas/solution supply, or temperature.
The system record is subdivided into:
- general (section 3.4)
- from last calibration (section 3.5)
- from last measurement (section 3.6)
- from last manual calibration (section 3.7)
- other records (section 3.8)
ABL50
Messages ABL50 indicates the presence of a System Status message by displaying a I? in

the System Status field (upper right display corner).
To enter System
Status Press the Menu softkey - 4, System Status
The System Status in ABL50 is divided into two main groups:
1. RECORDS
2. CALIBRATION STATUS.
The Records are divided into 3 groups:
General messages
Measurement messages
Calibration messages
The messages are numerical codes which are listed and described in section 3.10.
In the ABL50 standard setup the numerical codes are compressed. In order to
make ABL50 print the detailed numerical error codes, Print extended errors must
be selected in service &rogram no. 13.
The Calibration Status includes 4 display pages with the present calibration status, i.e.
Main Display with information on the last and next calibration. Barometer status included.
Calibration status for the pH electrode
Calibration status for the pCO2 electrode
Calibration status for the pC2 electrode
3-2 REVISED 93.01 .15

a TROUBLESHOOTING
OPERATOR RECORD
ASP. NOT ACTIVATED

Inferprefafion: Aspirate button not pressed when requested in last gas measurement.
ABL action: Acoustic alarm, Rinse
Operator action: Repeat measurement on gas sample.
Service action: 1 Test function of aspirate button.Wet section service program no.9.
2 Test inlet module , test procedure 2.9.
3 Replace wet section control PCB.
4 Replace wet section distribution PCB.
INLET CLOSED
Interpretation: Gas measurement:
Inlet closed before requested.
Liquid measurement:
Inlet closed before LS4 has detected liquid.
ABL action: Rinse.
Opera for action: Repeat measurement on sample.
Service action: 1 Test function of inlet flap.Wet section service program no. 9.
2 Test function of LS4.Wet section service program no. 8
3 Test inlet module, test procedure 2.9.
4 Check mounting of optical fibers for LS4.
7 Replace LS4.
INLET NOT CLOSED

Interpretation: Injection mode, Aspirate mode, Gas mode, Decontamination mode;or
Protein removal mode:
Inlet flap not closed when requested.
L
a ABL action:
Operator action:
Service action:
Acoustic alarm, Rinse.
Close inlet flap and repeat task.
1 Test function of inlet flap. Wet section service program no. 9.
2 Test inlet module test procedure on page 2.9
3 Replace inlet flap.
5 Replace wet section distribution PCB
NO SAMPLE
Interpretation: No sample detected during aspiration in last measurement.
ABL action: Acoustic alarm, Rinse.
Opera for action: Repeat measurement on sample.
Service action: 1 Test function of aspirate button.Wet section service program no.9.
2 Test function of LS4.Wet section service program no. 8.
4 Check mounting of optical fibers for LS4.
REVISED 92.01.17 3.1 - 1

TROUBLESHOOTING
PROGRAM NOT STARTED

Interpretation: Protein removal or Decontamination program:
No liquid detected by LS4 45 sec. after program selected, or inlet
flap closed before LS4 detected liquid.
A BL action: Acoustic alarm, Rinse.
Operator action: Repeat task.
Service action: 1 Test function of inlet flap.Wet section service program no. 9.
2 Test function of LS4.Wet section service program no. 8.
3.1 - 2 REVISED 92.01 .I7

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
INHOMOGENEOUS SAMPLE
Interpretation: Air bubbles detected in sample. The Air counts greater than 1.5%
and less than 5.0% of total counts during sample check.
ABL action: All parameters marked with I?.
Operator action: Perform a new measurement.
Service action: 1 Test function of LS2. Wet section service program no. 8.
2 Check wet section tubing.
3 Perform leakage test of main valve Page 4-8.
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
Interpretation: Too small sample volume detected. The Air counts greater than 5%
during sample check and LS2 empty.
ABL action: All parameters marked with ?.
Opera for action: Perform a new measurement.
Service action: 1 Test function of LS2. Wet section service program no. 8.
0
REVISED 92.01 .I7 3.20 1
._ TROUBLESHOOTING
0
TRANSDUCERRECORD
Transducer
record is obtained from flush of pC0, and p0, electrodes performed every hour, gas flush of p0,
electrode performed every 10 minutes, calibration, and measurement.
BAR0 OUT OF LIMITS

Interpretation: Barometer out of limits: 450 - 800 mmHg or 59.99 - 106.64 kPa.
Operator action: See Baro out of range.
Service action: See Baro out of range.
BAR0 OUT OF RANGE

Interpretation: Barometer out of coverage range: 450 - 800 mmHg or 59.99 - 106.64
kPa.
Opera for action: Check against external barometer.
Service action: 1 Check Barometer channel, test procedure 2.5.
2 Replace gas mixer interface PCB.
Ca++ DRIFTING
Interpretation: Last calibration
Ca++ drift value exceeds user-selected limits.
Operator action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORD, GENERAL. Remedy if
any are listed.
Error is remedied when Cal 1 or Cal 2 is accepted (If protein deposits
removed from the electrode were the cause of the error, the calibra-
tion show a considerable change in drift value. It can be necessary to
call another calibration).
If limits are too narrow, redefine them via Setup program.
Check measuring chambers for clots - remove electrode(s) and clean
. with cotton stick moistened with distilled water, if necessary.
0 Perform Protein removal program.
Call tubing refill program.
Remembrane Ca electrode.
Replace Ca electrode.
Service action: 1 Check the records in SYSTEM STATUS.
2 Check Ca channel, test procedure 2.2.
3 Check SBS line and dosage.
5 Check continuity between calomel electrode and shield of Ca
Preamplifier cable.
6 Replace Wet Section Control PCB.
7 Replace Ca Preamplifier.
Ca+* OUT OF LIMITS

Ca* status value out of limits: 0.39-5.00 mmol/L or 0.78-l 0.0
REVISED 92.01.24 3.3 - 1

TROUB LESHOOTING
meq/L.
any are listed.
Error is remedied when Cal 2 is accepted.
Call Tubing refill program.
Ensure electrode is mounted correctly in measuring chamber.
Ensure there is sufficient Salt-bridge Solution in calomel electrode
well. Ensure calomel electrode plug is connected.
Clean Ca electrode plug if dirty or wet.
with cotton stick moistened with distilled water, if necessary.
Check calibration for status value trend. Remembrane electrode if
status value has gradually reached the limit.
Service action: See Ca++ DRIFTING.
Ca++ OUT OF RANGE

Interpretation: Last measurement:
Ca++ out of coverage range: 0.2-10.0 mmol/L or 0.4-20.0 meq/L.
Operator action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORD, GENERAL and/or
SAMPLE RECORD. Remedy if any are listed.
Error is remedied when Cal 2 is accepted. Perform quality control.
Check measuring chambers for clots r remove electrode(s) and clean
Call refill program.
well.
Check plug of calomel electrode.
Ca*+ SENS. ERROR

Ca++ sensitivity out of range: 90-l 05 %.
Operator action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECC&D, GENERAL. Remedy if
any are listed.
Check Ca drift value during Cal 1 and Cal 2. (If protein deposits
Clean Ca electrode plug if dirty or wet.
Check calibration for status value trend. Replace electrode if status
value has gradually reached the limit.
3.3 - 2 REVISED 92.01.24

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
Ca++ UNSTABLE
Interpretation: Last calibration/measurement
Ca++ response fault.
If Ca electrode is contaminated, remembrane electrode.
Ensure analyzer is grounded.
Ensure plug of calomel electrode is connected.
well.
Cal Tubing refill program.
Cl- DRIFTING
Cl- drift value exceeds user-selected limits.
any are listed.
Error is remedied when Cal 1 or Cal 2 is accepted (If protein deposits
removed from the electrode were the cause of the error, the calibra- i
Perform Protein removal program.
Remembrane Cl electrode.
Replace Cl electrode.
2 Check Cl channel, test procedure 2.2.
4 Check wet section tubing. )
5 Check continuity between calomel electrode and shield of Cl
Preamplifier cable.
7 Replace Cl Preamplifier.
Cl- OUT OF LIMITS

Cl- status value out of limits: 20-292 mmol/L or 20-292 meq/L.
any are listed.
l
REVISED 92.01.24 3.3 - 3
TROUBLESHOOTING

Ensure electrode is mounted correctly is measuring chamber.
Clean Cl electrode plug if dirty or wet.
Service action: See Cl- DRIFTING.
Cl- OUT OF RANGE

Cl- out of coverage range: 7-350 mmol/L or 7-350 meq/L.
well.
Service action: See CI- DRIFTING.
Cl- SENS. ERROR

Cl- sensitivity out of range: 85-100 %.
any are listed.
Check Cl drift value during Cal 1 and Cal 2. (If protein deposits
Error is remedied when Cal 2 is accepted. )
Clean Cl electrode plug if dirty or wet.
Cl- UNSTABLE
Cl- response fault.
Opera for action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORD, GENERAL and/or
REVISED 92.01.24
TROUBLESHOOTING
0
If Cl electrode is contaminated, remembrane electrode.
Ensure plug of calomel electrode is connected.
well.
Cal Tubing refill program.
CAL 2 ERROR
Interpretation: Last e-point pH, K+, Na+, Ca++/CI-calibration.
Operator action: Check specific error.
Call Cal 2 program (Calibration).
Service action: See actions for individual electrodes.
GAS CAL 2 ERROR

Interpretation: Last 2-point pC0, calibration.
Operator action: Check specific error.
Call Gas Cal 2 program (Calibration).
Service action: See pC0, transducer actions.
Hb EFFECTIVE LOW
Effective hemoglobin too low fwreliable determination of SO,.
Operator action: Effective hemoglobin too low for reliable determination of SO,.
Service action: 1 Check photodiode channels.
2 Replace Monochromator Interface PCB.
HbF CAL ERROR

Interpretation: Last manual calibration:
so, out of limits: 95 - 105% or 0.95 - 1.05
Operator action: Call Call. and repeat HbF calibration.

tHb out of coverage range: 0 - 29 g/dL or 0.0 18 mmol/L or 0 -
290 gR
Operator action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM ERRORS, GENAL. Remedy if any
listed. Call Call. and repeat measurement.
Service action: See tHb OUT OF RANGE.

tHb too low for reliable determination of derivatives. tHb < 3.2 gl
dL or 2.0 mmol/L or 32 g/L
Operator action: Increase tHb by allowing blood cells to settle and discarding plasma
phase.
a REVISED 92.01.24 3.3 - 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
Service action: See tHb DERIVATIVES ERROR

Sample turbidity too high for reliable calibration.
Operator action: Hyperlipemic sample: decrease lipemic content by, e. g. centrifugation
or extraction. Perform measurement on blood sample from healthy
donor.
Service action: See TURBIDITY HIGH

Spectrum mismatching combination of derivatives.
Opera for action: Call Cal 1. and repeat measurement.
Service action: See SPECTRUM ERROR

Effective Hb too low for reliable determination of SO,: RHb + 0,Hb
< 30% Or 0.3.
Opera for action: Prepare another fully oxygenated sample from healthy adult non-
smoker and repeat HbF cal.
Service action: See tHb EFFECTIVE LOW
K+ DRIFTING
K+ drift value exceeds user-selected limits.
Operator action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECOYD, GENERAL. Remedy if
any are listed.
Error is remedied when Cal 1 or Cal 2 is accepted (if protein deposits
Remembrane K electrode.
Replace K electrode.
2 Check K channel, test procedure 2.2.
5 Check continuity between reference electrode and shiels of K
Preamplifier cable.
7 Replace K Preamplifier.
3.3 - 6 REVISED 92.01.24

a TROUBLESHOOTING
K+ OUT OF LIMITS
K+ status value out of limits: 1.2-13.3 mmol/L, or 1.2-13.3 meq/L.
Operator action: Check for other errors in-SYSTEM RECORD, GENERAL. Remedy if
any are listed.
Ensure electrode is correctly mounted in electrode chamber.
Ensure that there is sufficient Salt-bridge Solution in calomel elec-
trode well.
Ensure calomel electrode plug is connected.
Clean K electrode plug if dirty or wet.
Check calibration log for status value trend.
Remembrane electrode if status has reached the limit.
Replace the K electrode.
Replace calomel electrode.
Service action: See K+ DRIFTING
K+ OUT OF RANGE
K+ out of coverage range: 0.5-25 mmol/L or 0.5-25 meq/L.
Error is remedied when Cal 2 is accepte . Perform quality control.
P
well.
0 Service action:
See K+ DRIFTING.
K+ SENS. ERROR
Interpretation: Last calibration:
K+ sensitivity out of range: 92-l 05 %
any are listed.
Ckeck K drift value during Cal 1 and Cal 2 (if protein deposits re-
moved from the electrode were the cause of the error, the calibration
show a considerable change in drift value. It can be necessary to call
another calibration).
Clean K electrode plug if dirty or wet.
Check calibration log for status value trend. Remembrane electrode if
status has reached the limit.
REVISED 92.01.24 3.3 - 7

TROUB LESHOOTING
Replace K electrode.
K+ UNSTABLE
K+ response fault
Error is remedied when Cal 1 or Cal 2 is accepted. Perform quality
control.
with cotton stick moistened with distilled water if necessary.
If K electrode is contaminated, remembrane electrode.
Ensure plug of calomel electrode is connected. 0
-
well.
Na+ DRIFTING
L
Na+ drift value exceeds user-selected limits.
Opera for action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORD, GENERAL. Remedy if
any are listed.
Error is remedied when Cal 1 or Cal 2 is acypted (If protein deposits
Replace Na electrode.
2 Check Na channel, test procedure 2.2.
5 Check continuity between calomel electrode and shield of Na
Preamplifier cable.
7 Replace Na Preamplifier.
3.3 - 8
l
TROUBLESHOOTING
Na+ OUT OF LIMITS

Na+ status value out of limits: 44-481 mmol/L or 44-48-t meq/L.
any are listed.
Ensure electrode is mounted correctly is measuring chamber.
Clean Na electrode plug if dirty or wet.
Service action: See Na+ DRIFTING.
Na+ OUT OF RANGE

Na+ out of coverage range: 7-350 mmol/L or 7-350 meq/L.
Opera for action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORD, GENERAL and/or L
Ensure there is sufficient Salt-bridge Solution in&tlomel electrode
well.
0 Na+ SENS. ERROR
Na+ sensitivity out of range: 90-l 05 %.
any are listed.
Check Na drift value during Cal 1 and Cal 2. (If protein deposits
Clean Na electrode plug if dirty or wet.
3.3 - 9
l TROUBLESHOOTING
Check electrode for air trapped on spacer; remembrane electrode if

necessary.
Check electrode connection point. Clean if dirty or wet.
Check limits (too narroW?) selected in SETUP PROGRAM. Change
limits if necessary.
Perform Protein Removal program (Maintenance).
Replace electrode.
Service action: 1 Check records in system status.

2 Check pC0, channel, test procedure 2.2.
3 Check barometer channel, test procedure 2.5.
4 Replace preamplifier.
5 Replace wet section control.
pC0, SENS. ERROR

pC0, sensitivity out of range: 85 - 100%.
Operator action: See pCO,out of range.
Service action: See pC0, out of range.
pC0, UNSTABLE
pC0, response fault during calibration.
Last measurement: >
pC0, response fault during electrode monitoring
Operator action: See pCO,out of range.
Service action: See pC0, out of range.
pH DRIFTING
pH drift value exceeds user-selected limits.
Operator action: See pH out of range.
Service action: See pH out of range.
pH OUT OF LIMITS
pH status value out of limits: 6.820 - 7.946
pH OUT OF RANGE
pH out of coverage range: (6.3 - 8.0).
Operator action: Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORDS GENERAL. Remedy
if any are listed.
Check for sample errors in SAMPLE RECORD. Remedy if any are
l
3.3 - 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
listed.Check pH drift value during Cal 1 or Cal 2.

Call Cal 2 program (Calibration) after each of procedures listed below.
Error is remedied when Cal 1 or Cal 2 is accepted.
Check limits (too narrow?) selected in SETUP program. Change the
limits, if necessary.
Call refill program (Maintenance).
Check that electrode is mounted correctly in electrode chambers
Check level of Salt-bridge solution in reference electrodes well.
Check reference electrode plug is connected.
Check pH electrode connection points. Clean if dirty or wet
Check electrode chambers for clots. Remove electrode(s) and clean
with moist (distilled water) cotton stick if necessary.
Check calibration log for status value trend. Replace electrode if
status value has slowly reached the limit.
Replace pH electrode.
Replace reference electrode.
Check if analyzer is grounded.
2 Check pH channel, test procedure 2.2.
5 Check continuity between reference electrode and shield of pH
preamplifier cable.
6 Replace wet section control. -
7 Replace pH preamplifier.
pH SENS. ERROR
pH sensitivity out of range: 92 - 103% or 0.92 - 1.03.
pH UNSTABLE
pH response fautt during calibration.
Last measurement:
ph response fault during electrode monitoring.
PHOTOMETER OUT OF LIMITS

Photometer current out of limits (see table on page2.14-2).
Operator action: Perform protein removal procedure.
Call cal 1.
Service action: 1 Check photo lamp, replace if necessary.
3.3 - 12
t- -
TROUBLESHOOTING
0
2 Adjust lamp unit and lamp socket, refer to Section 2.13.
3 Check Photodiode channels, refer to Section 2.14.
4 Replace Monochromator if one or more Photodiode channels are
defective.
6 Check Hemolyzer Unit, replace if defective.
p0, DRIFTING
Interpretation: Last flush:
p0, drift value exceed 75% of user- selected limits during 1 -hour
check.
Last calibration:
p0, drift value exceeds user-selected limits.
Operator action: See p0, out of range.
Service action: See p0, out of range.
p0, GAS FLUSH DRIFT

Interpretation: Last flush:
p0, drift value exceeds +- 3% during 1 0-min. check
Operator action: See p0, out of range.

Servicekction: See p0, out of range.
p0, OUT OF RANGE

p0, out of coverage range: 0 - 800 mmHg or 0.0 - 106.64 kPa for
liquid samples; 0 - 753 mmHg or 0.0 - 100.37 kPa for gas sam-
ples.
Operator action: Check sensitivity in TRANSDUCER RECORD IN LAST CALIBRA-
TION.
Check for other errors in SYSTEM RECORD GENERAL. Remedy, if
any, are listed.
Check for sample errors in SAMPLE RECORD. Remedy, if any, are
listed.
Call Gas Cal 1 program (Calibration) after each of the procedures
listed below. Error is remedied when Gas Cal 1 is accepted.
Check that electrode is mounted correctly in electrode chamber.
Check electrode connection points. Clean if dirty or wet.
Check limits (too narrow?) selected in SETUP program. Change limits
if necessary.
Brush electrode tip with stiff brush and remembrane electrode.
Remembrane electrode.
Replace electrode.
Call Total Cal program (Calibration).
Service action: 1 Check records in system status.
2 Check p0, zero calibration, Wet Section service program No.4
3 Check p0, channel, test procedure 2.2.
REVISED 93.01 .15 3.3 - 13

TROUBLESHOOTING
4 Check Barometer channel, test procedure 2.5.

6 Replace p0, Preamplifier.
p0, SENS. ERROR

pO,sensitivity out of range: 5 - 40 pA/mmHg or 37.51 - 300.0 pA/
kPa.
Opera for action: See PO, out of limits.
Service action: See PO, out of limits.
p0, UNSTABLE
p0, response fault during calibration.
Last measurement:
p0, response fault during electrode monitoring.
Operator action: See PO, out of range.
Service action: See p0, out of range.
p0, ZERO HIGH

p0, zero value more than 6 mmHg or 0.80 kPa.
Opera for action: See p0, out of range.
Service action: See PO, out of range.
SPECTRUM ERROR
Spectrum mismatching the combination of measured derivatives.
One or more parameters > 5% outside measuring range.
Operator action: Call Cal 1 and repeat measurement.
Service action: 1 Check photodiode channels Section 2.14.
2 Check the photolamp Section 2.13.
3 Check voltages for the Monochromator Interface PCB (5V, +15
and - 15V on the wet section control board) and 11 VAC on the
power supply board.
5 Replace Monochromator Unit.
tHb CAL ERROR

tHb out of limits: 7.0 - 8.2 mmol/L, or 11.28 - 13.21 g/dL, or 112.8
- 132.1 g/L.
Operator action: Perform protein removal procedure.
Call Cal 1.
Repeat tHb calibration.
2 Adjust lamp unit and lamp socket refer to Section 2.13.
3.3 - 14 REVISED 93.01 .15

l TROUBLESHOOTING
defective.
tHb DERIVATIVES ERROR

/nfefprefafion: Last measurement:
tHb less than 2.0 mmol/L, or 3.2 g/dL, or 32 g/L, too low for
reliable measurement of derivatives.
Operator action: Increase tHb by allowing blood cells to settle.
Service action: 1 Check photodiode channels Section 2.14.
tHb ZERO POINT DRIFTING

hferprefation: Last calibration:
tHb zero point drift value exceeds limits: 0.2 mmol/L, or 0.32 g/dL,
or 3.2 g/L.
Operator action: Perform protein removal procedure,
Call Cal 1.
2 Adjust lamp unit and lamp socket, refer to Section 2.13.
3 Check diode channels refer, to Section 2.14.
4 Replace Monochromator if one or more diode channels are
defective.
tHb OUT OF RANGE

Interprefafion: Last measurement:
tHb out of coverage range: 0 - 18 mmol/L, or 0 - 2.9 g/dL, or 0 -
29 g/L.
any listed.
Call Cal 1 and repeat measurement.
Service action: 1 Check the Photodiode channels, Section 2.14.
2 Check the photolamp, Section 2.13.
3 Replace the Monochromator Interface PCB.
TOTAL CAL ERROR

Interpretation: Check specific error.
Call Total Cal program (Calibration).
Service action: See pH, pC0, and p0, transducer actions.
TURBIDITY HIGH
Sample turbidity to high for reliable measurement.
Opera for action: Hyperlipemic sample: decrease lipemic content by, e. g. centrifugation
a /
3.3 - 15
TROUBLESHOOTING
or extraction.
Perform measurement on blood sample from healthy donor.
Service action: 1 Check Hemolyzer Unit section 2.15, replace if necessary.
2 Replace Monochromator interface PCB.
3.3 - 16
TROUBLESHOOTING
0
SYSTEM RECORDS, GENERAL
System record refers to lack of liquids or gases and temperature faults

during measurement or calibration, and to mechanical de-
fects and failures.
Operator
actions are listed in order of priority.
BATTERY TOO LOW

Interpretation: Battery voltage low during last calibration.
ABL action: None.
Operator action: Call service engineer.
Service action: 1 Replace battery on Wet Section Control PCB.
CAL 1 NEEDED
Interpretation: Gas Cal 1 required after maintenance procedure, or last Gas
Cal 1 not completed due to errors.
ABL action: All data with ? after measurement.
Operator action: Check for specific error in SYSTEM RECORD IN LAST
CALIBRATION. Remedy the error and recalibrate analyzer.
Service action: Same as operator action.
CAL 2 NEEDED
l CLEANING ERROR A
Interpretation: No cleaning solution (1) detected by LS2
Operator action: Replace Cleaning Solution bottle (ABL5xO: S5345, ABL505:
S5375).
Call Refill program (Maintenance).
Service action: 1 Test LS2, wet section service program no. 8.
2 Check optical fibres, replace if faulty.
4 Test valves, wet section service program no. 6.
5 Test Pi, wet section service program no. 7.
6 Replace Electrode Chambers or LS4 if faulty.
m REVISED 92.01 .I7

L
3.4 - 1
TROUBLESHOOTING
a
CLEANING ERROR B
Interpretation: Malfunction in liquid system transport, LSl detecting liquid
when expected empty.
Operator action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR
A.
Perform Protein Removal Program (Maintenance).
Check the Wet Section for leakage or salt deposits at:
Electrodes: Remove electrodes and clean upper surface
of the electrode chambers.
Pump 1: Replace pump tubing if necessary.
Call liquid sensor adj. (Maintenance).
Call Cal 2 (Calibration).
Service action: 1 Test LSl, wet section service program no. 8.
3 Check wet section tubing. 0
Replace wet section control PCB. L
8 Replace Electrode Chambers if faulty.
CONTAMINATED CUVETTE
Interpretation: Contaminated cuvette detected during last rinse check. tHb
0.2 mmol/L, or 0.32 g/dL, or 3.3 g/L.
ABL action: Oxi parameters in next measurement have ?.
Opera for action: Perform protein removal procedure.
Call Cal 1.
2 Adjust lamp unit and lampsocket refer to Section 2.13.
3 Check photodiode channels refer to Section 2.14.
4 Replace Monochromator if one or more diode channels
are defective.
6 Check Hemolyzer Unit section 2.12, replace if defective.
FLUSH ERROR
Interpretation: LSl, LS2, or LS4 detected liquid during Flush program.
Operator action: Check System Status for other errors, e. g. RINSE ERROR
A.
Check the Wet Section for leakage or satt deposits at:
Service action: 1 Test function of LSl , LS2, LS4.
0
3.4 - 2 REVISED 92.01.17
TROUBLESHOOTING
1)
Check optical fibre, replace it if faulty
Wet section service program no. 8.
Test function of Vi and V2
Test Pi. Wet section service program no. 7.
Check wet section tubing.
Replace wet section control PCB.
Replace wet section distribution PCB.
GAS CAL 1 NEEDED

GAS CAL 2 NEEDED

A BL action: All data with ? after measurement.
GAS ERROR A
Interpretation: CO2 pressure too low.
A BL action: All data with ? after measurement. No automatic calibrations
and calibrations not accepted.
Operator action: Replace CO2 cylinder.
Check tubing from CO2 cylinder.
Service action: 1 Check CO2 pressure.
2 Wet section service program no. 3.
3 Test CO2 pressure monitor. Test procedure 2.5.
6 Replace CO2 pressure transducer.
7 Replace gas mixer.
GAS ERROR B
Interpretation: Gas mixer not operating.
A BL action: All data with ? after measurement. No automatic calibrations
and calibrations not accepted.
Operator action: Check for loose tubing.
Service action: 1 Check gas mixer. Test procedure 2.5
2 Check air filter and replace if dirty.
3 Check membrane pump and replace if necessary.
REVISED 92.01.17 3.4 - 3

TROUBLESHOOTING

5 Check gas mixer tubing.
8 Check air flow monitor and replace air pressure trans-
ducer, if necessary.
LSl ERROR
Interpretation: LSl error during Liquid Sensor adjustment. Emty counts <
34.
Opera for action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR
A.
Service action: 1 Test LSl , wet section service program no. 8.
5 Test Pl , wet section service program no. 7.
8 Replace Electrode Chambers if LSl is faulty.
LS2 ERROR
Interpretation: LS2 error during Liquid Sensor adjustment. Emty counts c
34.
A.
5 Test PI, wet section service program no. 7.
3.4 - 4 REVISED 92.01.17

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
8 Replace Electrode Chambers if LS2 is faulty.
LS3 ERROR
Interpretation: LS3 error during Liquid Sensor adjustment. Emty counts <
34.
A.
5 Test P2 wet section service program no. 7.
8 Replace LS3 if faulty.
LS4 ERROR
Interpretation: LS4 error during Liquid Sensor adjustment.
A.
Check the washer for inlet. Replace if leaky or damaged.
8 Replace inlet tube if LS4 is faulty.
LS5 ERROR
Interpretation: LS5 error during Liquid Sensor adjustment. Emty counts <
34.
A.
Checkthe Salt-bridge solution bottle and nipple for clogging.
REVISED 92.01.17 3.4 - 5

TROUBLESHOOTING

Service action: 1 Test LS5 wet section service program no. 8.

5 Test Pl wet section service program no. 7.
8 Replace reference well if LS5 is faulty.
MAINT. PROG. ERROR

Interpretation : No solution detected by LS1, when Pl is suking up the
injected solution.
ABL action: Rinse.
Operator action: Perform Troubleshooting Procedure 1 and 2 - see page 9.21
in Users Handbook.
Service action: 1 Test LSl, wet section service program no.8.
3 Check optical fibre, replace it if faulty.
5 Replace Wet Section Distribution PCB.
6 Check Pl wet section service program no 7.
MAIN VALVE ERROR

Interpretation: Optocoubler detected main valve misalignment.
ABL action: Tries adjust Main Valve maximum 5 times, then Fatal error: -
Main valve error. Rinse.
Service action: 1 Check Main valve wet section service program no. 7.
2 Check function of Optocoubler
3 Replace Main valve.
RINSE ERROR A
Interpretation: No rinse solution detected by LS4.
ABL action: Calibrations are not accepted. Analyzer not READY.
Operator action: Replace Rinse Solution bottle (ABL5xO: S4901, ABL505:
S4921).
Call a rinse or Refill program (Maintenance).
Service action: 1 Check Rinse Solution tubing.
3.4 - 6 REVISED 92.01 .17

l TROUBLESHOOTING
2 Test LS4 wet section service program no. 8.

3 Check optical fibre, replace it if faulty
4 Replace LS4 if defective.
7 Check Pl wet section service program no. 7.
8 Check Valves wet section service program no. 6.
RINSE ERROR B
Interpretation: Malfunction in liquid system transport. LSI seeing liquid
when expected empty.
ABL action: Calibrations are not accepted. Analyzer not READY.
Operator action: Rinse solution bottle mounted properly? Check and correct
if necessary.
Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR
A.
Check the Wet Section for leakage or saft deposits at:
Electrodes: Remove electrodes and clean upper sur-
face of the electrode chambers.
5 Test Pl, wet section service program no. 7.
6 Replace wet sectioncontrol PCB.
8 Replace Electrode Chambers.
0 RINSE ERROR C
Interpretation: Malfunction in liquid system transport. LSl, LS2 or LS4
detecting liquid when expected empty.
Opera for action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR
A.
Service action: 1 Test LSl , LS2 and LS4, wet section service program no.
8.
2 Check optical fibers, replace if faulty.
0
REVISED 92.01 .I7 3.4 - 7
TROUBLESHOOTING

8 Replace Electrode Chambers or LS4 if faulty.
SBS ERROR A
Interpretation: No Salt-bridge solution (2) detected. LS5 did not sense liquid
when expected.
ABL action: All pH calibration and measurement data have?, and . . . . . for
pH reading
Operator action: Replace Salt-bridge Solution (ABL5xO: S4915, ABL505:
S4935). Call Tubing refill program (Maintenance).
Service action: 1 Test function of LS5.
5 Test function of Pl .
7 Check function of V2 and V6.
SBS ERROR B
Interpretation: Malfunction in Salt Bridge Solution transport, LSI detected
liquid during replacement of SBS front in Rinse program.
ABL action: All pH calibration and measurement data have ?, and . . . . . for
pH reading
Operator action: Check Salt-bridge solution level.
Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR
A.
3.4 - 8 REVISED 92.01.17

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
8 Replace electrode chambers if Electrode Chambers is
faulty.
TEMP. ERROR
Interpretation: Temperature in thermostatted unit outside 37.0 +/- 0.2 C.
A BL action: All measurement data have ?. Automatic calibration not
performed. Calibrations are not accepted.
Operator action: Check ambient temperature are within 15 C to 34 C.
ABL 500 has performed a Startup from cold condition, wait
for TEMP. error to disappear.
Check fan filter. Replace if dirty.
Service action: 1 Check wet section temperature, test procedure 2.3.
2 Replace wet section control PCB
3 Replace heating foil for heated panel.
4 Replace thermistors for electrode chambers.
TOTAL CAL NEEDED

Interpretation: Total cal required after maintenance procedure, or last total
cal not completed due to errors.
A BL action: All data with ? after measurement.
Operator action: Check for specific error in SYSTEM RECORS IN LAST
WASTE FULL
Interpretation: Waste Detector has detected waste container full.
A BL action: Message: WARNING! Waste container is full! Replace con-
tainer.
Operator action: Replace waste container and press the Continue softkey.
Service action: 1 Perform Waste check sec. 2.4.
2 Replace Waste Detector.
WASTE SENSOR ERROR

Interpretation: Waste sensor defective. Voltage level from waste detector
less than 500 mV or higher than 4500 mV.
A BL action: None.
Service action: 1 Perform Waste checkout sec.2.4.
Replace Waste Detector.
l REVISED 93.01.15 3.4 - 9

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
SYSTEM RECORDS FROM LAST CALIBRATION
CAL ERROR A
Interpretation: Liquid detected in sensor LSI .
ABL action: Rinse. CAL NEEDED.
Operator action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR A.
Electrodes: Remove electrodes and clean upper surface of the
electrode chambers.
Service action: 1 Test LSI, wet section service program no. 8.
CAL ERROR B
Interpretation: Liquid detected in sensor LS2.
electrode chambers.
Service action: Test LS2, wet section service program no. 8.
Check optical fibre, replace it if faulty.
Test valves, wet section service program no. 6.
Test Pl , wet section service program no. 7.
Replace Electrode Chambers.
CAL ERROR C
Interpretation: Calibrating solution (3) not detected by liquid sensor LSl .
0
REVISED 92.01.24 3.5 - 1
TRO

electrode chambers.
CAL ERROR D
Interpretation: Calibrating solution (3) not detected by LS2.
Operator action: Replace Calibrating Solution container.
4 Replace measuring chambers if LS2 is defective.
7 Check Pl wet section service program no. 7.
CAL ERROR E
Interpretation: S1565 Calibrating Solution (3) not detected by liquid sensor LS3.
Operator action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR A. -
3.5 - 2 REVISED 92.01.24

TROUBLESHOOTING
l
CAL ERROR F
Interpretation: Calibrating solution (4) not detected by liquid sensor LSl .
Opera for action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR A.
electrode chambers.
Service action: 1 Test LSI , wet section service program no. 8.
5 Test PI, wet section service program no. 7.
CAL ERROR G
Interpretation: Calibrating solution (4) not detected by LS2.
Operator action: Replace Calibrating Solution container.
4 Replace electrode chambers if LS2 is defective.
7 Check Pi wet section service program no. 7.
CAL ERROR H
Interpretation: Calibrating Solution (4) not detected by liquid sensor LS3.
A BL action: Rinse. CAL NEEDED.
REVISED 92.01.24 3.5 - 3

TROUBLESHOOTING

CAL ERROR I
Interpretation: Unhomogenous Calibrating Solution (3).
Operator action: Check Calibration Solution properly mounted. Remedy if necessary.
Check System Status for other errors, e.g. RINSE ERROR A.
electrode chambers.
CAL ERROR J
Interpretation: lnhomogenous Calibrating Solution (4).
Operator action: Check Calibration Solution properly mounted. Remedy if necessary.
electrode chambers.
3.5 - 4 REVISED 92.01.24

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
CAL ERROR K
Interpretation: Liquid detected in LS3.
A BL action: Rinse. CAL NEEDED.
Operator action: Check Calibration Solution (4) properly mounted. Remedy if necessary.
electrode chambers.
0 2 Check optical fibre, replace it if fauIty.Check wet section tubing.

4 Test P2, wet section service program no. 7.
CAL ERROR L
Interpretation: Leakage in oxi-system.
A BL action: Oximetry data with ?.
Operator action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. MEAS ERROR 0 and MAN.
CAL ERROR 0. J
Check the Wet Section for leakage or salt deposits at Hemolyzer Unit
Service action: 1 Check wet section tubings at Hemolyzer Unit.
2 Test valves V2 and V3, wet section service program no. 6.
3 Replace Hemolyzer Unit.
CAL GAS ERROR

Interpretation: Gas error during calibration.
ABL action: All data with ? CAL NEEDED.
Opera for action: Check CO2 pressure in the cylinder.
Check tubing from CO2 cylinder.
Service action: 1 Check System Status for other errors.
2 Check CO2 pressure.
4 Test gas mixer. Test procedure 2.5.
7 Replace CO2 pressure transducer.
6 Replace air pressure transducer.
CAL RINSE ERROR

Interpretation: Rinse error during calibration.
REVISED 92.01.24 3.5 - 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
ABL action: Data not accepted CAL NEEDED.

Operator action: Rinse solution bottle mounted properly? Check and correct if necessary.
electrode chambers.
Service action: 1 Test liquid sensors, wet section service program no. 8.
CAL SBS ERROR

Interpretation: No Salt-bridge Solution (2) during last calibration on Calibrating Solution
(3).
No Salt-bridge Solution (2) during last calibration on Calibrating Solution
(4).
ABL action: Data with ? and . . . . . instead of pH, K+, Na+, Ca++/CI- readings (also on
subsequent measurements).
Check the Salt-bridge solution bottle and nipple for clogging.
5 Test PI wet section service program no. 7.
8 Replace reference well if LS5 is faulty.
CAL TEMP ERROR

Interpretation: Temperature in thermostatted unit outside 37.0 C f 0.2 C during
calibration.
ABL action: All data have ?. Automatic calibration not performed. Manual called
calibrations are not accepted.
3.5 - 6 REVISED 92.01.24

l TROUBLESHOOTING
Operator action: Check ambient temperature is within 15 C to 34 C.

ABL has performed a Startup from cold condition, wait for TEMP. error
to disappear.
Check fan filter. Replace if dirty.
Service action: 1 Check wet section temperature, test procedure 2.3.
3 Replace heating foil for heated panel.
4 Replace thermistors for electrode chambers.
CAL 2 SBS ERROR

Interpretation: No Salt-bridge Solution (2) during last Cal 2.
ABL action: Data with ? and . . . . . instead of pH, K+, Na+, Ca++/CI- readings (also on
subsequent measurements).
Check the Salt-bridge solution bottle and nipple for clogging.
5 Test Pl wet section service program no. 7.
8 Replace reference well, if LS5 is faulty.
TROUBLESHOOTING
l
SYSTEM RECORDS FROM LAST MEASUREMENT
MEAS ERROR A
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LSl detected liquid with open inlet flap.
ABL action: Acoustic alarm. Rinse.
electrode chambers.
MEAS ERROR B
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LS2 detected liquid with open inlet flap.
electrode chambers.
MEAS ERROR C
l
REVISED 92.01.24 3.6 - 1
TROUBLESHOOTING

MEAS ERROR D
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LS2 detected liquid during blood sample injection.
electrode chambers.
MEAS ERROR E
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LSl detected liquid during gas sample injection.
A BL action: Acoustic alarm. Rinse.
Operator action: Check for condensation in gas sample.
electrode chambers.
3.6 - 2 REVISED 92.01.24

TROUBLESHOOTING
l
MEAS ERROR F
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LS2 detected liquid during gas sample injection.
electrode chambers.
MEAS ERROR G
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LS4 detected liquid gas sample injection.
0 3.6 - 3
REVISED 92.01.24
TROUBLESHOOTING
MEAS ERROR K
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LSl detected liquid during sample processing.
ABL action: Rinse.
electrode chambers.
MEAS ERROR L
Interpretation: Liquid sensor LS2 detected liquid during sample processing.
A BL action: Rinse.
electrode chambers.
MEAS ERROR M
Interpretation: LS3 detected liquid during sample processing.
ABL action: Rinse.
3.6 - 4 REVISED 92.01.24

l TROUBLESHOOTING

MEAS ERROR N
Interpretation: No sample detected during sample processing.
ABL action: Rinse.
Operator action: Clots in sample? Too small sample volume?
electrode chambers.
Service action: 1 Test LSl, LS2 and LS4 wet section service program no. 8.
8 %$?!iZ&e E.&%sssc&ec~~~bses~Q~ cs4.
MEAS ERROR 0
ABL action: Oximetry data with ?.
Operator action: CheckSystem Statusforothererrors, e.g. CAL ERROR Land MAN. CAL
ERROR 0.
Check the Wet Section for leakage or salt deposits at Hemolyzer Unit
MEAS GAS ERROR

Interpretation: Gas error during measurement.
ABL action: All data with ?.
Operator action: Check CO, pressure in the cylinder.
Check tubing from CO, cylinder.
REVISED 92.01.24 3.6 - 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
SYSTEM RECORDS FROM LAST MANUAL CALIBATION
MAN. CAL ERROR A

Interpretation: Liquid sensor LSl detected liquid with open inlet flap.
electrode chambers.
MAN. CAL ERROR B

electrode chambers.
l Call liquid sensor adj. (Maintenance).
MAN. CAL ERROR C

REVISED 92.01.24 3.7 - 1

TROUBLESHOOTING

MAN. CAL ERROR K

Interpretation: Liquid sensor LSI detected liquid during sample processing.
A BL action: Rinse.
electrode chambers.
Service action: 1 Test LSI, wet section service program no. 8.
MAN. CAL ERROR L

Interpretation: Liquid sensor LS2 detected liquid during sample processing.
ABL action: Rinse.
Check the Wet Section for leakage or satt deposits at:
electrode chambers.
3.7 - 2 REVISED 92.01.24

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
6 Replace wet section controlPCB.
MAN. CAL ERROR M

Interpretation: LS3 detected liquid during sample processing.
ABL action: Rinse.
0 Call liquid sensor adj. (Maintenance).
MAN. CAL ERROR N

Interpretation: No sample detected during sample processing.
ABL action: Rinse.
Opera for action: Too small sample volume?
electrode chambers.
Service action: 1 Test LSI , LS2 and LS4 wet section service program no. 8.
8 Replace Electrode Chambers or LS4.
REVISED 92.01.24 3.7 - 3

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAN. CAL ERROR 0

ABL action: Oximetry data with ?.
Operator action: Check System Status for other errors, e.g. MEAS ERROR 0 and CAL
ERROR L.
Check the Wet Section for leakage or salt deposits at the Hemolyzer
Unit.
3.7 - 4 REVISED 92.01.24

TROUBLESHOOTING
OTHER RECORD
Wet section
error Codes TheStart up/Restart screen will be displayed with the following message:
Wet section control fault. Error code x
where x = 0 : power on reset
1 : unknown fault
2 : prom error
3 : ram error.
The message will be printed out as well.
The start up program is performed automatically after 10 seconds.
Too low mains

voltage The Start up/Restart screen will be displayed with the following message:
Mains too low, which will also be printed out.
This message remains on the screen as long as the mainsvoltage is up to normal again
(10 seconds or longer) , after which the start up program is performed automatically.
QUESTION MARKS
The following errors give rise to ? on display and printout:

For all measured - TEMP ERROR and/or GAS ERROR at the start of a measurement or calibration
and derived - RINSE ERROR at the start of calibration
parameters - INSUFFICIENT or INHOMOGEN. SAMPLE
- errors in the wet section that interrupt a calibration
For derived E.g. if ABE and SBE are outside the k.30 range, the indication will be:
parameters
? ABE .....
? SBC .....
? SBE .....
0 SYSTEM STATUS LOG
Purpose To view and print out the list of records registered by the ABL during its operation. The
following information is available:
Record fype describes the record group the error belongs to.
State describes the instrument status during which the record has been
registered. Calibration, measurement, and QC measurement are
identified with number (e.g. QC meas. # . ..).
Date/Time gives the date and time for the registered record.The latest detected
record is placed last in the list.
To enter System
status log Press the softkeys: Menu / Data Management I System status log.
The cursor is positioned on the latest record.
l REVISED 92.01.24 3.8 - 1

m TROUBLESHOOTING
3.9 ELECTRONIC AND SOFTWARE ERROR MESSAGES
MAIN COMPUTER AND MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES

Internal errors will cause a stop in the program execution. The error messages are
not intended for use in the field but for Radiometer Medical R&D department
only. Only a few of the error messages can be of interest to the field engineer.
Those messages have a remark (see the following pages).
The internal errors are divided into 4 groups:
1 Defective hardware (typical PROM/RAM faults).
Corrective action:
1. A hardware fault may be caused by other events than a component
faults. Switch the ABL off and on again.
2. By repeated faults, replace Main Computer board or Program
Memory board.
2 Software errors, revealed by consistency check. The Error Message must be
reported to Radiometer Medical A/S, Technical Service Department.
Corrective action:
1, Switch the ABL off and on again to restart the system.
2. By repeated faults, call Other Service Program lo, and press Clear
Ail. When the screen shows the message Total cJ,earing complete
switch the ABL off and on again.
3. Replace Main Computer board or Program Memory board.
3 Inconsistent data structure caused by software error and revealed by
consistency check. The Error Message must be reported to Radiometer
Medical AJS, Technical Service Department.
Corrective action:
1. Switch the ABL off and on again to restart the system.
2. By repeated faults, call Other Service Program 10 and press Clear
All. When the screen shows the message Total clearing complete
switch the ABL off and on again.
3. Replace Main Computer board or Program Memory board.
4 Hardware and software do not match.
Corrective action:
1. Chek Software vesion is correct for the instrument.
2. Check that the correct prints are mounted.
3. Check if any of the reuired option prints are defect.
Revised 90.11.06 3.9-l

TROUBLESHOOTING
All internal errors will display error messages on the screen. The screen will be black with white text,
in the format shown below:
....... ... ................................ .._.....................................................................~
Internal error - <error type > : <error message>
Please report the following sequence

to Radiometer - exactly as shown:
> mm##-vvvv-vv-ssss-iiii <
:...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~
Screen picture
Report format:
_
mm## FaOO for fatal errors. For other internal error mm is error type and
##a code number.
vvvv-vv Version identification of system software.
....
5555-1111 Place in program for the error and identification of FaOO errors.
Interpretation Internal errors are divided into the following four types:
of internal Calc: Calculation program module.
error messages: Fatal error: Exception errors.
OS: Operating System program module.
Unpack: Display program module.
The type code refersto the part of the software where the error is located.
3.9-2 Revised 90.11.06

TROUBLESHOOTING
List of “Internal error”messages.
Calc:
mm## Group Error Message Remark

I
CaO 1 2 Count out of range May be fault in Wet section, not
t- giving acceptable data.
Ca02 2 Parameter error Same as above
Ca03
t- 2 Tabel overflow Same as above
Ca04 Prev. cal not finished Same as above
Ca05 Internal error Same as above

Datcol not init. Same as above
Cant diff. Same as above
Unknown count Same as above
Cant set baro Same as above
Unknown QC type I Same as above I

DO _.. error 1 Same as above I
Statistics error I Same as above I
I CaOD 2 Cal. not init. Same as above
I CaOE 2 QC not accepted Same as above
I CaFF 2 Not implemented
Cann 2 Return code nn May be fault in Wet Section, not

giving acceptable data.
Fatal error:
FaOO 1,2 Attemp to write to prom address Replace Main CPU PCB or Main
Memory PCB.
FaOO 1, ? Attention key pressed If Attn. key has not been pressed
replace Main CPU PCB.
FaOO 1 Checksum at PROM # n Replace Main Memory PCB.
FaOO 2 EMsg picture invalid
FaOO 2 EVar picture invalid
FaOO 2 Enumeration overflow
FaOO 2 ErrorExpl overflow
FaOO 2 ErrorMask overflow
Revised 90.11.06 3.9-3

TROUBLESHOOTING
Fatal error:
FaOO 2 ErrorMsg overflow
FaOO 2 Foreign language
FaOO 2,3 Layout build error
FaOO 1 Main valve error Continuously incorrect Main

valve position.
FaOO NVRAM bootable After activating Enable disk

booting, used by R&D
department.
FaOO 1 Parity error in main ram Replace Main CPU PCB.
FaOO 1 Parity error in video ram Replace Main CPU PCB.
I FaOO I 1 Parity error in graphics ram Replace Graphic module
I FaOO I 2 Picpoint error
FaOO 2 Print build ovfl.
FaOO 2,3 QClog failure
QCplot failure
QCrange fai I ure
QCrestore failure
Ram write/read at hhhh:llll Replace Main CPU PCB.
Setup destruct Probably defect EPROM, replace

Main Memory PCB.
I
FaOO I 2,3 Tabel build error
L
FaOO Total clearing complete This message will appear after
activating Clear all soft key in
other service program No. 10.
After this message switch the
ABL500 off and on again
FaOO 2 Type mismatch
I FaOO I 2,3 Unit conversion
WS communication Problems with communication to

the Wet Section Control, can also
be a fault in the ring network.
3.9-4 Revised 90.11.06

l TROUBLESHOOTING
Fatal error:
FaOO 2 Warmstart
FaOO 2 DM returns n
2 Logcomb error
4 Missing or illegal key install or replace the Softvare

Gate 7
FaOO 4 No oximetry system
0 FaOO 2 String pool exhausted
OS:
mm## Gr. Error Message Remark
I OS01 2 Overflow in pcb tabel
I OS02 2 Overflow in ref table
1 Overflow in scb table
I OS04 1 2 r Overflow
~~~~~ ~~in rcb table I I
OS10 2 Illegal pGroup
I OS11 2 Illegal basePrio
I OS12 2 illegal parameters
I OS13 I 2 l Illegal process I I

OS14 2 illegal semaphore
OS15 2 Illegal time

I
l Illegal
I I I
I
I I 2 date I I
F
OS16
OS17 2 Illegal serial number
OS18 2 Illegal region
2 Illegal context
2 Illegal timeout
2 Illegal bank
2 Illegal int id
I-OS20 2 Semaphore overrun
Revised 91.10.04 3.9-5

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
I mm## 1 Group 1 Error Message

I
Remark
I
I OS21 1 2 1 Con access violation I I
1 OS22 I 2 1 Message quota exceeded I I
1 OS23 1 2 I Message queue empty I I
OS24 2 Message queue not empty
OS25 2 No such message
I OS30 I 2 I Timeout I I
1
I
OS31 12
I
I I
Part order not observed I
I
II
I I
I
I OS32 1 2 1 No regions entered
I OS40 I 2 1 Real time clock error I I

OS41 2 Pid list overrun
OS50 2 lloop error
1 OS60 I 2 l Vector already set I I

I OS61 I 2 I lnt has occured
1 OS62 12 I Int access violation I I

OSnn 2 Return code nn
Unpack:
I UnOl I 2 I PCVSDD error
I Un02 I 2 I Parameter error I I

Un03 2 Stack empty
Un04 2 Scroll field error
Un05 2 Stack error
Un06 2 Unknown segment type
I Un07 I 2 l Not implemented I I

I Un08 I 2 l String table too short I I
I
I
U n09 I 2
I
l
I
Not a popup picture I
I
I
I
3.9-6 Revised 91.04.08

TROUBLESHOOTING
Unoack:
mm## Group Error Message
I UnOA 2 Hourglass is off
I UnOB 2 Top reached
1 UnOC Bottom reached
Cant scroll
Picture mismatch
Illegal testpicture
0 Return code nn
WET SECTION ERROR MESSAGES
Wet Section Control PCB fault:

Error code 0
ABL action: Performs a Power On Reset of the ABL.
Operator action: None
Interpretation: Watchdog circuit or power supply on Wet Section Control PCB has
reset the Wet Section CPU.
Service action: 1 Check the wet section voltages.
0 2
3
Replace Wet Section Control PCB.
Replace the Power Supply PCB in Base Unit.
4 Replace the Main Computer PCB.
Error code 1
Interpretation: Unknown cause of reset.
2 Replace Wet section Control PCB.
3 Replace the Power Supply PCB in Base Unit.
Revised 91.04.08 3.9-7

TROUBLESHOOTING
0
Error code 2
Interpretation: PROM checksum error detected on the Wet Section Control PCB.
Error code 3
Interpretation: RAM read/write error detected on the Wet Section Control PCB.
ERROR MESSAGES DURING PROGRAMMING FEPROMs
Note: After remedy of the error the ABL must be turned off and then back on and the program
restated.
Error code 2
Interpretation: Erase of FEPROMs failed.
Service action: 1 Restart the program. If Bank 8 and 15 have erased use Boot PCB.
2 If the error is still there, replace Main Computer PCB.
Error code 3
Interpretation: Programming of FEPROMs failed.
Service action: 1 Restart the program. If bank 8 and 15 have been erased use Boot
PCB.
2 If the error is still there, replace Main Computer PCB.
Error code 4
Interpretation: Vpp error.
Service action: 1 Check SW- switch on the rear of Main Computer Unit.
3.9-8 Revised 91.04.08

6 TROUBLESHOOTING
2 Replace Main Computer PCB

Error code 5
Interpretation: Error in FLASH.DSC file.
Service action: 1 Try with a new disk.
Error code 100

Interpretation: Fatal disk error.
Service action: 1 Try with another disk.
2 Replace disk drive.
3 Replace Main Computer PCB.
Error code 10 1
Interpretation: No disk drive detected.
Service action: 1 Chek mounting of disk drive.
2 Replace disk drive.
Error code 102

Interpretation: File not found.
Service action: 1 Replace the disk with the corect one.
Error code 105

Interpretation: Disk not inserted.
Service action: 1 Insert disk.
2 If error isstill there replace disk drive.
Error code 109

Interpretation: Fatal File error.
Service action: 1 Replace the disk.
Revised 91.04.08
a TROUBLESHOOTING
3.10 ABL50 System Status Records
This section includes the compressed as well as the extended system status record codes.
In order to make the ABL50 display extended error codes, select Print extended errors in Service Program
No. 13.
3.10.1 General Message Codes
Compressed Numerical Codes Extended Numerical Codes Detailed Service

and Description and Description Manual Refence
1. TEMP. ERROR 100 TEMPERATURE ERROR Section 3.4 - 9

2. GAS ERROR 101 GAS ERROR A 3.4 - 3
102 GAS ERROR B \ 3.4 - 3
3. RINSE ERROR 103 RINSE ERROR A 3.4 - 7
104 RINSE ERROR B 3.4 - 7
114 RINSE ERROR C 3.4 - 7
4. CLEANING ERROR 115 CLEANING ERROR A 3.4 - 1
116 CLEANING ERROR B 3.4 - 1
5. SBS ERROR 105 SBS ERROR A 3.4 - 8
106 SBS ERROR B 3.4 - 8
6. CAL NEEDED 110 CAL1 NEEDED 3.4 - 1
111 CAL2 NEEDED 3.4 - 1
112 TOTAL CAL NEEDED 3.4 - 1
7. FLUSH ERROR 113 FLUSH ERROR 3.4 - 2
8. pCO2 FLUSH ERROR 801 pCO2 DRIFTING 3.3 - 10
9. pO2 FLUSH ERROR 800 pO2 GAS FLUSH DRIFT 3.3 - 13
802 pO2 DRIFTING 3.3 - 13
10. WASTE FULL 120 WASTE FULL 3.4 - 9
11. MAINT. PROG. ERROR 117 MAINT. PROG. ERROR (NO SOLUTION) 3.4 - 6
1 INLET NOT CLOSED (DECONTAMINATION) 3.1 - 1
2 INLET NOT CLOSED (PROTEIN REMOVAL) 3.1 - 1
8 PROGRAM NOT STARTED (DECONT.) 3.1 - 2
9 PROGRAM NOT STARTED (PROT. REM.) 3.1 - 2
12. MAIN VALVE ERROR 126 MAIN VALVE ERROR 3.4 - 6
13. BATTERY TOO LOW 127 BATTERY TOO LOW 3.4 - 1
14. WASTE SENSOR ERR. 118 WASTE SENSOR ERROR 3.4 - 9
15. LS ERROR 121 LSl ERROR 3.4 - 4
122 LS2 ERROR 3.4 - 4
124 LS4 ERROR 3.4 - 4
125 LS5 ERROR 3.4 - 5
16. PRINTER ERROR 1100 3.10.4
17. TRANSMISSION ERROR 1150 3.10.4
WRITTEN 93.01.15 3.10 - 1

TROUBLESHOOTING
3.10.2 MEASUREMENT MESSAGE CODES
1. pH ERROR 700 pH OUT OF RANGE 3.3 - 11

701 pH UNSTABLE 3.3 - 12
2. pCO2 ERROR 702 pCO2 OUT OF RANGE 3.3 - 10
703 pCO2 UNSTABLE 3.3 - 11
3. pO2 ERROR 704 jr102 OUT OF RANGE 3.3 - 13
705 pO2 UNSTABLE 3.3 - 14
4. BAROMETER ERROR 706 BAR0 OUT OF RANGE 3.3 - 1
5. INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE 401 INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE 3.2 - 1
6. INHOMOGENEOUS SAMPLE 400 INHOMOGENEOUS SAMPLE 3.2 - 1
7. MEASURE TEMP. ERROR 300 MEAS. TEMP. ERROR 3.6 - 6
8. MEASURE GAS ERROR 301 MEAS. GAS ERROR 3.6 - 5
9. MEASURE SBS ERROR 303 MEAS. SBS ERROR 3.6 - 5
10. MEASUREMENT LS ERROR 304 MEAS. ERROR A (LSI) 3.6 - 1
305 MEAS. ERROR B (LS2) 3.6 - 1
306 MEAS. ERROR C (LS4) 3.6 - 1
308 MEAS. ERROR E (LSI) 3.6 - 2
309 MEAS. ERROR F (LS2) 3.6 - 3
310 MEAS. ERROR G (LS4) 3.6 - 3
314 MEAS. ERROR K (LSI) 3.6 - 4
315 MEAS. ERROR L (LS2) 3.6 - 4
316 MEAS. ERROR M (LS4) 3.6 - 4
11. MEASUREMENT ERROR 317 MEAS. ERROR N 3.6 - 5
0 INLET NOT CLOSED 3.1 - 1
5 INLET CLOSED BEFORE REQUESTED 3.1 - 1
6 NO SAMPLE DETECTED (INJECTION) 3.1 - 1
7 NO SAMPLE DETECTED (ASPIRATION) 3.1 - 1
3.10.3 CALIBRATION MESSAGE CODES
1. pH ERROR 500 pH OUT OF LIMITS 3.3 - 11

501 pH DRIFTING 3.3 - 11
502 pH SENSITIVITY ERROR 3.3 - 12
503 pH UNSTABLE 3.3 - 12
2. pCO2 ERROR 504 pCO2 OUT OF LIMITS 3.3 - 10
505 pCO2 DRIFTING 3.3 - 10
506 pCO2 SENSITIVITY ERROR 3.3 - 11
507 pCO2 UNSTABLE 3.3 - 11
513 pCO2 GAS CAL ERROR 3.3 - 5
3. pO2 ERROR 508 pO2 ZERO HIGH 3.3 - 14
509 pO2 DRIFTING 3.3 - 13
510 pO2 SENSITIVITY ERROR 3.3 - 14
511 pO2 UNSTABLE 3.3 - 14
4. BAROMETER ERROR 512 BAR0 OUT OF LIMITS 3.3 - 1
5. CAL2 ERROR 514 CAL2 ERROR 3.3 - 5
6. TOTAL CAL ERROR 515 TOTAL CAL ERROR 3.3 - 15
3.10 - 2 WRITTEN 93.01.15

a TROUBLESHOOTING
7. CAL TEMP. ERROR 200 CAL TEMP. ERROR 3.5 - 6

8. CAL GAS ERROR 201 CAL GAS ERROR 3.5 - 5
9. CAL SBS ERROR 203 CAL SBS ERROR 3.5 - 6
204 CAL SBS ERROR 3.5 - 6
205 CAL2 SBS ERROR 3.5 - 7
10. CAL LS ERROR 1 206 CAL ERROR A (LSl) 3.5 - 1
207 CAL ERROR B (LS2) 3.5 - 1
11. CAL LS ERROR 2 208 CAL ERROR C (LSl) 3.5 - 1
211 CAL ERROR F (LSl) 3.5 - 3
12. CAL RINSE ERROR 202 CAL RINSE ERROR 3.5 - 5
13. CAL SOLUTION ERROR 209 CAL ERROR D 3.5 - 2
212 CAL ERROR G 3.5 - 3
214 CAL ERROR I 3.5 - 4
a 215 CAL ERROR J 3.5 - 4
3.10.4 SPECIAL ABL50 ERRORS
16. PRINTING ERROR 1100 PRS15:

Printer error during last printout.
Check that there is paper in the printer.
Check that the printer is switched on and is on-line.
Check that the printer is properly connected.
Check that Printer has been selected for Port 3 and/or
Ticket for Port 2 under interface setup (Setup program 8).
Ticket printer:
Check that the setup for the ticket printer (port 2) is correct.
Correct if necessary.
17. SENDING ERROR 1150 Transmission error during last data transfer to connected
computer.
0 Check that the computer is properly connected.
Theck that Computer has been selected for RSl50 in
Interface setup (Setup program 8).
Check that the computer setup (RS150) is correct.
Call send report/status in the Print/send menu.
Correct setup if necessary.
3.10.5 ABL50 INTERNAL ERRORS
Internal errors will cause a stop in the normal main computer program execution and an error code will be
displayed on the LCD:
AA-BBBB-V.W-DDDD
where AA designates the source
WRITTEN 93.01.15 3.10 - 3

TROUBLESHOOTING
BBBB designates a serial decimal number
V.VV designates the software version
DDDD designates a serial decimal number
The errors are divided in 4 main groups depending upon the source of the problem.
AA We Wet section or wet section related error

Rt Real time error (software)
Sd Selfdiagnostic error
Un Unknown error
Wet section errors:
We-OOOO-v.w-0001 Wet section is not Check the ringnet (flat cable connections). Restart the
responding ABL. Replace wet section control board, power supply
board, main computer board or Keypad/display if error
reoccurs.
Error in WS trans- Check the ringnet (flat cable connections). Restart the
mission protocol. ABL. Replace main computer board if error
reoccurs.
We-OOOO-v.w-0011 WS timer overflow Error in wet section timer. Restart the ABL. Replace wet
section control board if error reoccurs.
We-OOOO-v.w-0012 Main valve error Continuously incorrect main valve position. Check
photosensor connection to wet section control board.
Check fixation of photosensor and strobo-disc. Check
that holes in strobo-disc are free from dust ect.
We-0000~v.w-0013 RAM error RAM read/write error on wet section control board.
Restart the ABL. Replace wet section control board if
error reoccurs.
EPROM error EPROM checksum error on wet section control board.
error reoccurs.
Watchdog error Watchdog on wet section control board not reset.

error reoccurs.
3.10 - 4 WRITTEN 93.01.15

TROUBLESHOOTING
We-0000~v.w-0050 Calculation error Error in program execution. Restart the ABL. Replace
and main computer board if error reoccurs.
We-0000~v.w-0051
Counts out of range Wet section signal out of range. Check electrode sig-
nals. If OK, restart the ABL. Replace wet section control
board if error reoccurs.
We-OOOO-v.w-0059 Unknown count Wet section signal unknown. Check electrode signals.
If OK, restart the ABL. Replace wet section control
board if error reoccurs.
through main computer board if error reoccurs.
We-OOOO-v.w-0058
and
through main computer board if error reoccurs.
We-OOOO-v.w-0064
Clear all RAM Displayed when the RAM is cleared (service program
no. 14). Restart the ABL by switching off/on.
Software errors (Real time module):
Rt-0000~v.w-0003 Errors in program Restart the ABL. Replace main computer board if error
through execution. reoccurs.
Rt-oooo-v.w-0005
0 Self diagnostics errors:
Sd-0000~v.w RAM error RAM read/write erroron main computer board. Restart
the ABL. Replacemaincomputerboard ifertorreoccurs.
Sd-0001 -v.w FEPROM error FEPROM checksum error on main computer board.
Restart the ABL. Replace main computer if error
reoccurs.
Sd-0002~v.w Illegal software Inconsistency between hardware and actual software.

Restart the ABL. Reload software. Replace software
card and restart/reload if error reoccurs.
Unknown error:
Un-OOOO-v.w Internal error of Report error code to service department (Radiometer

unknown origin. Medical AS).
0 3.10 - 5
WRll-l-EN 93.01 .I5
TROUBLESHOOTING
0
3.10.6 ABL60 Keypad & Display Errors
EPROM/RAM Error
During start-up of ABL50 and when entering the service program the Keypad & Display CPU performs an
EPROM checksum test and an RAM write/read test. If one of these tests fails the instrument displays:
FATAL ERROR, RAM ERROR or FATAL ERROR, EPROM ERROR, respectively.
Switch the instrument off and then on again. Replace the Keypad & Display Board if the error reoccurs.
Ringnet Communication Error
The Keypad 8, Display CPU continuously checks the communication hardware including the ringnet by a
loop-back test. If this test fails the instrument displays: RINGNET COMMUNICATION ERROR.
Perform the ringnet test procedure (section 6.5.1-27) in order to diagnose whether the Ringnet Commu-
nication Error is caused by an error in the Keypad & Display hardware (cable or CPU board) or a problem
elsewhere in the ringnet.
IMPORTANT! During software updating the communication check is disabled and hence the
RINGNET COMMUNICATION ERROR will a/ways be displayed. Under this circumstance the error
message should be ignored.
3.10 - 6 WRITTEN 93.01 .I5

a
l 4. DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS
Introduction
This section describes the dismantling and replacement procedures for those of the modules and
parts, for which it is not obvious how to proceed, or where special precautions should be taken.
Note positions when dismantling, attention should be paid to the positioning and connection of the
tubing and cables, use of screws, etc, which will ease reassembly. You should make a final inspection
after reassembly before switching on.
Replace O-rings and Valve Tubes

Before remounting a unit, clean it and its surroundings where possible. When removing an o-ring
please always make sure to replace it with a new one. The tubing of the tubing valves must also be re-
placed with new ones where they have been disconnected. Use a pair of tweezers when removing a
tubing and cover the tips of the tweezers with tape or pieces of thin tubing to avoid damage, or use
the special Tubing Tweezers, Code No. 920-627.
Special Tools
For further information on the special tools required in the procedures, please refer to the listing in
front of this Service Manual.
The Spare Parts List in Section 9 lists the parts available for servicing the ABLSOO. In addition, the
Spare Parts List states to which extent a unit should be serviced in the field.
0 WARNING: Avoid direct contact with blood-contaminated parts. Use approved

rubber gloves to avoid infection!

DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS
Left-hand Panel of the Base Unit

1 Remove the CO2 cylinder.
2 Remove the two screws located on the rear side of the base station close to the right-hand side,
when seen from the back.
3 Pull out the rear edge of the panel and slide it a little backwards and the panel is free.
4 Disconnect the tube from the gas nipple.
Right-hand Panel of the Base Unit

1 Remove the panel on the rear side of the base unit covering the power supply.
2 Remove the two screws located on the rear side of the base unit close to the left-hand side,
when seen from the back. . . _.
3 Locate the cut-out at the top left side of the frame for the power supply panel and use a screw-
driver to push out the panel.
4 Slide the panel a little backwards and the panel is free. The panel can now be folded down.
Your should be careful when folding down the panel, as the Power Supply PCB is located on
the inside of the panel.
Removal of the Wet Section From the Base Unit

1 Remove the screws marked A on drawing 22523-A4
2 Slide the wet section module straight forward until it is free of the base unit. Watch the cables
and the tubing from the gas mixer. You can now swing the wet section to the right to get free
access to the rear side of the wet section.
3 Remove the two screws at the top of the Wet Section Control PCB and fold down the board to
get access to the rear of the wet section. This position is called Service Position.
Removal of Pumps
1 Select Other Service programs and select program 5 Service Setup. Set Rinse only at power
on to YES, Disregard gas & temp errors * to YES and Inlet and Cover off removal ig-
nored to YES, and then turn off the ABL.
2 Remove the inlet module.
3 Remove the pump tubing from the pump which is to be removed
4 Remove the two screws holding the pump housing, marked E for the left pump and F for
the right pump on drawing 22523-A4
5 Pull the pump straight forward.
Mounting of the Pumps

1 Hold the pump in position and turn the rotor until the clutch engage.
2 Mount the two screws holding the pump.
4-2 Revised 90.11.07

l DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS
Removal of Optical Fibre

1 Place the wet section in Service Position.
2 Disconnect the fibre at the Wet Section Distribution PCB.
3 Remove the clip from the fibre.
4 Pull the fibre through the wet section front panel.
5 Disconnect the fibre from the liquid sensor, leaving the clip on the fibre.
Mounting of Optical Fibre

1 Make sure that approx. two mm of the fibre is through the clip which is mounted on the fibre.
2 Mount the fibre in the liquid sensor and push in the clip.
3 Tread the fibre through the Wet Section front panel. Be sure that there are no sharp bends on
the fibre.
4 Mount a lose clip on the fibre letting two mm go through the clip
5 Mount the fibre in its connector on the Wet Section Distribution PCB, and push in the clip.
6 After completion of the assembling, but before mounting of the Wet Section on the Base Unit,
perform check of Liquid Sensors, Wet Section Service Program No. 8
Removal of the Fan for the Electrode Chambers

on to YES, Disregard gas & temp errors to YES and Inlet and Cover off removal ig-
2 Placethe wet section in Service Position.
3 Remove the air guide cover on the rear side of the wet section, located at the top right-hand
side when looking from the rear side of the wet section.
4 Unplug the fan from the Wet Section Distribution PCB.
5 Remove the fan cover at the front side of the wet section
6 Remove the four finger screws on the front of the fan, if a little tight ,use a plier and a piece of
cloth to protect the screws.
7 Carefully pull out the fan. The rubber gasket behind the grey heated panel may hold the fan a
little tight.
Removal of the Thermostatted Box

1 Take off the top part of the box.
2 Remove the tube connected to the left side of the electrode chambers and pull out the tube
from the thermostatted box.
3 Remove the screw located on the front of the thermostatted box.
4 Tilt the bottom part a little up and pull it forward, be careful that you are free of the prehea-
ters.
Revised 90.11.07 4-3

Removal of the Electrode Chambers

Select Other Service programs and select program 5 Service Setup. Set Rinse only at power
Place the wet section in Service position.
Remove the Thermostatted Box and the Air Guide Screen.
Disconnect the tubing connected to the electrode chambers.
Disconnect the optical fibres for LSl and LS2 at the Wet Section Distribution PCB.
Remove the two screws marked A on drawing 22595-A4
Gently pull the electrode chamber housing forward, watching the optical fibres when pulling
them through the panel.
Turn the electrode chamber housing upside down, remove the two screws holding the clamp
and remove the clamp. The electrode chambers can now be removed from the housing.
Remove the optical fibres from the liquid sensors, LSl and LS2.
Mounting of Electrode Chambers

Mount the optical fibres in LSl and LS2 by following the instruction for mounting of optical
fi bre, page 4-3.
Mount the tube for KCL carefully on the electrode chambers.
Mount the electrode chambers and the light guide in the housing for electrode chambers.
Mount the clamp for the electrode chambers.
Tread the optical fibres through the panel and mount the housing on the heated panel.
Connect the optical fibres to the light tranceiver block.
Mount the Air Guide Screen,
Before mounting of the Wet Section on the Base Unit perform check of the Liquid sensors,
Wet Section Service Program No. 8
Removal of Liquid Sensor 3 Unit.

2 Place Wet Section in Service Position.
3 Disconnect the tubings attached to the unit.
4 Disconnect the optical fibres form the Wet Section Distribution PCB.
5 Remove the ground wire from the rear side of the liquid sensor unit.
6 Remove the plate on top of the liquid sensor unit, using an offset screwdriver, pozidriv 1.
7 Remove the two screws holding the liquid sensor unit and pull it forward, watching that the
optical fibres are of no damage to them.
8 Remove the optical fibres.
4-4 Revised 90.11.07

Installation of Liquid Sensor 3 Unit

1 Follow the dismantling in the opposite direction, and the instruction for mounting of the opti-
cal fibres.
2 Before mounting of the Wet Section on the Base Unit perform check of the Liquid sensor, Wet
Section Service Program No. 8
Replacement of Inlet Tube with LS4

Remove the wet section from the base unit and place it in Service Position.
Remove the inlet module.
Disconnect clear tubing at waste stopper.
5 Disconnect the optical fibres for LS4 from the Wet Section Distribution PCB and remove the
clips from the fibres.
6 Carefully pull the optical fibres to the front side of the wet section.
7 Disconnect the inlet preheater from the Wet Section Distribution PCB and pull the cable to the
front side of the wet section panel.
8 Disconnect all tubings connected to the inlet preheater.
9 Hold the Inlet Preheater and remove the two screws, marked D, drawing No. 22523-A4, and
carefully remove the inlet preheater from the wet section.
10 Disconnect the optical fibres from LS4 leaving the clips on the fibres.
11 Pull the inlet tube out of the inlet preheater and discard the inlet tube with LS4 and O-ring.
12 If there is any heat compound in the preheater, clean it out.
13 Insert the new inlet tube into the inlet preheater.
14 Mount the ends of the optical fibres with the clips to LS4
0 15 Place the new o-ring, coming with inlet tube and LS4 on the front of the Main Valve.
16 Mount the inlet preheater with inlet tube and LS4 on front of the Main Valve.
17 Pull the optical fibres through the wet section panel. Mount the clips on the fibres and connect
the fibres to the Wet Section Distribution PCB.
18 Pull the cable for the inlet preheater through the wet section panel and mount it on the Wet
Section Distribution PCB.
19 Reconnect tubing to the inlet preheater.
20 Remount the clear tubing, coming from Pl, to the waste stopper.
21 Remount the inlet module and the inlet washer.
22 Before mounting of the Wet Section on the Base Unit perform check of the Liquid sensor, Wet
Section Service Program No. 8.
Revised 90.11.07 4-5

Removal of Main Valve

Place the wet section in Service Position.
Remove the inlet module.
Disconnect the clear tube from the waste stopper.
Disconnect all tubes connected to the Main Valve and the inlet preheater.
Disconnect the optical fibres for LS4 at the Wet Section Distribution PCB, and remove the clip
on the fi bre.
7 Carefully pull the optical fibres to the front side of the wet section.
8 Disconnect the inlet preheater from the Wet Section Distribution PCB and pull the cable to the 0
-
front side of of the wet section.
9 Remove the two screws marked D on drawing 22523-A4, and lay aside the inlet preheater.
10 Remove the stepper motor (No. 10 on drawing 22595-A4) from the Main Valve, and lay it aside.
11 Remove the two screws marked B on drawing 22595-A4.
12 Carefully pull the Main Valve out from the back of the wet section.
Mounting of the Main Valve

1 Carefully slide the Main Valve into position from the rear side of the wet section.
2 Mount the two screws holding the Main Valve, marked B on drawing 22595 A-4.
3 Mount the stepper motor on the Main Valve and connect it to Wet Section Distribution PCB.
4 Mount the inlet preheater to the front of the Main Valve with a new o-ring. You should
mount it between LS4 and the front of the Main Valve.
5 Tread the optical fibres through the Wet Section panel and mount them on the Wet Section
Distribution PCB. 0
6 Connect the preheater connector to the Wet Section Distribution PCB.
7 Connect the tubes to the Main Valve and the preheater.
8 Remount the clear tube coming from Pl to the waste stopper.
9 Mount the inlet module.
10 Perform Leakage Test of the Main Valve page 4-7.
Replacement of Gasket with Track in Main Valve
CAUTION: When taking the Main Valve apart it must be done in a clean area.
Numbers in brackets ( ) refer to drawing 22599-A4
4-6 Revised 90.11.07

1 Remove the Main Valve from the wet section.

2 Place the Main Valve on a table with the front pointing up.
3 Remove the screws marked C on drawing 22577-A4.
4 Take off the front of the Main Valve.
5 Remove the gasket for the front part (2).
6 With a small screwdriver carefully lift up the gasket(3) in the slot (8).
7 Remove the support disk (4).
8 Clean the front part of the Main Valve with distilled water, check that the channels from the
nipples are clean. This is done by flushing the channels with distilled water from the nipples
and in.
9
l
Inspect the parts to be installed for dust and scratches,this can be done with magnifying glass
(5 to 10 times). The parts to be inspected are: The inside surface of the front part, the cup (5),
the support disk (4), the gasket (2) ,and the gasket with track (3). No visible dust particles or
scratches must be present.
10 Mount the support disk (4) in the cup (5)
11 Place the gasket with track (3) loosely in the cup with the tracks facing up. Use the flat end of
the mounting tool(code no. 920-709) to press the gasket into the cup (5), in order to make sure
that the surface is flat.
12 Place the front gasket (2) in the Main Valve housing and press it into place with the hollow end
of the mounting tool to ensure that it is pressed down against the housing (3).
13 Mount the front part (1) with the screws, tighten the screws with a torque of 30-40 cNm.
14 Mount the Main Valve in the wet section.
15 Perform the leakage test of Main Valve.
Leakage Test of the Main Valve

1 Select the Pump and Main Valve Test in the service programs.
2 Select Main Valve
3 Press the increase soft key and let the Main Valve perform two fully rotations
4 Press the decrease soft key and let the Main Valve perform two fully rotations.
5 Disconnect the tubing from the rinse nipple on the main valve (position 41 on drawing 22577-A4).
Instead, connect a clear silicone tubing, part no. 840-209 , length 1 meter, to the nipple.
6 Place a beaker 1 m below the nipple with rinse solution and place the free end of the tube con-
nected in item 5 in the beaker.
7 Select wet section service program no. 10.
Set up test program :
a. Activate V2.
b. Set Pl to 60 pL /s. CCW.
C. Set main valve to position 2.
d. Set time to 20 seconds
REVISED 93.01 .I5 4-7

0
e. Press Save step and exit

f. Press start.
When the program stop LS2 shall indicate full, if not check main valve for leaks.
Removal of Waste Detector

onw to YES, Disregard gas & temp errors to YES and Inlet and Cover off removal ig-
2 Place the wet section in Service Position.
3 Remove the two screws at the lower edge of wet section control PCB holding the wet section
control PCB.
4 Place the wet section control PCB on the table.
5 Disconnect waste detector cable.
6 Remove the two screws holding the waste detector, located behind the waste detector PCB.
7 Pull the waste detector backwards.
Installation of Waste Detector

1 Follow the dismantling in opposit direction. Be carefull when mounting the cable for the waste
detector, that the plug is oriented corectly.
2 Check by pressing on the rubber membrane that the thermistor is moving freely.
3 Performe check of Waste detector, Waste Checkout, section 2.4.
Removal of Top Cover From the CRT Compartment

1 Locate the two screws on the back of the CRT compartment. By unscrewing these two screws,
the top cover is released from the compartment.
Removal of Printer Unit

on to YES, and then turn off the ABL.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Loosen the two screws on the left-hand side of the printer unit holding the ground strip.
4 Slide the printer forward to stop.
5 Disconnect the cable between the Printer Control PCB to main computer at the Printer Control
PCB.
6 Loosen the two screws holding the stop bracket until the bracket does not stop the forward
movement of the printer unit.
7 Slide the Printer Unit out.
4-8 Revised 90.11.07

Removal of Floppy Disk Unit (ABLSOO Run 1 - 49, ABL51 O/520 Run l-7)
1 Remove the printer unit
2 Disconnect the cable between Floppy Disk Control PCB and Main Computer PCB at the Floppy
Disk Control PCB.
3 Remove the four 4 mm screws, two on each side holding the Floppy Disk Unit.
4 Slide the Floppy Disk Unit back out of the front panel and lift out.
Removal of Floppy Disk Unit (ABLSOO Run 50 onwards, ABL510/520 Run 8 onwards,
ABL505)
1 Disconnect the cable between floppy disk drive and main computer at the Floppy Disk Drive.
2 Remove the two 4 mm screws, one on each side holding the Floppy Disk Drive.
3 Slide the Floppy Disk Drive back out of the front panel and lift out.
Installation of Floppy Disk Unit

1 Check that the switches or straps position on the Floppy Disk Drive are in accordance with the
tabel below before installatio. New Floppy Disk Drives received from stock may have the manu-
factor settings and must be changed to the settings for ABL
2 Install the floppy disk drive in the reverse order of removal.
Straps or switch settings on Floppy Disk Drives:

The Flloppy disk drives delivered from RADIOMETER commes from different manufactors, which have
different configuration settings. The figures below povide the settings from the manufactor and the
settings when the drive is used in an ABL.
Epson SMD340-100
FIGURE 1
Straps:
Block A Block B Block C Block D Block E
Manufacturer 14-15 4-5 2-3
ABLSXX 14-15 5-13 2-3
Revised 92.02.14
4-9
Replacement of CRT Compartment

Remove the Printer Unit.
Remove the Floppy Disk Unit.
Disconnect the cables connected to the CRT Deflection PCB.
To get access to the nut located in the rear right-hand side of the compartment, you should
remove the CRT Deflection PCB. This can be done by removing the four screws located on the
right side of the CRT compartment.
5 Disconnect the softkey cable from the main computer.
6 Using a 7 mm box wrench, remove the six hexagon nuts located in the bottom of the compart-
ment.
7 Lift off the CRT compartment from the socket.
9 Remove the front panel from the old CRT Compartment by removing the four screws in each
Conner and the one in the middel on the top side.
IO Remove the transportation front panel from the new CRT Compartment and install it on the
old CRT Compartment.
11 Install the front panel on the new CRT Compartment.
12 Reinstall the CRT Deflection PCB in the old CRT compartment.
13 Take the new CRT compartment, and remove the CRT Deflection PCB.
14 Perform the mechanical alignment of Printer Unit below.
15 Perform the installation in reverse order of removal of the compartment.
Mechanical Alignment of Printer Unit
Note: This alignment should only be performed when the CRT monitor has been replaced.
Inspect the mounting of the right side rollers, if the screws are mounted from the top remove
the screws and interchange the top and the bottom metal plates. Then mount the two screws
from the bottom.
Loosen the two screws holding the rollers in each side. Loosen the screws holding the vertical
mounting plates marked with A, see next page.
Mount the printer in the CRT compartment.
Mount spring (920-713) between the hole in the middle of the holder for right side rollers and
the hook in the middle of the holder for left side rollers.
Adjust the printer unit up, down and sideways to center the unit in the cutout in the front
panel. Tighten the screws for the elevation plates A. Tighten the screws for the right rollers
from the bottom and then the screws for the left rollers from the top.
Remove the printer unit from the CRT compartment and install the CRT compartment on the
main computer unit in reverse order of removal of the compartment.
4-12 Revised 91.04.08

l
17 Perform the Photometer Lamp check and adjustment in section 2.13.
Removal of Monochromator and Adaptor.

Place the Wet Section in service position.
Disconnect the seven cables connected to Monochromator Interface PCB.
Remove the screw holding the ground cable on top of the Monochromator Unit.
Remove the three top screws on the right side of the Monochromator Bracket seen from the
back. Loosen the three screws just below the three screws removed. Lift up the top angel
bracket of the Monochromator.
6 Lift up the Monochromator and place it on the table.
7 Dismount the Monochromator Adaptor from the Monochromator.
8 Remove the three screws holding the cover on the adaptor and remove the cover.
9 Remove the two screws and the hexagonal screw holding the adaptor.
10 If the Adaptor or/and the Optical Fibre have to be changed loosen the clamp holding the Opti-
cal Fibre and remove the Optical Fibre from the Monochromator Adaptor.
Installation of Monochromator and Adaptor.

1 If the Optical Fibre has been disconnected from the adaptor, remount the fibre and make sure
that the distance from the back edge of the adaptor to the front end of the fibre is 24 mm, see
drawing 23742-A4. If the adaptor has a stop then mount the fibre against the stop
2 Reassemble and install the monochromator performing step 1 to 10 for removal in reverse
order. For connecting the cables, refer to figure overleaf.
l
3 After installation turn on the ABL and select Wet Section Service program 13, Photodiode
Checkout.
4 Press Lamp on/off to turn on the photometer lamp.
5 Loosen the lock nut on the mirror adjustment screw (item No. 1 on drawing 23742-A4). Adjust
the mirror for maximum mean diode current.
6 If the Optical Fibre has been replaced the tip of the Optical Fibre at the Hemolyzer Unit must
also be adjusted. Loosen the screw holding the optical fibre to the hemolyzer. Adjust the fibre
to maximum mean diode current and make sure that the fibre is not touching the surface of
the hole in the Hemolyzer. There must be light all the way around the tip of the Optical Fibre.
7 Perform Monochromator check page 2.16.
Replacement of Wet Section Control PCB.

After replacement of the Wet Section PCB the following checks must be performed:
1. pO2 Zero Calibration, Wet Section Service Program No. 4.
Revised 91.04.08 4-15

2. Waste Check-out, section 2.4. (Only if 902-053 is installed)

3. Cuvette Compensation, section 2.15 (Only for ABL510/520).
Replacement of Gas Mixer Interface PCB.

After replacement of the Gas Mixer Interface the following adjustments must be performed:
1. Air Flow Monitor adjustment section 2.5 page 6.
2. CO2 Pressure Monitor adjustment section 2.5 page 4.
Replacement of Monochromator Interface PCB.

After replacement of the Monochromator Interface the following adjustments must be per-
formed:
Hemolyzer Driver check, page 2.15.
Photodiode Channels, check page 2.14.
Monochromator cable connections
Installation of Main Computer PCB 901- 782

1. Before installing a new Main Computer PCB, move strap SW705 to position 1 and 2 there-
by connecting the battery for watch and NVRAM.
2. On the removed Main Computer PCB, move strap SW705 to position 2 and 3 and thereby
disconnecting the battery.
Installation of Main Computer PCB 902-146

1. Before installing a new Main Computer PCB, move strap SW705 to position 1 and 2 there-
by connecting the battery for watch and NVRAM.
4-16 Revised 9 1.07.29

a DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS
2. Install the new main computer PCB in ABLSXX. If the ABL does not have a floppy disk in-
stalled, connect the service disk drive. If the Main Computer PCB already has a software
loaded then install the Boot PCB 902-198 as well.
First-time loading of software in a spare part PCB:
3. Insert the program disk in the disk drive.
4. Turn the main power on. The screen below will appear.
Copyright Radiometer A/S 1991

All rights reserved
----- Boot Prom Menu ----
Enter Command :
1) Diskboot
1:
Screen picture
The interpreter program FLASH.HEX will be loaded into the ABL ram. The loading process
can be followed on the screen.
6. By using a small screwdriver or similar, set the SW switch on the rear panel (next to the
serial number plate on the rear panel) ON (right position as seen from the back of the
ABL) when requested on the screen.
After a while the FEPROM erasing/programming/verifying procedure starts. It takes ap-
proximately 4 minutes to complete the procedure.
7. Set the SW switch on the rear panel OFF (left position as seen from the back of the ABL)
when instructed to do so by the screen text.
9. For ABLs without disk drive: Remove the upgrade disk from the service disk drive, dis-
connect the two cables and reconnect the blind plate into
the ABL front panel.
Revised 9 1.07.29 4-17

For ABLs with disk drive: Replace the software upgrade disk with the normal data
disk.
If software has been installed earlier:

3. Insert the program disk in the disk drive.
4. Turn the main power on.
Now a Boot Prom menu appears on the screen. Do not select the RAM choice (1) as it is in-
tended for the ABL production department and requires a special terminal.
If the SW switch on the rear panel is ON (right position as seen from the back of the ABL)
when the main power is turned on a softkey test is called. Carry out the test and continue
to step 5.
The interpreter program FlASH.HEX will be loaded into the ABL ram. The loading process
can be followed on the screen.
6. By using a small screwdriver or similar, set the SW switch on the rear panel (next to the
serial number plate on the rear panel) ON (right position as seen from the back of the
ABL) when requested on the screen.
After a while the FEPROM erasing/programming/verifying procedures start. It takes ap-
proximately 4 minutes to complete the procedures.
7. Set the SW switch on the rear panel OFF (left position as seen from the back of the ABL)
when instructed to do so by the screen text.
9. For ABLs without disk drive: Remove the upgrade disk from the service disk drive, dis-
connect the two cables and reconnect the blind plate into
the ABL front panel.
For ABLs with disk drive: Replace the software upgrade disk with the normal data
disk.
General:
11. On the removed Main Computer PCB, move strap SW705 to position 2 and 3 thereby dis-
connecting the battery.
4-18 Revised 91.07.29

0 DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS
In case of an error during the upgrade procedure, an error code will be displayed on the
screen. For decoding, please refer to the Service Manual section 3.9, page 8.
Setting up Please refer to the Users Handbook for detailed information about how to set-up the
ABL, Book 1, set-up programs.
Installation of Interface PCBs RSl50/100
Mounting ABL500 below run 50 or ABL510/520 below run 8.

1 Switch off the ABLSXX and disconnect it from the mains supply.
2 Remove the blind plate for one of the free option slots on the rear. The
RSlSO/lOO may be inserted into any of the four option slots.
3 Withdraw the flat cable with coloured leads * from within the Base Unit
and connect it to the RSlSO/lOO. It may be necessary to remove the blind
plate of the neighbour option slot in order to get hold of the cable.
* Note. Do not use the grey cable found in ABL510/520 intended for the
software gate.
4 Insert the RSlSO/lOO into the slot and secure it. Remount also the blind
plate of the neighbour option slot, if removed.
5 Connect the ABLSXX to the mains supply and switch on.
6 Verify that the channel(s) are operating correctly by using the loop-back
test service program (other service programs No. 1).
AEL60 (one RS150 only) and first option in ABL~OO run 50 onwards,
ABL510/520 run 8 onwards and ABL505.
1 Switch off the ABLSXX and disconnect it from the mains supply.
2 Remove the blind plate for the second option slot on the rear, counting
from the terminal plate.
3 Withdraw the flat cable marked 1 from within the Base Unit and con-
nect it to the matching connector on RSISO/lOO. It may be necessary to
remove the blind plate of the neighbour option slot in order to get hold
of the cable.
4 Insert the RSl!SO/lOO into the slot and secure it. Remount also the blind
plate of the neighbour option slot, if removed.
5 Connect the ABLSXX to the mains supply and switch on.
6 Verify that the channel(s) are operating correctly by using the loop-back
test service program (other service programs No. 1).
REVISED 93.01.15 4-19

Upgrade procedure for ABL50 to ABL500
Units needed for upgrade:
1 Control Station 902-l 39

1 Numerical Keypad 902-247
1 Cable, Computer Unit - Base Unit, Wl, 617-877
2 Panels, Blind Cover for Option Slot 888-270
1 Panel with Software Gate 902-215 if Floppy Disk is installed
1 Front Shield, Dark Grey 902-l 44
1 Users Handbook l-4,983-872
1 Software Disk 913-xXx
Procedure:
Warning: parts inside connected to mains. Switch main supply off. Remove the power cable.
Remove terminal panel (978-683) to be able to see the internal power plugs on the Power Supply PCB.
Remove Main Computer Board (902-224) from the rear of the Measuring Station.
Remove internal power cable (636-301) from Main Computer Board to Power Supply.
Mount the internal cable from the Cannon connector Jl mounted on the rear of the Base Unit to the
Power Supply PCB connectors J3 & J4.
Mount the cable #2 in the Panel with Software Gate, if any. (Software gate is necessary if floppy disk is
used in Control Station).
Install the Software Gate Panel and the Blind Panel(s) in the rear of the Measuring Station.
Remount the terminal panel.
Mount the cable (617-877) between the Control Station and the Measuring Station.
Change the Front Shield to 902-144 marked ABL500.
Turn power on. Check the software versions in Wet Section and Control Station according to chapter
9.4 in the Service Manual.
Perform normal start-up procedure. Check that the total calibration results are without any question
marks.
Fill in the ABL50/500 Up/Downgrade Report. Sign it with name and date. File it in a central file.
WRIT-I-EN 92.11 .Ol 4 - 21

Downgrade procedure for ABL500 (Run 50 onwards only) to ABL50
Units needed for downgrade:
Main Computer Board 902-224

Keypad unit 902-227
Cable, Main Computer - Keypad with Display 617-912
Cable, Power supply - Main Computer 636-301
Front Shield, Dark Grey, 902-251
Users Handbook l-2,985-509
Memory Card (Software) 914-xxx
Black lable 980-669
Procedure:
Warning: parts inside connected to mains. Switch main supply off. Remove the power cable.
Remove terminal panel (978-683) to be able to see the internal power plugs on the Power Supply PCB.
Remove the two most left modules from the rear of the Measuring Station. If any of the modules
contain electronic parts, remount it/them in the next vacant slot(s).
Unplug the internal power cable from the Power Supply PCB J3 & J4 (two green plugs). Fasten the
cable with a tyrap as shown in figure 1 to prevent the unconnected end to move around inside the unit.
Do not remove the other end with Cannon plug attached to the rear of the Base Unit.
Mount the internal power cable (636-301) from Power Supply J3 & J4 to Main Computer Board. Fasten
the cable to the cable from Power Supply J2 with a tyrap as shown in figure 2.
Mount the Main Computer board (902-224) in the two most left slots.
Remount the terminal panel.
Insert Memory Card with Software in the main Computer. While pressing the switch through the hole
above the Memory Card, turn power on. Release the switch after 5 seconds. Wait approximately two
minutes until one beep is heard. Switch power off. Remove Memory Card. If the beeper beeps with an
interval of 1 Hz, the programming has failed, please refer to chapter 2.17 Software Upgrade in the
Service Manual.
Mount the cable between the Keypad with Display and the Main Computer.
Cover the name ABLSOO on the serial number plate with the black lable 980-669.
Turn power on. Display will show: System setup invalid, default selected. Press continue to confirm!
Check the software versions in Wet Section and Control Station according to chapter 9.4 in the Service
4 - 22 WRITTEN 92.11 .Ol

l ABL50/500 Up/Downgrade Report
f~ Radiometer Medical A/S
Downgrade (ABLSOO to ABL50):

Measuring Station 000_
Main Computer 902-224
Keypad Unit 902-227
List the software versions shown in Setup program 10 Analyzer ID:
Main -.-
Keypad -*-
WS program -.-
WS control -*-
RSl50 -.-
Upgrade (ABL50 to ABL500):
Measuring Station 000-_

Control Station 902-l 39
List the software versions shown in Other Service Programs 4 Software Versions:
Main processor -*-

Operating system -*-
I/O Processor -.-
Wet Section program -*-
Wet Section control -*-
Printer Control -.-
RSl50 interface -*-
RSIlOO interface -.-
The undersigned confirms that the Up/Downgrade has been carried out according to the
procedure described in the Service Manual page 4-21 and that the information stated is
correct.
Name (Block letters)
Date: Signature
Please IMMEDIATELY return this report to your central Up/Downgrade file.
RADIOMETERS
0
COPENHAC3EN;
0 5. MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Maintenance of the ABL should normally be performed by the user as described in the ABL Users
Handbook and in the ABL Maintenance Schedules. In addition to this maintenance, the service engin-
eer should always make a maintenance check after having serviced the instrument. The yearly main-
tenance programme must also be carried out by the service engineer.
WARNING: Avoid direct contact with blood-contaminated parts. Use approved

rubber gloves to avoid infection!
NOTE: Before doing any maintenance on the ABL, it is recommended to

0 print out the setup report.

l 5.1. USER MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Check
Clean the ABL where necessary.
Clean the inlet module and the inlet flap. If necessary, replace the inlet washer.
Check that there are no deposits present on the electrode chambers or in the KCI well. Clean
with distilled water.
Check that there are no leakage defects from the tubing.
Check that the rollers of the peristaltic pumps rotate freely. Check that the pump tubing is
properly mounted.
Check the air filter for the fan.
Clean around the printer.
Clean the CRT screen.
Check the setup with the printout taken before performing maintenance.
Revised 91.04.08
5.2. YEARLY MAINTENANCE
a
Yearly Maintenance
The following instructions are to be used together with the Code 904-882, Yearly Maintenance Service
Kit, when carrying out the recommended ABL yearly overhaul. TheService Manual will also be required
during the procedures. The page references used throughout these instructions refer to those of the
Service Manual. The maintenance procedures and replacements described should be performed only
by service engineers from RADIOMETER or its distributors.
WARNING: Avoid direct contact with blood-contaminated parts. Use approved rubber gloves to
avoid infection!
Survey
1 Decontamination
2 Emptying of the Wet Section
3 Cleaning inside the ABL
4 Replacements in the Wet Section and the Gas Mixer
5 Electrical and mechanical check
6 Cleaning the exterior of the ABL
7 Final check
8 Yearly Maintenance Service Kit
Decontamination and Print-out of Set-up Report

1 Perform the decontamination program listed in Users Handbook.
2 Select the Setup Program and print set-up report.
Emptying of Wet Section

1 Remove all bottles with solutions, but leave the waste container. Place an empty beaker under the
nipple for the Salt-Bridge Solution (No.2).
2 Call the refill program.
3 Wait for the ready LED to light.
4 Remove the beaker.
5 Remove the cover of the thermostatted box.
6 Remove the Calomel Reference Electrode from the ABL and place it in the protecting sheath. Empty
the well with a syringe.
0
REVISED 92.01.27 5.2 - 1
YEARLY MAINTENANCE
7 Remove all the electrodes. Place the pC0, and p0, electrodes in their protecting jackets. Lay aside
the electrodes.
8 Carefully remove the waste container. Due to the infection risk, disposal of the waste container must
be in accordance with your local regulations. Replace with a new item from the kii when asked to do
so.
9 Close the Main Valve on the CO, cylinder, and remove the cylinder from the ABL.
10 Select Other Service Programs No. 5 and set Rinse only at power on to Yes.
11 Turn off the main power switch on the ABL and disconnect the main power cable from the wall outlet.
Cleaning Inside the ABL

1 Remove the wet section from the base unit and place it in Service Position, see page 4-2.
2 Remove the left-hand panel from the base unit, see page 4-2.
3 Remove the right-tiand panel from the base unit, see page 4-2.
4 Clean the inside of the base unit with a soft brush.
5 Clean the rear side of the wet section with a soft bmsh. Be careful not to damage the optical fibres.
6 Clean the gas mixer with a soft brush.
7 Remove the inlet module and discard the inlet washer (836-l 47). Replace with new item from the kit
when asked to do so.
8 Remove the tubing between Pump 1 and electrode chambers (LSl) and discard the tubing.
9 Remove tubing between Pump 1 and waste, and discard the tubing.
10 Remove the bottom part of the thermostatted box.
11 Clean the thermostated plate and the mounted components.
12 Clean the electrode chambers using a cotton stick wetted with protein remover. Rinse afterwards using
a cotton stick and distilled water.
13 Remove the top cover from the CRT compartment.
14 Clean the printer with a soft brush.
Performe step 15 - 18 only on CRT Monitor 902-060
5.2 - 2 REVISED 92.01.27

e YEARLY MAINTENANCE
15 Pull up the clamp located at the top front of the CRT (Marked with Danger - High Voltage) and slide
up the the protecting screen in front of the CRT.
16 Clean the front of the CRT using a cloth moistened with mild soapy water.
17 Clean the protecting screen on both sides using a cloth moistened with mild soapy water.
18 Remount the protecting screen and the clamp.
19 Remount the top cover on the CRT compartment.
Replacements in the Gas Mixer and the Wet Section

1 Replace the membrane pump in the gas mixer.
2 Replace the gasket with tracks (834-612), the support disc (834-613), and the gasket for the front part
(834-620) in the Main Valve, see page 4-6. Do not perform the leakage test of the Main Valve until asked
to do so.
3 Install a new tubing between Main Valve and Preheater 2 (841-727).
4 Install a new tubing between Preheater 2 and electrode chamber (841-738).
5 Replace pump tubing (842-194).
6 Cut 240 mm of tubing (840-227) and replace the tube between Pump 1 and the waste stopper.
7 Replace V2 tubing, (841-750).
8 Mount bottom part of thermostatted box.
9 Install a new tubing between Pump 1 and electrode chambers (LSl) (841-757 Vl Tubing).
10 Replace V3 Tubing (ABL505,841-761) (ABL51 O/520,841 -760) or tubing between Rinse Preheater
and V4 (ABL50/500,841-759).
11 Replace the dust filter for the fan.
12 Fill up the reference electrode with Salt-Bridge Solution to the red mark. Mount the reference electrode.
13 Membrane the electrodes. Mount the electrodes.
14 Mount pH electrode.
REVISED 93.01 .I5 5.2 - 3

YEARLY MAINTENANCE
0
24 Remount the Wet Section.
25 Perform the Printer check, section 2.10.
26 Inspect the CRT, if not acceptable, perform an alignment, section 2.12.
27 Perform the serial communication checks, section 2.11.
Cleaning the Exterior of the ABL

1 Turn off the ABL and remove the power cable.
2 Clean the front screen using a cloth moistened with mild soapy water.
3 Clean the painted surface, using a cloth moistened with mild soapy water.
4 Clean the outside of the power cable using a cloth moistened with mild soapy water.
Final Check
1 Remount the power cable and turn on the ABL.
2 Call a Total calibration after the warming up period.
3 Perform a test with QUALICHECKT.
4 Check the set-up report with the print-out taken in step 1.2. Correct any discrepancies.
5 Record date and time for the annual overhaul in the maintenance log.
0
Qualicheck is a trademark of Radiometer A/S, Denmark and is registered in USA and in some other countries.
0 5.2 - 5
REVISED 92.01.27
YEARLY MAINTENANCE
Contents of the code 904-882, Yearly Maintenance Service Kit:
834-612 Main Valve Gasket with Tracks

834-613 Support Disc for Gasket with Tracks
834-620 Gasket for Front part of Main Valve
835-351 O-ring for LS4
836-i 47 Inlet Washer
840-043 Rubber tubing black 0.9 X 1.3, 2 meters
840-227 Silicone tubing, 1 meter
840-229 Silicone tubing, 1 meter
84 l-727 Tubing between Main Valve and Preheater 2
841-738 Tubing between Preheater 2 and Electrode Chambers
841-750 Tubing for V2
841-757
841-759
Tubing between Pump (Pl) and Measuring Chamber (LSl)
Tubin between Rins Preheater and V4 (ABL500) 0
-
84-I-760 Tubing for V3 (ABL51 O/520)
841-761 Tubing for V3 (ABL505)
842-l 94 Pump Tubing, 2 PCS.
848-017 Membrane Pump
887-638 Filter for Fan
904-815 Waste Container
983-904 Yearly Maintenance Instruction
991-528 Cleaning brush
991-530 Cleaning sticks, 10 PCS.
991-531 Cleaning cloth, 3 pcs.
5.2 - 6 REVISED 93.01.15

6. PROGRAMS
0
Introduction
The software of the ABL includes a number of programs available for the user and/or the service engineer.
The various programs are accessed using the softkeys below the CRT screen or display.
Survey
Section 6.1: provides an overview of the various calibration programs (which electrodes are
calibrated in which program).
Section 6.2: provides a brief description of the various wet section control programs.
0 Section 6.3: describes in detail the selftest programs.
Sections 6.4 and 6.5: provide a description of service programs.
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 6-I

6.1 USERS PROGRAMS
0
Introduction
This Section provides an overview of the calibration programs included in the software. It indicates the
extend of the calibration of each electrode.
NOTE: For information about the various other user programs (description and use), please refer to
the appropriate User Handbook.
The calibration programs are called automatically according to the setup program. They may also be called
manually via the softkeys. The purpose of the various calibration programs is indicated below:
Cal 1 1 point calibration of pH electrode 7.4 pH

1 point calibration of K electrode 4.0 mmoi/L ABL505 only
1 point calibration of Na electrode 145 mmol/L ABL505 only
1 point calibration of Ca electrode 1.25 mmol/L ABL505 only
1 point calibration of Cl electrode 106 mm/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of pC02 electrode 5.6 % and 11.2 %
1 point calibration of p0, electrode 19.7 %
1 point calibration of tHb 0 g/dL ABL51 O/520 only
Cal 2 2 point calibration of pH electrode 7.4 and 6.8 pH

2 point calibration of K electrode 4.0 and 10.0 mmol/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of Na electrode 145 and 50 mmol/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of Ca electrode 1.25 and 5.00 mmol/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of Cl electrode 106 and 52 mm/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of pC02 electrode 5.6 % and 11.2 %
1 point calibration of p02 electrode 19.7 %
Total Cal 2 point calibration of pH electrode 7.4 and 6.8 pH

2 point calibration of K electrode 4.0 and 10.0 mmol/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of Na electrode 145 and 50 mmol/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of Ca electrode 1.25 and 5.00 mmol/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of Cl electrode 106 and 52 mm/L ABL505 only
2 point calibration of pCOp electrode 5.6 % and 11.2 %
2 point calibration of pOp electrode 19.7 % and 0 %
Gas Cal 1 1 point calibration of pC02 electrode 5.6 %

Gas Cal 2 2 point calibration of pCO* electrode 5.6 % and 11.2 %

Please Note that the two gas calibrations, Gas Cal 1 and Gas Cal 2, are not available in ABL50.
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 6.1 - 1

. 6.2.1 WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS
Introduction.
This section includes flow charts, tables and descriptions of the wet section activities during
measurements for ABL500/505/5 1 O/520.
The flow charts include information about the important wet section activities such as liquid sensors,
reference data collection, electrode data collection etc. Timing information for the main events are
included as well.
Main computer activities (softkeys, screen texts etc.) are included if important for the overall
understanding of the wet section function.
The tables include information about duration and liquid consumption for the individual wet section
programs.
The program descriptions at the end of the section include a summary, the duration, the liquid
consumption (if any) and a list of the possible errors which can turn up during the program execution.
REVISED 93.01.15 6.2.1 - 1

0 WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS
1. The inlet flap is opened, the sample is injected or aspirated and the inlet flap is closed.
2. The sample is in the electrode chambers 9.3 seconds after the inlet flap has been closed.
3. The measurement result will be displayed 40 - 54 seconds after the inlet flap has been closed
depending on the pO2IpCO2 levels.
Sample injection:
NOM. DURATION in SEC. NOM. LIQUID CONS. in ~1

WET SECTION
PROGRAM
ABL50/500 ABL5 1 O/520 ABL50/500 ABL510/520
BG INlTlALlZATlON 1.5 1.5 SBS 13 13

BG INJECTION 1.5 1.5
BG MEASURE 9.3 12.2 RINSE 24
MEASUREMENT 70.7 73.1 SBS 54 54
RINSE RINSE 1160 1177
TOTAL 83.0 88.3 SBS 67 67
RINSE 1160 1201
Sample aspiration:
I BG INITIALIZATION I 1.5 I 1.5 S8S 13 I 13 I

EI;No;!RAT:;i&;CHED 1 6.0 ) 7.3
I BG MEASURE I 9.3 I 12.2
I MEASUREMENT
RINSE I
70.7 73.1 SBS
RINSE
54
1160
54
1177
I TOTAL I 87.5 I 94.1 SBS

RINSE
67
1160
67
1201
REVISED 93.01.15 6.2.1 - 3

l WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS
GAS MEASUREMENT, summary
1. The inlet flap is opened and the aspirate button is activated.
2. The sample is aspirated and the inlet flap is closed.
3. The measurement result will be displayed 30 seconds after the inlet flap has been closed.

WET SECTION
PROGRAM
ABLSOO ABL510/520 ABLSOO ABL5 1 O/520
I I I I
BG INITIALIZATION 1 1.5 1.5 1 SBS 13 13
GAS MEASURE 34.0 34.2

TOTAL 106.2 108.8 SBS 67 67

RINSE 1160 1177
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 5

WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS
ABL500/510/520 pH ONLY MEASUREMENT
1. The inlet flap is opened, the capillary tube is inserted in the inlet and the aspirate button is
activated.
3. The measurement result will be displayed 45 (ABL500)/46 (ABL510/520) seconds after the inlet
flap has been closed.
NOM. DURATION in SEC. NOM. LIQUID CONS. in PI

WET SECTION
PROGRAM
ABL500 ABL5101520 ABL500 ABL5 1 O/520
BG INITIALIZATION 1.5 I 1.5 1 SBS 13 I 13
pH ASPIRATE, LATCHED 5.6 6.7

or NON-LATCHED
pH MEASURE 14.7 14.7

TOTAL 92.6 96 SBS 67 67

RINSE 1160 1177
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 -7

0
ABL510/520 OXI ONLY MEASUREMENT
1. The inlet flap is opened, the capillary tube is inserted in the inlet and the aspirate button is
activated.

WET SECTION
PROGRAM
ABL500 ABL5lOf520 ABL500 ABL5 7 O/520
BG INITIALIZATION 1.5 585 13
OXI ASPIRATE, 6.7

LATCHED or NON-
LATCHED
OXI MEASURE 7.7 RINSE 10
MEASUREMENT 73.1 SBS 54
RINSE RINSE 1177
TOTAL 89 SBS 67
RINSE 1187
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 -9

WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS a
ABL505 BLOOD/QC/BG LYTES MEASUREMENT cont.
Summary:
1. The inlet flap is opened, the sample is injected or aspirated and the inlet flap is closed.
2. The sample is placed in the electrode chambers 20.8 seconds after the inlet flap has been
closed.
3. The measurement result will be displayed 53 - 65 seconds (depending on the pCdpC0, level)
after the inlet flap has been closed.
Sample injection:
WET SECTION NOMINAL DURATION NOMINAL LIQUID

PROGRAM I in SECONDS CONSUMPTION in pl
SBS 21
MEASUREMENT 79 SBS 55
RINSE I RINSE 1438
TOTAL 102.8 SBS 76

RINSE 1438
l ) The time to open the inlet flap, inject the sample and close the inlet flap again is
estimated to 3 seconds (INITIALIZATION + INJECTION).
Sample aspiration:

PROGRAM in SECONDS CONSUMPTION in pl
INITIALIZATION 1.5 SBS 21
ASPIRATION 10.8
ALL MEASURE 20.8
RINSE RINSE 1438
I TOTAL
I
112.1 SBS
RINSE
76
1438
6.2.1 - 12 WRIT-l-EN 92.02.14

WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS 0
ABL505 GAS MEASUREMENT cont.
Summary:
1. The inlet flap is opened and the aspiration key is activated within 0.9 second.
2. The gas sample is aspirated and the inlet flap is closed.
3. The measurement result will be displayed 30 seconds after the inlet flap is closed.

PROGRAM I in SECONDS CONSUMPTION in PI
GAS MEASURE 44.6 CAL1 57
GAS RINSE I 39.2 I CAL1 185
RINSE RINSE 1438
6.2.1 - 14 WRIT-TEN 92.02.14

l WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS
Summary:
1. The inlet flap is opened and aspiration is started within 0.9 second.
2. The sample is aspirated and the inlet flap is closed within 10.3 seconds.
3. The sample is placed in the electrode chambers 14.7 seconds after the inlet flap has been
closed.

PROGRAM in SECONDS CONSUMPTION in PI
pH ASPIRATE 10.3
pH MEASURE 14.7
RINSE RINSE 1438
TOTAL 104.9 SBS 76
RINSE 1438
WRIT-I-EN 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 17

WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS a
ABL505 BG ONLY MEASUREMENT cont.
Summary:
1. The inlet flap is opened and aspiration is started within 0.9 second.
2. The sample is aspirated and the inlet flap is closed within 10.8 seconds.
3. The sample is placed in the electrode chambers 15 seconds after the inlet flap has been
closed.
4. The measurement result will be displayed 48 - 59 seconds (depending on the @#CO, level)
after the inlet flap has been closed.
I WET SECTION NOMINAL DURATION

PROGRAM I in SECONDS
NOMINAL LIQUID
I CONSUMPTION in ~1
BG ASPIRATE 10.8
BG MEASURE 15
RINSE RINSE 1438
TOTAL 105.7 SBS 76
RINSE 1438
6.2.1 - 20 WRITTEN 92.02.14

BG INJECTION, ABL500/510/520
Prior to LS4 signal or aspirate key activation, the user can select (by softkeys) gas measurement, pH-
only measurement, or oxi-only measurement.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: After sample injection (LS4 signal) the busy LED is switched on and
the following message appears on the screen: CLOSE INLET FLAP
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
NOMINAL DURATION: 0.6 second from inlet flap closing.
ENTRY FROM: BG INITIALIZATION.
EXIT TO: BG ASPIRATE - LATCHED, BG ASPIRATE - NON-LATCHED, or BG

MEASURE.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If the inlet flap is closed before LS4 is full, the program is aborted
and the following error messages appear:
Screen status field:
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
INLET CLOSED WITHOUT INTRODUCING ENOUGH SAMPLE IN
LAST MEASUREMENT
If the sample is not injected within 45 seconds (acoustic alert after 35

seconds) from the inlet flap is opened the program is aborted and
the following error messages appear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
NO SAMPLE DETECTED IN LAST MEASUREMENT
If the inlet flap is not closed within 20 seconds (acoustic alert after 10
seconds) from sample injection, the program is aborted and the
following error messages appear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
INLET FLAP NOT CLOSED WHEN REQUESTED IN LAST
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 25

BG ASPIRATE, NON-LATCHED, ABL500/510/520

Blood sample aspiration from capillary tube into inlet (LS4). The aspiration key must be activated
continously until LS4 is full.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: The sample is aspirated by Pl. After aspiration (LS4 signal) the busy
LED is switched on and the following message appears on the
screen: CLOSE INLET FLAP
When the inlet flap is closed, the program jumps to BG MEASURE.
NOMINAL DURATION: 6 seconds from ASP key activation.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: BG INJECTION.
EXIT TO: BG MEASURE.

MEASUREMENT RINSE (via aborts)
SYSTEM ERRORS: If the inlet flap is closed before activation of the aspiration key, the
program is aborted and the following error messages appear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT
If LS4 is not full within 30 seconds (acoustic alert after 20 seconds)

from activation of the aspiration key, the program is aborted and the
Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
NO SAMPLE DETECTED DURING ASPIRATION IN LAST
MEASUREMENT
6.2.1 - 26 REVISED 92.02.14

If the inlet flap is closed before LS4 is full, the program is aborted
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT
seconds) from CLOSE INLET FLAP appears on the screen, the
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
INLET FLAP NOT CLOSED WHEN REQUESTED IN L A S T
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 27

BG ASPIRATE, LATCHED, ABL500/510/520

Blood sample aspiration from capillary tube into inlet (LS4). The aspiration key should be activated
once only.
When the inlet flap is closed, the program jumps to BG MEASURE.
NOMINAL DURATION: 6 seconds from ASP key activation.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
a
-
ENTRY FROM: BG INJECTION.
EXIT TO: BG MEASURE.

MEASUREMENT RINSE (via aborts)
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT

a
Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
MEASUREMENT
6.2.1 - 28 REVISED 92.02.14

a WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PROGRAMS
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT
if the inlet flap is not closed within 20 seconds (acoustic alert after 10
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 29

BG MEASURE, ABLSOO
The sample is sucked from inlet to the electrode chambers.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: LS2 is tested for liquid. Must be empty.

Blood sample is sucked from inlet to LS2 by P2. Aircount is started
(LS2) and the sample is sucked/pushed by PI/P2 through the
electrode chambers. LSl and LS2 are tested for liquid (both must be
full). The sample is “parked” in the electrode chambers, aircountting
is stopped and electrode data collection starts. The program jumps
to MEASUREMENT RINSE where the electrode data collection is
completed.
NOMINAL DURATION: 9.3 seconds.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: BG INJECTION, BG ASPIRATE LATCHED or BG ASPIRATE NON-

LATCHED.
EXIT TO: MEASUREMENT RINSE.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LS2 senses liquid before the sample has arrived, the program is
aborted and the following error messages appear:
“Measurement aborted”
System status:
“MEASURE ERROR L”
“UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING (LS2)”
If LS2 does not sense liquid when supposed to, during sample
transportation, the program is aborted and the following error
messages appear:
System status:
“MEASURE ERROR N”
“NO SAMPLE DETECTED DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING”
If LSl senses liquid before the sample has arrived, the program is
System status:
“MEASURE ERROR K”
“UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING (LSI)”
6.2.1 - 30 REVISED 92.02.14

If LSl does not sense liquid when supposed to, during sample
messages appear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR N
NO SAMPLE DETECTED DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING
If LS2 does not sense liquid when LSl does, during electrode
chamber filling, the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
Sample volume too small
If 1.5 % < aircounts < 5 % of the total counts during aircounting,

Inhomogeneous sample
System status:
Air bubbles detected in sample
If aircounts > 5 % of the total counts during aircounting and LS2 is

empty after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
Too small sample volume detected

full after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
System status:
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 31

BG MEASURE, ABL510/520
Blood sample is sucked from inlet to LS2 by P2. Aircount is started
(LS2) and the sample is sucked/pushed by PI/P2 through the
electrode chambers and the cuvette. LSI, LS2 and LS3 are tested for
liquid (all must be full). The sample is parked in the electrode
chambers and the cuvette, aircounting is stopped and electrode data
collection starts. P2 establishes pressure in the cuvette and V3 closes
The program jumps to MEASUREMENT RINSE where the OXI sample
is hemolyzed and data collection is completed.
NOMINAL LIQUID -
CONSUMPTION: 24 ~1 rinse solution (used to maintain the hemolyzer pressure).
ENTRY FROM: BG INJECTION, BG ASPIRATE LATCHED or BG ASPIRATE NON-

LATCHED.
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR L
UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING (LS2)
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR K
UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING (LSl)
If LS3 senses liquid before the sample has arrived, the program is
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR M
6.2.1 - 32 REVISED 92.02.14

If LSl, LS2 or LS3 do not sense liquid when supposed to, during
sample transportation, the program is aborted and the following
error messages appear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR N
If LS2 does not sense liquid when LSl and LS3 do, during electrode
chamber filling, the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
If 1.5 % < aircounts < 5 % of the total counts during aircounting,

System status:

empty after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE

full after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
System status:
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 33

GAS MEASURE, ABL500/510/520

Prior to aspirate key activation, the user can select (by softkeys) BG measurement, QC measurement,
pH-only measurement, or oxi-only measurement.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: When the ASP key has been activated, INJECT GAS SAMPLE SLOW-
LY appears on the screen.
The inlet tubings are emptied by P2. LSl, LS2 and LS4 are tested for
liquid.The gas sample is introduced and sucked through the elec-
trode chambers by Pl for 25 seconds.
The tubings are tested for liquid once again and CLOSE INLET
FLAP appears on the screen.
Electrode data collection is started and the program jumps to
MEASUREMENT RINSE during which the data collection is com-
-
pleted.
NOMINAL DURATION: 34 seconds from activation of the aspirate key.

The measured results are displayed 30 seconds after the inlet flap
has been closed.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None
Measurement aborted l
System status:
INLET CLOSED
INLET FLAP CLOSED DURING INJECTION IN LAST GAS
MEASUREMENT
If the aspiration key is not activated within 45 seconds (acoustic alert

after 35 seconds) from the inlet flap is opened, the program is
Measurement aborted
System status:
ASPIRATE NOT ACTIVATED
ASPIRATE BUTTON NOT PRESSED WHEN REQUESTED IN LAST
GAS MEASUREMENT
6.2.1 - 34 REVISED 92.02.14

If the inlet flap is closed before requested, the program is aborted

Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
INLET FLAP CLOSED DURING INJECTION IN LAST GAS
MEASUREMENT
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
MEASUREMENT
If LSl is not empty during sample injection, the program is aborted

Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR E
UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING GAS SAMPLE INJECTION (LSI)
If LS2 is not empty during sample injection, the program is aborted

Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR F
UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING GAS SAMPLE INJECTION (LS2)
If LS4 is not empty during sample injection, the program is aborted

Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR G
UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING GAS SAMPLE INJECTION (LS4)
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 35

pH ASPIRATE, NON-LATCHED, ABL500/510/520

Prior to aspirate key activation, the user can select (by softkeys) blood measurement, QC measure-
ment, gas measurement, or oxi-only measurement. The aspiration key must be activated continously
until LS4 is full.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: After sample aspiration (LS4 signal) the busy LED is switched on and
When the inlet flap is closed, the program jumps to pH MEASURE.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
NOMINAL DURATION: ABLSOO: 5.6 seconds from activation of the aspiration key.
ABL510/520: 6.7 seconds from activation of the aspiration key.
EXIT TO: pH MEASURE.
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT

aborted and the following error messages a ppear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
NO SAMPLE DETECTED IN LAST MEASU REMENT
6.2.1 - 36 REVISED 92.02.14

Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT

from activation of the aspiration key, the program is aborted and
Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
MEASUREMENT
Screen status field :
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 37

pH ASPIRATE, LATCHED, ABL500/510/520

Prior to aspirate key activation, the user can select (by softkeys) blood measurement, QC measure-
ment, gas measurement, or oxi-only measurement. The aspiration key should be activated once only.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: After sample aspiration (LS4 signal) the busy LED is switched on and
When the inlet flap is closed, the program jumps to pH MEASURE.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
NOMINAL DURATION ABL500: 5.6 seconds from activation of the aspiration key.
ABL510/520: 6.7 seconds from activation of the aspiration key
ENTRY FROM: pH INITIALIZATION.
EXIT TO: pH MEASURE.
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT

Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
NO SAMPLE DETECTED IN LAST MEASUREMENT
6.2.1 - 38 REVISED 92.02.14
-
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT

from activation of the aspiration key, the program is aborted and
Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
MEASUREMENT
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 39

pH MEASURE, ABL500/510/520
The sample is sucked from inlet to the electrode chambers.

Blood micro sample is sucked from inlet to LS2 by P2. Aircount is
started (LSZ) and the sample is sucked/pushed by Pl/P2 through the
electrode chambers. LSl and LS2 are tested for liquid (both must be
full). The sample is parked in the electrode chambers, aircounting
is stopped and LS2 is tested for liquid (must be full). Electrode data
collection starts. The program jumps to MEASUREMENT RINSE where
the electrode data collection is completed.
NOMINAL DURATION: 14.7 seconds .
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: pH ASPI RATE, LATCH ED or

pH ASPIRATE, NON-LATCHED.
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR L
-
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR K
UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING (LSl)
If LSl or LS2 do not sense liquid when supposed to, during sample
messages appear:
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR N
6.2.1 -40 REVISED 92.02.14

If LS2 does not sense liquid when LSl does, during electrode
chamber filling, the the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
If 4.2 % < aircounts < 14.3 % of the total counts during aircount-
ing, the following error messages appear:
System status:
If aircounts > 14.3 % of the total counts during aircounting and LS2
is empty after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
is full after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
System status:
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 -41

-
a
OXI ASPIRATE, NON-LATCHED (ABL51 O/520 only)

Sample aspiration from capillary tube into inlet (LS4). The aspiration key must be activated
continously until LS4 is full.
screen: “CLOSE INLET FLAP”
When the inlet flap is closed, the program jumps to OXI MEASURE.
NOMINAL DURATION: 6.7 seconds from ASP key activation
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
EXIT TO: OXI MEASURE.

MEASUREMENT RINSE (via aborts).
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT”

Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
MEASUREMENT
6.2.1 -42 REVISED 92.02.14

Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 -43

OXI ASPIRATE, LATCH ED (ABLSI O/520 only)

Sample aspiration from capillary tube into inlet (LS4). The aspiration key should be activated once
only.
When the inlet flap is closed, the program jumps to OXI MEASURE.
NOMINAL DURATION: 6.7 seconds from ASP key activation.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
-
EXIT TO: OXI MEASURE.

MEASUREMENT RINSE (via aborts).
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT

Measurement aborted
System status:
NO SAMPLE
MEASUREMENT
6.2.1 -44 REVISED 92.02.14

Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET CLOSED
LAST MEASUREMENT
Measurement aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
MEASUREMENT
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 45

OXI MEASURE (ABL510/520 only)

The sample is sucked from inlet to the OXI hemolyzer.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: LS2 is tested for liquid.

Blood micro sample is sucked from inlet to LS2 by P2. Aircount is
started (LS2) and the sample is sucked by P2 through the hemolyzer.
LS3 and LS2 are tested for liquid (both must be full). The sample is
“parked” in the hemolyzer, aircounting is stopped and LS2 is tested
for liquid (must be full). Hemolyzation is prepared by establising
pressure in the hemolyzer. The program jumps to MEASUREMENT
RINSE where the OXI data collection takes place.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 10 bl rinse solution (used to maintain the hemolyzer pressure).
ENTRY FROM: OXI ASPIRATE, LATCHED or

OXI ASPIRATE, NON-LATCHED.
System status:
“MEASURE ERROR 1”
“UNEXPECTED LIQUID DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING (LSZ)”
If LS2 or LS3 do not sense liquid when supposed to during sample

messages appear:
System status:
“MEASURE ERROR N”
“NO SAMPLE DETECTED DURING SAMPLE PROCESSING”
6.2.1 -46 REVISED 92.02.14

If LS3 senses liquid before the sample has arrived, the program is
Measurement aborted
System status:
MEASURE ERROR M
If LS2 does not sense liquid when LS3 does, during hemolyzer filling,
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
If 4.2 % < aircounts < 14.3 % of the total counts during aircount-
ing, the following error messages appear:
System status:
is empty after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
Insufficient sample
System status:
INSUFFICIENT SAMPLE
is full after the aircounting, the following error messages appear:
System status:
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 -47

MEASUREMENT RINSE, ABL500

This rinse program is used after measurements and if an activity is aborted. Also, if a rinse is called
from the maintenance softkey, this program is called.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Busy lamp on, measure light on, ref. data collection.
Gas mixer pump start and GAS1 selection.
INLET RINSE:
2x4 rinse/air segments created by P2, V4, V5 through inlet and out
to waste through W7.
P2 is dosing rinse sol. into W7 tubing. LS4 is tested for liquid.
P2 sucks rinse sol. back from W7 tubing. MV alternates between
position 0 and 1, and 4 rinse sol./GASl segments are hence
created. P2 changes direction and the tubings are emptied.
P2 sucks rinse solution again. P2 changes direction and the rinse -
sol. is pumped back.
Electrode datacollection stop.
ELECTRODE CHAMBER RINSE:
Pl expels the sample/sucks rinse solution parked in the WO
tubing. P2, V4, V5 make 3 rinse/air segments.
Pl/P2 suck/push rinse/air segments through electrode chambers.
Pl sucks rinse sol./GASl via MV. LS2 is tested for liquid.
Pl and MV suck 3 rinse/GAS1 segments through preheater 2 and
electrode chambers. P2 sucks rinse sol. from V4.
P2 changes direction and doses the rinse sol. into the electrode
chambes. Pl emties the electrode chambers.
SBS front is changed. LS5 checks the SBS homogeneity.
Pl and MV create B rinse sol./GASl segments which are
sucked/pushed forward and backward through the electrode
chambers. Finally Pl empties the electrode chambers. LS2 and LSl
are tested for liquid.
NOMINAL DURATION: 70.7 seconds (incl. 1.2 second pause after inlet rinse)
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 1160 ~1 rinse solution.
54 II SBS.
ENTRY FROM: Measurement programs, rinse sof-tkey in maintenance, and aborts.
EXIT TO: GASFLUSH (READY).
6.2.1 -48 REVISED 92.02.14

SYSTEM ERRORS: Errors occurring during rinse programs do not cause aborts in order
not to create infinite loops (an aborted wet section program will
always cause a rinse program to be called).
If the inlet flap is opened during the inlet rinse (first 30 seconds of
the Measurement Rinse), another Measurement Rinse will be called
in succession of the first.
If the inlet flap is open when the Measurement Rinse has been
finished (when the program jumps to READY), the ABL goes into
“hold” and must be restarted.
If LSl, LS2 or LS4 do not sense liquid when expected, the following
Screen status field: “No rinse solution”
System status:
“RINSE ERROR A”
“No rinse solution detected”
If LS2 does not sense liquid while LSl does, the following error
messages appear:
Screen status field: “No rinse solution”
System status:
“RINSE ERROR B”
“Malfunction in liquid system while fetching rinse solution”
If LSl, LS2 or LS4 sense liquid when not expected, the following error
messages appear:
System status:
“RINSE ERROR C”
“Unexpected liquid during rinse”
If LS5 does not sense liquid while L51 does, the following error
messages appear:
Screen status field: “No SBS solution”
System status:
“SBS ERROR B”
“Malfunction in liquid system while fetching SBS”
If neither L55 nor L51 sense liquid when expected, the following
error messages apper:
System status:
“SBS ERROR A”
“No Salt Bridge Solution Detected”
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 -49

WET SECTION MEASUREMENT PRQGRAMS
MEASUREMENT RINSE, ABL510/520

This rinse program is used after measurements and if a measurement or a calibration is aborted. If a
rinse is called from the maintenance softkey, this program is called.
Hemolyzation.
INLET RINSE:
P2 isdosing rinse sol. into W7 tubing. LS4 is tested for liquid.
OXI data collection while gasmixer and other pumps are stopped in
a
-
order not to create electrical noise.

INLET RINSE continued:
P2 sucks rinse solution again. P2 changes direction and the rinse
Electrode data collection stop.
LS3 test. Cuvette emptied. P2, V4, V5 make 3 rinse/air segments.
PI/P2 suck/push rinse/air segments through electrode chambers.
electrode chambers. P2 sucks rinse sol. from V4. Rinse sol. through
cuvette. Hemolyzation.
Pl and MV create 8 rinse sol./GASl segments which are
NOMINAL LIQUID
54 ~1 SBS.
ENTRY FROM: Measurement programs, rinse softkey in maintenance, and aborts.

6.2.1 - 50 REVISED 92.02.14

the Measurement Rinse), another Measurement Rinse will be called
in succession of the first.
If the inlet flap is open when the Measurement Rinse has been
“hold” and must be restarted.
No rinse solution”
System status:
RINSE ERROR A No rinse solution detected
messages appear:
“No rinse solution”
System status:
RINSE ERROR B Malfunction in liquid system while fetching
rinse solution”
messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR C Unexpected liquid during rinse
messages appear:
No SBS solution”
System status:
“SBS ERROR B Malfunction in liquid system while fetching SBS
If neither LS5 nor LSl sense liquid when expected, the following
Screen status field: No SBS solution”
System status:
“SBS ERROR A No Salt Bridge Solution Detected
LS3 is tested for liquid after the OXI datacollection. If it is not full the
System status:
“CAL ERROR L”
Leakage in OXI system
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.1 - 51

6.2.2 WET SECTION CALIBRATION PROGRAMS
Introduction
This section includes flow charts, tables and descriptions of the wet section activities during
calibrations for ABL50/500/505/51 O/520
Two flow charts are included. One showing the activities which are automatically executed when the
ABL is in the READY state (calibrations, flushes, decompression etc.). The second flow chart shows the
activities which are executed in connection with power on and restart.
The tables include information about duration and liquid consumption for the individual wet section
programs.
The program descriptions at the end of the section include a summary, the duration, the liquid
consumption (if any) and a list of the possible errors which can turn up during the program execution.
REVISED 93.01.15 6.2.2 - 1

WET SECTION CALIBRATION PROGRAMS
GASCALl, summary
Auto GASCALl intervals are selectable in the SET UP menu (l/2, 1 or 2 hours).
The ~02 and the pCO2 electrodes are l-point calibrated by GAS1 (5.6 % CO2/19.7 % 02)
NOMINALDURATION IN SECONDS NOMINAL LIQUID CONSUMPTION IN &I

WET SECTION
PROGRAM
ABL500 A B L 5 0 5 ABL510/520 ABL500 ABL505 ABL5101520
GM UPSTART 28 28 28 RINSE 51
GAS1 START 30.2 30.2 30.2
CALIBRATION 97.2 106.1 96.8 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54

RINSE CAL1 22 CAL1 22 CAL1 22
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
RINSE 592 RINSE 772 RINSE 592
TOTAL 155.4 164.3 155 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54

CAL1 22 CAL1 22 CAL1 22
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
The calibration results are displayed 68 seconds after start
6.2.2 - 6 REVISED 92.02.14

a WET SECTION CALIBRATION PROGRAMS
GASCALZ, summary
Auto GASCALZ irftervals are selectable in the SET UP menu (1,2 or 4 hours).
The ~02 electrode is l-point calibrated by GAS1 (5.6 % CO2/19.7 % 02)

The pCO2 electrode is 2-point calibrated by GAS1 (5.6 % CO2) and GAS2 (11.2 % CO2)
WET SECTION
CALIBRATION
RINSE CAL1 2 2 CAL1 2 2 CAL1 22
CAL2 2 2 CAL2 2 2 CAL2 22
RINSE 592 RINSE 7 7 2 RINSE 592
TOTAL 203.7 212.6 203.3 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54

CAL1 22 CAL1 22 CAL1 22
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
I
The calibration results are displayed 117 seconds after start.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 7

CALI, summary
Auto CAL1 intervals are selectable in the SET UP menu (l/2, 1,2 or 4 hours).
The pO2 electrode is l-point calibrated by GA51 (5.6 % CO2/19.7 % 02).

The pCO2 electrode is 2-point calibrated by GA51 (5.6 % CO2) and GA52 (11.2 % CO-J.
The pH and electrolyte electrodes are l-point calibrated by CAL1 solution (7.4 pH).
, WET SECTION
I NOMINALDURATION IN SECONDS NOMINAL LIQUID CONSUMPTION IN (rl
~ PROGRAM
ABL50/500 ABLSOS ABL5 101520
GA51 START 30.2 30.2 30.2
pH1 START 1 45.7 / 52.7 / 69.9 SBS 6 6 SBS 66 SBS 66

CAL1 327 CAL1 339 CAL1 334
CALIBRATION 107.2 116.1 86.8 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
TOTAL 277.5 293.4 281.5 SBS 120 5B5 121 505 120
CAL1 349 CAL1 361 CAL1 356
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
The calibration results are displayed 191 (ABL50/500) / 197 (ABL505) / 195 (ABL510/520) seconds
after start.
6.2.2 - 8 REVISED 93.01.15

0 WET SECTION CALIBRATION PROGRAMS
CALZ, summary
Auto CAL2 intervals are selectable in the SET UP menu (2,4, or 8 hours)
The pO2 electrode is l-point calibrated by GA51 (5.6 % CO2/19.7 % 02).

The pCO2 electrode is 2-point calibrated by GA51 (5.6 % CO2) and GA52 (11.2 % CO2).
The pH and electrolyte electrodes are 2-point calibrated by CAL1 solution (7.4 pH) and CAL2 solution
(6.8 pH).
NOMINAL DURATION IN SECOND5 NOMINAL LIQUID CONSUMPTION IN (rl

WET SECTION I
PROGRAM ABL50
I
ABLSOS ABL5 1 0 1 5 2 0 ABL501500 ABLSOS 1 ABL510/520 1
ABL500
GA51 START 30.2 30.2 30.2
GA51 END 18.1 18.1 18.1
GA52 START 30.2 30.2 30.2
GA52 END
pH1 START 5B5 6 6 SBS 6 6 SBS 66

CAL1 3 2 7 CAL1 3 3 9 CAL1 334
pH1 END 71.1 78.6 52.8 SBS 3 9 SBS 3 9 5B5 39

I I RINSE 2 1 6 RINSE 2 9 7 RINSE 216
QH~ START
CALIBRATION
50.9
107.2
I 51.5
116.1
I 52.4
106.8
SBS
CAL2
5B5
6 6 5B5
3 8 2 CAL2
54 SBS
6 6 SBS
3 3 8 CAL2
55 SBS
66
396
54
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
I
TOTAL 399.5 423.5 406.5 5B5 225 SBS 226 SBS 225
CAL1 349 CAL1 361 CAL1 356
CAL2 404 CAL2 360 CAL2 418
The calibration results are displayed 313 (ABL50/500) / 328 (ABL505) / 320 (ABL510/520) seconds
after start.
REVISED 93.01.15 6.2.2 - 9

TOTAL CAL, summary
Auto TOTAL CAL intervals are selectable in the SET UP menu (8, 12, or 24 hours).
The ~02 electrode is 2-point calibrated by GAS1 (5.6 % CO2/19.7 % 02) and GAS3 (100 % CO$O %
02).
The pCO2 electrode is 2-point calibrated by GAS1 (5.6 % CO2) and GAS2 (11.2 % CO2).
The pH and electrolyte electrodes are 2-point calibrated by CAL1 solution (7.4 pH) and CAL2 solution
(6.8 pli).
NOMINAL DURATION IN SECONDS NOMINAL LIQUID CONSUMPTION IN *I

WET SECTION I
PROGRAM
A&0/500 1 R,;50Ss1 1 ABL510/520 1
GM UPSTART
GAS1 START -
GAS1 END
GAS2 START
GAS2 END
pH1 START +
pH1 END I 71.7 78.6 52.8 SBS 39 SBS 39 SBS 39

pH2 START ’ 50.9 51.5 52.4 SBS 66 SBS 66 SBS 66

CAL2 382 CAL2 338 CAL2 396
I
pH2 END ~ 57.6 53.5 57.6
GAS3 CAL 131.2 133.7 131.2 CAL1 210 CAL1 528 CAL1 210
CAL2 78 CAL2 156 CAL2 78
CALIBRATION i 87.2 96.1 86.8 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54

CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
~ RINSE 592 RINSE 772 RINSE 592
MEASUREMENT 1 69.5 79 73.1 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54

RINSE RINSE 1160 RINSE 1438 RINSE 1177
TOTAL ~ 638.4 1 669.7 1 648.4
The calibration results are displayed 427 (ABL50/500) 1435 (ABL505) 1434 (ABL510/520) seconds
after start.
6.2.2 - 10 REVISED 93.01.15

AUTO CLEANING, summary
AUTO CLEANING intervals are selectable in the SET UP menu (8, 12 or 24 hours).
NOMINAL DURATION IN SECONDS NOMINAL LIQUID CONSUMPTION IN pi

WET SECTION
PROGRAM ABL50
A B L S O S ABL51 O/520 ABL!jO/!jOO ABL505 ABLSl O/520
ABL500
CLEANING 274.1 241.2 274.1 CLEAN. 505 CLEAN. 505 CLEAN. 505
SBS 64 SBS 64 SBS 64
CAL1 91 CAL1 91 CAL1 91
CAL2 65 CAL2 65 CAL2 65
MAINTENANCE 91.9 101.4 96.8 SBS 54 SBS 55 SBS 54
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
LS ADJUST 104.7 104.7 104.7 SBS 131 SBS 131 S8S 131
MAINTENANCE 91.9 101.4 96.8 585 54 SBS 55 SBS 54
CAL2 22 CAL2 22 CAL2 22
TOTAL 562.6 548.7 572.4 CLEAN. 505 CLEAN. 505 CLEAN. 5 0 5
SBS 303 SBS 287 SBS 303
CAL1 135 CAL1 135 CAL1 135
CAL2 109 CAL2 109 CAL2 109
REVISED 93.01.15 6.2.2 - 11

GASFLUSH
The CO2 partial pressure in the electrode chambers and the inlet tubings is maintained. The ABL
remains READY during the entire program execution.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Electrode channel calibration.

Ref. data collection (OV, SV, bar. ref., bar., temp. ref., temp.)
INLET FLUSH:
P2 flushes inlet tubings for 8 seconds.
ELECTRODE CHAMBER FLUSH:
Pl flushes electrode chambers for 10 seconds.
Liquid sensor (LSl, LS2, LS4) test.
Electrode data collection.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LSl, LS2 or LS4 are not empty during the electrode chamber flush,
System status:
FLUSH ERROR
Unexpected liquid during flush
REVISED 92.02.14
FLUSH UPSTART
Gasmixer start and GAS1 (5.6% CO*) selection before GASFLUSH.
NOMINAL DURATION: 20 seconds.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 13

GAS1 CHECK
The program checks the 1 point calibration of the pCO2 and pO2 electrodes. The program is automati-
cally executed once every hour and is followed by FLUSH. The ABL remains READY during the entire
program execution.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Gasmixer start and GAS1 (5.6% CO2) selection.

Measure light on.
Reference data collection (OV, SV, bar. ref., bar.)
Electrode data collection.
P2 flushes inlet tubings for 8 seconds.
Pl flushes the electrode chambers for 30 seconds. LSI and LS2 test
(both must be empty).
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LSl is not empty during the electrode chamber flush, the program
is aborted and the following error messages appear:
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR A
Unexpected liquid in LSI
If LS2 is not empty during the electrode chamber flush, the program
Screen status field :
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR B
Unexpected liquid in LSZ
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 15

FLUSH
Tubings and electrode chambersare flushed by fresh rinse solution in order to avoid measurement er-
rors caused by concentrated rinse solution. The program is automatically called once every hour and
the ABL is busy during the program execution.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Pl and P2 suck rinse solution via V4. Pl sucks rinse sol. via the main
valve. Tubings and electrode chambers are emptied. LSl test.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 132 11 rinse solution.
l
-
ENTRY FROM: GAS 1 CHECK.
EXIT TO: GASFLUSH.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LSl is full when not expected, the following error messages ap-
pear:
System status:
FLUSH ERROR
Unexpected liquid during flush
6.2.2 - 16 REVISED 92.02.14

GAS1 START
1 point calibration (5.6 % CO2) of pCO2 and ~02 electrodes is started in this program.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Pl flushes the electrode chambers with GASI. Electrode data
collection is started. LSl and LS2 are tested for liquid (both must be
empty).
NOMINAL DURATION: 30.2 seconds
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: GM UPSTART.
EXIT TO: GAS1 END (GASCALZ, CALl, CALS, TOTAL CAL).

CALIBRATION RINSE (GASCALl).
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR A
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR B
6.2.2 - 18 REVISED 92.02.14

GM UPSTART
Gasmixer start and GAS1 (5.6% CO2) selection before GASISTART
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 17

GAS1 END
If the ABL is performing a GASCALZ, CALl, CAL2 or TOTAL CAL. the pO2 and pCO2 GAS1 electrode
data collection is completed in this program.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: The gasmixer change to GASZ, 11.2 % CO2 (preparation of the 2nd
point gas calibration)
Electrode data collection is completed.
P2 flushes the inlet tubings with GASZ.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: GAS 1 START.
EXIT TO: GAS2 START.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 19

GAS2 START
The 2nd point calibration (11.2 % COz) of the pCO2 electrodes is started in this program.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Pl flushes the electrode chambers with GASZ. Electrode data
collection is started. LSl and LS2 are tested for liquid (both must be
empty).
NOMINAL DURATION: 30.2 seconds
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: GAS1 END. l

EXIT TO: GAS2 END (CALl, CALZ, TOTAL CAL).
CALIBRATION RINSE (GASCALZ) .
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR A
Unexpected liquid in LSl
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR B
6.2.2 - 20 REVISED 92.02.14

GAS2 END
If the ABL is performing a CAL1 , CAL2 or TOTAL CAL. the GASZelectrode data collection is completed
in this program.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: The gasmixer change to GAS1 (5.6 % CO2).

Electrode data collection is completed.
P2 flushes the inlet tubings with GASl.
NOMINAL LIQUID
a CONSUMPTION: None
ENTRY FROM: GAS2 START.
EXIT TO: pH1 START
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 21

0
pH1 START, ABLSOO

This program is used to initialize a high pH calibration of the pH electrode.

Pl flushes the electrode chambers with GASl.
Pl flushes the electrode chambers with CAL1 solution. LS2 test.
SBS front replaced. LS5 tests the homogeneity.
Pl/P2 suck CAL1 solution via main valve. LS2 and LSl test. Electrode
data collection is started.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 66 @I SBS.
327 ~1 CAL1 solution.
ENTRY FROM: GASZEND.
EXIT TO: CALIBRATION RINSE (CALl).

pH 1 END (CAL2 and TOTAL CAL).
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LS2 does not sense liquid within 24 seconds during the electrode
chamber CAL1 solution flush, the calibration is aborted and the
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR D
No high CAL solution detected
If LS5 does not sense liquid within 20 seconds during the SBS front
replacement, the following error messages appear:
No SBS solution
System status:
CAL SBS ERROR
No Salt-Bridge Solution during high pH calibration
6.2.2 - 22 REVISED 92.02.14

If LSl does not sense liquid within 10 seconds during the electrode
chamber CAL1 filling, the calibration is aborted and the following
Calibration aborted
System status:
“CAL ERROR C”
“LSI did not sense high CAL solution
If LS2 does not sense liquid within 4 seconds during the electrode
chamber CAL1 filling or the liquid is not homogeneous, the ABL will
try another pHISTART by jumping to the first program step. Max. 3
attemps are performed. If still not successful1 the calibration is
Calibration aborted
System status:
“CAL ERROR I”
High CAL solution inhomogenous
If LS2 senses liquid where it should not, during the preparation of a

2nd. or 3rd. filling attempt, the calibration is aborted and the
Calibration aborted
System status:
“CAL ERROR B”
“Unexpected liquid in l.52”
If LSl senses liquid where it should not, during the preparation of a

Calibration aborted
System status:
“CAL ERROR A”
“Unexpected liquid in LSl”
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 23

pH1 START, ABL510/520
This program is used to perform a pH and an OXI calibration using CAL1 (high pH) solution.

PI/P2 suck CAL1 solution to electrode chambers and cuvette via main
valve. LS2 checks the homogeneity. Electrode data collection and
OXI data collection are terminated in this program.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 66 &I SBS.
334 11 CAL1 solution.
ENTRY FROM: GAS2END.
EXIT TO: CALIBRATION RINSE (CALl).

pH1 END (CAL2 and TOTAL CAL).
chamber CAL1 flush, the calibration is aborted and the following
Screen status field: Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR D
No high CAL solution detected
Screen status field: No SBS solution
System status:
CAL SBS ERROR
No Salt-Bridge Solution during high pH calibration
System status:
CAL ERROR C
LSI did not sense high CAL solution
6.2.2 - 24 REVISED 92.02.14

If LS3 senses liquid where it should not, the calibration is aborted

System status:
CAL ERROR K
Unexpected liquid in LS3
If LS3 does not sense liquid within 1 second during the cuvette
filling, the calibration is aborted and the following error messages
appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR E
LS3 did not sense high CAL solution
try another pHISTART by jumping to the first program step. Max. 3
System status:
CAL ERROR I
High CAL solution inhomogenous

System status:
CAL ERROR B

System status:
CAL ERROR A
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 25

pH1 END, ABL500

If the ABL is performing a CAL2 or TOTAL CAL,the pH, 1 point calibration initiated in pHlSTART is
completed in this program.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Reference data collection (0 and 5V).

Electrode data collection completed (initiated in pH1START).
Pl empties the electrode chambers for CAL1 solution/fills with GAS1
via main valve. P2 doses rinse sol. into the electrode chambers. Pl
empties.
Pl sucks SBS. LS5 test the homogeneity.
Pl sucks rinse solution via main valve. LSZ/LSl test. Pl/MV create 8
rinse sol./GASl segments which are sucked through the electrode
chambers. Pl empties.
-
NOMINAL DURATION: 7 1.7 seconds.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 39 @I SBS.
216 ~1 rinse solution.
ENTRY FROM: pH 1 START.
EXIT TO: pH2START.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If neither LS5 nor LSl sense liquid within 20 seconds during the SBS
front replacement, the following error messages appear:
System status:
SBS ERROR A
No Salt-Bridge Solution detected
If LS5 does not and LSl does sense liquid within 20 seconds during 0
-
the SBS front replacement, the following error messages appear:
System status:
SBS ERROR B
Malfunction in liquid system while fetching SBS
If neither LS2 nor LSl sense liquid within 24 seconds during the
electrode chamber rinse, the following error messages appear:
Screen status field: No rinse solution
System status:
RINSE ERROR A
No rinse solution detected
6.2.2 - 26 REVISED 92.02.14

If LS2 does not and LSl does sense liquid within 24 seconds during
the electrode chamber rinse, the following error messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR B
Malfunction in liquid system while fetching rinse solution
If LS2 senses liquid where it should not while the electrode chamber
is emptied, the calibration is aborted and the following error
messages appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR B
If LSl senses liquid where it should not while the electrode chamber
messages appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR A
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 27

pH1 END, ABL510/520
If the ABL is performing a CAL2 or TOTAL CAL,.the electrode chambers and the OXI part are rinsed
before pH2START.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: LS3 istested for liquid. Must be full.

Pl empties the electrode chambers and the cuvette for CAL1
solution/fiIlswith GAS1 via main valve. P2 doses rinse sol. Pl
empties.
Pl sucks SBS. LS5 test the homogeneity.
Pl sucks rinse solution via main valve. LSZ/LSl test. Pl/MV create 8
rinse sol./GASl segments which are sucked through the electrode
chambers. Pl empties.
-
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 39 11 SBS
216 ~1 rinse solution
ENTRY FROM: pH 1 START.
EXIT TO: pH2START.
SYSTEM ERRORS: LS3 is tested for liquid after the OSM datacollection. If it is not full
System status:
“CAL ERROR L”
“Leakage in OXI system”
If neither LS5 nor LSl sense liquid within 20 seconds during the SBS
front replacement, the following error messages appear:
System status:
“SBS ERROR A”
“No Salt-Bridge Solution detected”
the SBS front replacement, the following error messages appear:
System status:
“SBS ERROR B”
6.2.2 - 28 REVISED 92.02.14

If neither LS2 nor LSl sense liquid within 24 seconds during the
electrode chamber rinse, the following error messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR A
the electrode chamber rinse, the following error messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR B
If LS2 senses liqtiid where it should not while the electrode chamber
messages appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR B
If LSl senses liquid where it should not while the electrode chamber
messages appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR A
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 29

pH2 START, ABL500
This program is used to initialize a low pH calibration of the pH electrode.

Pl/P2 suck CAL2 solution via main valve. LS2 and LSl test. Electrode
data collection is started.
NOMINAL DURATION 50.9 seconds.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 66 ~1 SBS
382 ~1 CAL2 solution
ENTRY FROM: pHIEND.
EXIT TO: CALIBRATION RINSE (CALZ).

pH2END (TOTAL CAL).
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR G
No low CAL solution detected
No SBS solution
System status:
CAL SBS ERROR
No Salt-Bridge Solution during low pH calibration
6.2.2 - 30 REVISED 92.02.14

Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR F
LSl did not sense low CAL solution
try another pH2START by jumping to the first program step. Max. 3
Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR I
Low CAL solution inhomogenous

Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR B

Calibration aborted
System status:
CAL ERROR A
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 31

0
pH2 START, ABL510/520
This program is used to initialize a pH and an OXI calibration using CAL2 (low pH) solution.

Pl/P2 suck CAL2 solution to electrode chambers and cuvette via main
valve. LS2 checks the homogeneity. Electrode data collection is
started. (OXI data collection starts in the next program).
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 66 ~1 SBS
396 ~1 CAL2 solution
ENTRY FROM: pH 1 END.
EXIT TO: CALIBRATION RINSE (CALS).

pH2END (TOTAL CAL).
Screen status field: “Calibration aborted”
System status:
“CAL ERROR G”
“No low CAL solution detected”
System status:
“CAL SBS ERROR”
“No Salt-Bridge Solution during low pH calibration”
chamber CAL2 solution filling, the calibration is aborted and the
Screen status field: Calibration aborted”
System status:
“CAL ERROR F”
“LSl did not sense low CAL solution”
6.2.2 - 32 REVISED 92.02.14

a WET SECTION CONTROL PROGRAMS
If LS3 does not sense liquid within 1 second during the cuvette
filling, the calibration is aborted and the following error messages
appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR H
LS3 did not sense low CAL solution
try another pH2START by jumping to the first program step. Max. 3
System status:
CAL ERROR J
Low CAL solution inhomogenous

System status:
CAL ERROR B
If LSl senses liquid where, it should not, during the preparation of a

System status:
CAL ERROR A
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 33

pH2 END
If the ABL is performing a TOTAL CAL, the pH 2nd. point calibration initiated in pH2START is
completed in this program.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Electrode data collection completed (initiated in pH2START).

Pl empties the electrode chambers for CAL2 solution/fills with GAS1
via main valve. P2 doses rinse sol. into the electrode chambers. Pl
empties.
Pl sucks SBS. LS5 tests the homogenity.
Pl sucks rinse solution via main valve. Pl/MV create 8 rinse sol./GASl
segments which are sucked through the electrode chambers. Pl
empties. LSZ/LSl test.
Gasmixer changes to GAS3 (preparation of 02 sensitivity calibration).
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 39 ill SBS.
ABLSOO: 241 @I rinse solution.
ABL510/520: 216 ~1 rinse solution.
ENTRY FROM: pH2START.
EXIT TO: GAS3 CALIBRATION.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LS2 senses liquid where it should not, while the electrode
chambers are emptied, the calibration is aborted and the following
System status:
CAL ERROR B
If LSl senses liquid where it should not, while the electrode

chambers are emptied, the calibration is aborted and the following
System status:
CAL ERROR A
6.2.2 - 34 REVISED 92.02.14

GAS3 CALIBRATION
The pO2 electrode is calibrated with GAS3 (sensitivity calibration).
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measuring chambers are filled with rinse solution.

P2 flushes inlet with GAS3.
Electrode data collection starts. Pl flushes the measuring chambers
with GAS3 for 50 seconds. LSl and LS2 test. Both must be empty.
Electrode chambers flushed with CAL2 and CAL1 solution in order to
reduce the CO2 content.
Pl/P2 flush inlet and electrode chambers with rinse solution.
LS3 is emptied (ABL51 O/520 only).
0 NOMINAL DURATION: 13 1.2 seconds.
NOMINAL LIQUID
210 11 CAL1 solution.
ENTRY FROM: pH2END.
EXIT TO: CALIBRATION RINSE.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If LSl senses liquid where it should not, during the electrode data
collection, the calibration is aborted and the following error
messages appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR A
If LS2 senses liquid where it should not, during the electrode data
collection, the calibration is aborted and the following error
messages appear:
System status:
CAL ERROR B
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 35

CALIBRATION RINSE, ABLSOO

This rinse program is used after calibrations. In order to save rinse solution, the inlet is not rinsed. At
the beginning of this rinse program there is a nominal waiting time of 10 or 20 seconds after
GASCALl/GASCALZ and CALlKAL2, respectively.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measure light on, ref. data collection.

Pl expels the sample/sucks rinse solution “parked” in the WO
tubing. P2, V4, V5 makes 3 rinse sol./air segments.
Pl/P2 suck/push sample and rinse sol./air segments through
electrode chambers.
MAIN VALVE RINSE:
Pl sucks fresh rinse sol. into the Main Valve which rotates twice.
Pl refills tubings with liquids.
ELECTRODE CHAMBER RINSE (continued):
electrode chambers. P2 sucks rise sol. from V4.
Pl and MV create 8 rinse/ GAS1 segments which are
NOMINAL DURATION: 87.2 seconds (After GASCALl and GASCALZ: + 10 seconds updating)
(After CAL1 and CALZ: + 20 seconds updating)
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 592 111 rinse solution.
54 11 SBS.
22 PI CAL1 + 22 &I CALZ.
ENTRY FROM: Calibration programs.
6.2.2 - 36 REVISED 92.02.14

the program), another Calibration Rinse will be called in succession
of the first.
If the inlet flap is open when the Calibration Rinse has been finished
(when the program jumps to READY), the ABL goes into hold and
must be restarted.
System status:
RINSE ERROR A
messages appear:
System status:
“RINSE ERROR B”
“Malfunction in liquid system while fetching rinse solution
messages appear:
System status:
“RINSE ERROR C”
“Unexpected liquid during rinse”
messages appear:
System status:
SBS ERROR B”
If neither L55 nor LSl sense liquid when expected, the following
System status:
SBS ERROR A
No Salt Bridge Solution Detected
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 37

CALIBRATION RINSE, ABL51 O/520

This rinse program is used after calibrations. In order to save rinse solution, the inlet is not rinsed. At
the beginning of this rinse program there is a nominal waiting time of 10 or 20 seconds after
GASCALl/GASCAL2 and CALZ, respectively.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measure light on, ref. data collection.

P2, V4, VS make 3 rinse sol./air segments.
Pl/PZ suck/push rinse sol./air segments through electrode
chambers.
MAIN VALVE RINSE:
Pl refills tubings with liquids.
Pl sucks rinse sol./GASl via MV. LS2 istested for liquid.
electrode chambers. P2 sucks rinse sol. from V4.
SBS front is changed. LSS checks the SBS homogeneity.
Pl and MV create 8 rinse/ GAS1 s e g m e n t s w h i c h a r e
NOMINAL DURATION: 86.8 sec. (After GASCALl and GASCALZ: + 10 seconds updating)
(After CALZ: + 20 seconds updating)
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 592 @I rinse solution.
54 ~1 SBS.
22 PI CAL1 + 22 @I CALZ.
ENTRY FROM: Calibration programs.
6.2.2 - 38 REVISED 92.02.14

natto create infinite IOOQS (an aborted wet section program will
If the inlet flap is open when the Calibration Rinse has been finished
(when the program jumps to READY), the ABL goes into hold and
must be restarted.
System status:
RINSE ERROR A No rinse solution detected
messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR B
If LSI, LS2 or LS4 sense liquid when not expected, the following error
messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR C Unexpected liquid during rinse
messages appear:
System status:
“SBS ERROR B Malfunction in liquid system while fetching SBS
System status:
SBS ERROR A No Salt Bridge Solution Detected
LS3 is tested for liquid when the electrode chamber rinse is started. If
it is not full the following error messages appear:
System status:
“CAL ERROR L”
Leakage in OXI system
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.2 - 39

l 6.2.3 WET SECTION MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
Introduction
This section includes descriptions of the wet section maintenance programs.
Each program description includes a summary, the duration, the liquid consumption (if any) and a list
of the possible errors which can turn up during the program execution.
WRITTEN 92.02.14 6.2.3-l

WET SECTION MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
PROTEIN REMOVAL, ABL500151 O/520

Protein deposits are removed from wet section tubings, main valve etc. by hypochlorite solution. This
program is carried out if the ABL is requesting the protein removal by displaying Check maintenance
scedule in the screen status field, i.e. if it is more than one week ago the last protein removal was
performed or more than 100 measurements has been carried out, whichever comes first. If the user
performs an unrequested protein removal, this program is selected if it is more than 75
measurements ago the last protein removal was performed. If less than 75, the reduced protein
removal is carried out.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measure light on.

The hypochlorite solution is injected (LS4 test) and the flap is closed.
The busy LED is activated. Hypochlorite solution parked in W7 is
sucked into the electrode chambers and main valve by Pl. Main valve
turns 4 times. Main valve and electrode chambers emptied.
Hypochlorite solution is sucked from inlet into left and right tubing
paths by Pl and P2 and pushed/sucked forward and backwards 6
times. LS2, LSl and LS3 test. Tubings and electrode chambers are
emptied and rinsed. CAL1 and CAL2 liquid fronts in main valve
renewed.
NOMINAL LIQUID
52 &I CAL1 solution.
104 @I CAL2 solution.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance sof-tkey.

EXIT TO: MAINTENANCE RINSE or aborts (MEASURE RINSE)
SYSTEM ERRORS: If the inlet flap is closed before LS4 signal, the program is aborted
Maintenance aborted
System status:
PROGRAM NOT STARTED
No solution injected in last protein removal
6.2.3-2 REVISED 92.02.14

0 WET SECTION MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
If the hypochlorite solution is not injected within 45 seconds

(acoustic alert after 35 seconds), the program is aborted and the
Maintenance aborted
System status:
PROGRAM NOT STARTED
seconds) from the LS4 signal, the program is aborted and the
Maintenance aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
Inlet flap not closed when requested in last protein removal
If LS2, LSl or LS3 are full when not expected the main valve is rinsed
with rinse solution and the program is aborted. The following error
messages appear:
System status:
MAINT. PROG. ERROR
*Maintenance program did not finish due to error(s)
If LS2 or LSl are not full within 8 seconds from pump start when the
protein removing solution issucked through the electrode
chambers, the main valve is rinsed with rinse solution and the
program is aborted. The following error messages appear:
System status:
MAINT. PROG. ERROR
Maintenance program did not finish due to error(s)
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-3

PROTEIN REMOVAL, REDUCED, ABL500/510/520

Protein deposits are removed from wet section tubings, main valve etc. by hypochlorite solution. This
program is carried out if the user initiates an unrequested protein removal, i.e. if it is less than one
week ago or less than 75 measurements has been carried out since the last protein removal was
performed.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measure light on.

The protein removing solution is injected (LS4 test) and the flap is
closed. The busy LED is activated.
The protein removing solution is sucked from inlet into left and right
tubing paths by Pl and P2 and pushed/sucked forward and
backward 6 times. LS2, LSl and LS3 test. Tubings and electrode
chambers are emptied and rinsed. CAL1 and CAL2 liquid fronts in
main valve renewed.
NOMINAL DURATION: 12 1.1 seconds.
NOMINAL LIQUID
ENTRY FROM: Softkey in maintenance.
EXIT TO: MAINTENANCE RINSE or aborts (MEASUREMENT RINSE).
SYSTEM ERRORS: If the inlet flap is closed before LS4 signal, the program is aborted
Maintenance aborted a
-
System status:
PROGRAM NOT STARTED
If the protein removing solution is not injected within 45 seconds

Maintenance aborted
System status:
PROGRAM NOT STARTED
6.2.3-4 REVISED 92.02.14

Maintenance aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
messages appear:
System status:
MAINT. PROG. ERROR
protein removing solution is sucked through the electrode chambers
the main valve is rinsed with rinse solution and the program is
aborted. The following error messages appear:
System status:
MAINT. PROG. ERROR
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-5

Maintenance aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
messages appear:
System status:
MAINT. PROG. ERROR
protein removing solution is sucked through the electrode chambers
the main valve is rinsed with rinse solution and the program is
aborted. The following error messages appear:
System status:
MAINT. PROG. ERROR
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-5

If the hypochlorite solution is not injected within 45 seconds

Maintenance aborted
System status:
PROGRAM NOT STARTED
No solution injected in last decontamination
Maintenance aborted
System status:
INLET NOT CLOSED
Inlet flap not closed when requested in last decontamination
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-7

0
CLEANING, ABL500/51 O/520

The program is cleaning the wet section with cleaning solution.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measure light on. Gasmixer on, GAS1 seleted.

Cleaning solution sucked through electrode chambers by Pl. LSZ/LSl
test. Cleaning solution pushed back into main valve, inlet and W7.
CAL1 liquid front in main valve replaced. Main valve gasket rinsed by
rinse solution. CAL1 and CAL2 liquid fronts in main valve replaced.
10 rinse sol.lGASl segments through electrode chambers. Electrode
chambers filled with rinse sol. via V2. Electrode chambers emptied.
SBS front replaced.
Rinse solution through electrode chambers and cuvette
(ABL51 O/520).
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 505 (~1 cleaning solution.
64 ~1 SBS.
2229 @I rinse solution.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance softkey. Further, CLEANING is called automatically at

least once every 24 hours.
EXIT TO: MAINTENANCE RINSE.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If both LS2 and LSl are empty during the electrode chamber filling,
No cleaning solution
System status:
CLEANING ERROR A
No cleaning solution detected
If LS2 is empty and LSl is full during the electrode chamber filling,
No cleaning solution
System status:
CLEANING ERROR B
Malfunction in liquid system while fetching cleaning solution
6.2.3-8 REVISED 92.02.14

0 WET SECTION MAlNTENANtE PROGRAMS
REFILL
This program refills the tubings with rinse solution, CAL1 solution and CAL2 solution when liquid
containers are replaced and in the start-up procedure after power on.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measuring light on. GAS1 selected.

Pl sucks CAL2 solution. LS2 checks the homogeneity.
Pl sucks CAL1 solution. LS2 checks the homogeneity.
Pl sucks rinse solution. LS2 checks the homogeneity.
0 NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 900 @I rinse solution.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance softkey. The program is called automatically at power

on.
EXIT TO: SBS REFILL.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If CAL2 solution is not homogeneous during refill, the following
error message appears:
No calibration solution (4)
If CAL1 solution is not homogeneous during refill, the following

No calibration solution (3)
If the rinse solution is not homogeneous during refill, the following

No rinse solution (5)
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-9

0
SBS REFILL
Possible air bubbles are removed from the SBS system.
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Measuring light on. Gasmixer pump on. GAS1 selection.
Pl sucks SBS. Out to waste.
LS5 is emptied. Pl sucks SBS again. LS5 test (must be full).
Dynamic SBS cut off with GASl.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 182 LLI SBS
ENTRY FROM: REFILL.
SYSTEM ERRORS: If the salt bridge solution is not homogeneous during the SBS refill,
“No SBS solution”
System status:
“SBS ERROR A”
“No salt bridge solution detected”
6.2.3-10 REVISED 92.02.14

0
MAIN VALVE ADJUST
The membrane valves V4. VS and V6 are activated 5 times in order to prevent sticking. Main valve
position is adjusted.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: The program is automatically called at power on.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-11

LS ADJUST
SUMMARY OF EVENTS: Gasmixer start and GAS1 selection. Measure light on.
LSl, LS2, LS3 (ABLSlO only) and LS4 are emptied and calibrated.
LS5 is emptied, calibrated and refilled.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 131 PI SBS.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance soft key. The program is automatically called during
the autocleaning procedure.
6.2.3-l 2 REVISED 92.02.14

MAIN VALVE ADJUST
The membrane valves V4, V5 and V6 are activated 5 times in order to prevent sticking. Main valve
position is adjusted.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: The program is automatically called at power on.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-l 1

0
TURN PUMPS
The pump tubings are adjusted in place by turning the pumps forward and backward.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance program Replace pump tubings
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-l 3

a WET SECTION MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
GM FLUSH
The gas mixer is started and GAS3 selected for flushing after replacement of the gas cylinder.
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: None.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance program Replace CO2 cylinder.
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-l 5

MAINTENANCE RINSE, ABL500/510/520
This rinse program is used after maintenance programs. Compared to MEASUREMENT RINSE, a main
valve rinse is performed during the electrode chamber rinse.
INLET RINSE:
P2 is dosing rinse sol. into W7 tubing. LS4 is tested for liquid.
P2 sucks rinse solution again. P2 changes direction and the rinse
Electrode datacollection stop.
Pl expels the sample/sucks rinse solution parked in the WO
tubing. P2, V4, VS make 3 rinse sol./air segments.
Pl/P2 sucks/pushes sample and rinse/air segments through
electrode chambers.
MAIN VALVE RINSE:
Pl refills tubings with liquids (CAL1 , CALZ, CLEANING and RINSE).
Pl and MV suck 3 rinse sol./GASl segments through preheater 2
and electrode chambers. P2 sucks rinse sol. from V4.
SBS front is changed. LSS checks the SBS homogeneity.
Pl and MV create 8 rinse/ GAS1 s e g m e n t s w h i c h a r e
NOMINAL DURATION: 91.9 seconds (ABLSOO).

96.8 seconds (ABL510/520).
NOMINAL LIQUID
CONSUMPTION: 1281 ~1 rinse solution (ABLSOO).
1392 ~1 rinse solution (ABL510/520).
54 VI SBS.
22 ~1 CAL1 solution + 22 PI CALZ. solution.
ENTRY FROM: Maintenance programs.

6.2.3-l 6 REVISED 92.02.14

the program), another Maintenance Rinse will be called in succession
of the first.
If the inlet flap is open when the Maintenance Rinse has been
hold and must be restarted.
System status:
“RINSE ERROR A”
“No rinse solution detected
messages appear:
System status:
“RINSE ERROR B”
“Malfunction in liquid system while fetching rinse solution
messages appear:
System status:
RINSE ERROR C
Unexpected liquid during rinse
If LSS does not sense liquid while L51 does, the following error
messages appear:
System status:
“SBS ERROR 8”
“Malfunction in liquid system while fetching 585”
System status:
SBS ERROR A
No Salt Bridge Solution Detected
REVISED 92.02.14 6.2.3-l 7

6.3 SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
l
Introduction
The ABL performs a number of electronic self-test programs of which some are carried out when power is
switched on and some are running continuously in the background during normal operation. Below the
RAM and PROM self-test programs are described; these programs are carried out independently on all
PCBs including a CPU (and memory, of course).
PROM Test
The PROMS are checked by using a checksum test. A predetermined checksum is stored in each PROM.
This checksum is compared with a checksum which is calculated during the checksum test.
0 RAM Test
The RAMS are checked via a write/read test in which the following is carried out for all cells in succession:
Two patterns are written into and read from the cell in question, first 01010101 (55,-J and then 10101010
(AA,,), to check for stuck at faults.
Watchdog Test
The Watchdog test circuit is a hardware test circuit which will reset the satellite CPU when it fails in the
execution of the corresponding program in the software.
Watchdog Timeout Test

This test is a continuously running test in the satellite CPU programs. The test is counting the number of
watchdog resets which have been made in a period of time and removes the satellite PCB from the ring
network if the number of resets exceed a predetermined number.
Main Computer PCB Self-test Program (ABL500/505/51 O/520)

At power-on the Main CPU performs a PROM test of the PROM S required by the standard English version
of the ABL as well as a RAM test.
During this test the CRT will display the picture seen in figure 1 overleaf without any text in the bars. In
ABL500 run 1 - 49 and ABL510/520 run 1 - 7, seventeen (O-16) vertical bars represent possible PROM
positions , only 9 bars are used for the Main Memory PCB. In ABL500 run 50 onwards, ABL51 O/520 run
8 onwards and ABL505 run 1 onwards, twelve bars represent the FPROMs on Main Computer PCB,
QD206/216 are not installed.
The eighteenth (17) bar represents the RAM on the Main Computer PCB.
0
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 6.3 - 1
SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
, nnnnnRnnn
1
I_ -----__________--____-----__----_-- -I
Figure 1.
ABLSOO Run 1 - 49 and ABL510620 Run 1 - 7
Bar No. EPROM No. Bar No. EPROM No.
0 Main Memory QDl 1 Main Memory QD2

2 - - QD3 3 _ _ QD4
4 - - QD5 5 _ - QD6
6 - - QD7 15 _ - QD8
16 - - QD9 17 Main Computer RAM
ABL500 Run 50 onwards, ABL5101520 Run 8 onwards and ABL505 Run 1 onwards 0
-
Bar No. FPROM No. Bar No. FPROM No.
0 Main Computer QD202/212 1 Main Computer QD202/212

2 - - QD203/213 3 _ _ QD2031213
4 - - QD204/214 5 _ _ QD204/214
6 - - QD205/215 7 _ _ QD205/215
8 - - QD206/2 16 9 _ _ QD206/216
15 - - QD2011211 16 _ - QD201/211
17 - - RAM
The bars representing the required PROMS and the RAM have a normal intensity. PROMS not required by
the system have a lower intensity. During the test of a PROM or the RAM the corresponding bar is
highlighted. If the PROM is OK the intensity is returned to normal, but if the PROM is rejected the intensity
is reduced to a little higher than normal and flashes with 3 Hz.
6.3 - 2 REVISED 92.11 .Ol

SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
The test continues until finished even if there is a defect PROM. If there was an error during the test the
picture will remain on the screen indicating the error, otherwise it will continue the start-up program by
testing the remaining PROMS and initiating the ABL.
During the normal operation the CPU performs a PROM checksum test and a write/read check of the RAM.
If an error occurs an error message is shown on the screen.
Checksum error message:

~----------~--~-~~-~~~~~~~--_,
I Internal error - Fatal error: Checksum error at PROM # n i
I
I Please report the following sequence I
I to Radiometer - exactly as shown: I
I I
I >FaOO-vwv-vv-ssss-iiii< I
I_ _----_-----m--v------------- J
Where r-r is the bar number on the screen picture in figure 1.
Write/read error message:
r-_--------------------------,
I Internal error - Fatal error: RAM write/read error at hhhh - III1 i

I
I Please report the following sequence I
I to Radiometer - exactly as shown: I
I
I >FaOO-vwv-w-ssss-iiii< I
L - - - e m - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -I
Where hhhh is the segment address and 1111 is the offset address of the faulty RAM cell.
The last line in the error message is for Radiometer Medical A/S R&D department. This line contains
information about software version and where in the software the error is located.
a REVISED 92.11 .Ol 6.3 - 3

SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
Hardware Version Error

When the power is switched on the CPU will carry out a Hardware Version test. If an incorrect version is
detected the CPU will stop all activity and the LED CR708 will start flashing with a frequency of 1 Hz. If the
test is passed successfully the LED turns off.
Keypad with Display Ring Net Error

When the Keypad with Display unit is locked on the Ring Net the LED CR805 turns off.
Keypad with Display Self-test Program (ABL50)

At power-on the buil-in CPU performs a RAM test as well as a EPROM test. When the tests are completed
successfully the unit connects itself to the Ring Net, which causes the LED CR805 on the Main Computer
PCB to turn off.
EPROM Error
When the power is switched on the CPU will perform a checksum check of the EPROM. During this test
the display will show the picture seen in figure 4. If an error isdetected the CPU will stop all activity and show
the picture seen in figure 5.
During normal operation the CPU is continuously checking the EPROM. If a checksum error is detected the
CPU will stop all activity and show the picture seen in figure 5.
RADIOMETER
Figure 4.
KEYPAD -UNIT
VERSION: V.VV
EPROM-TEST: ERR. SS RR
Figure 5.
Where SS is the sum written in the EPROM and RR is the calculated sum.
a REVISED 92.11 .Oi 6.3 - 5

SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
0
EPROM Error
When the power is switched on the CPU will perform a checksum check of the EPROM. If an error is
detected the LED will start flashing with a frequency of 2 Hz and the Printer Unit will remain inactive.
During normal operation the CPU will continuously check the EPROM by adding one cell every 1 ms. If a
checksum error is detected the CPU will remove the Printer Unit from the ring network and print PRINTER
PROM ERROR on the printer. The LED starts flashing with 2 Hz.
The only way to restart the Printer Unit when one of the above errors has been detected is to turn
off the ABL and then turn it on again.
RSl50/100 PCB Self-Test Programs

RSl50/100 have built-in test programs for start-up tests of the circuits and are constantly monitoring the
performance of the circuits. A RED LED is located on the upper part on the backside of the interface module
for indication of detected faults on the PCB. The GREEN LED next to the RED LED indicates normal
operation.
Watchdog Error
The Watchdog error circuit (WD) is a hardware circuit monitoring the function of the CPU. If the CPU does
not send a Watchdog trigger to the WD circuit within every 71 ms, the WD will reset the CPU. This will
happen twice. If the CPU has not cleared the WD circuit when the third reset occurs, the WD circuit will shut
down the CPU and remove the RSl50/100 from the ring network. The LED will be turned on with a steady
light.
Each time the CPU is reset by the watchdog circuit the CPU sends a message to the Main Computer PCB.
The Main Computer PCB will then retransmit the setup of the RSl50/100.
Watchdog Time Out

The watchdog time out circuit is a combined hardware and software test program monitoring the function
of the CPU. The time out register will be incremented by one each time the WD circuit resets the CPU. If
the time out program counts 6 resets in less than 12 minutes, the interface PCB will be removed from the
ring network. The RED LED will start flashing with a frequency of 1/2 Hz.
Every 12 minutes the time out register is decremented by one.
RAM Error
When power is switched on the CPU will carry out a complete RAM test. If a fault is detected the LED will
start flashing with a frequency of 1 Hz and the PCB will remain inactive.
During normal operation the CPU is continuously performing tests of the RAM, one cell per 1 ms. If a fault
is detected the CPU will remove the PCB from the ring network and the RED LED will start flashing with
1 Hz.
0 6.3 - 7
REVISED 92.11 .Ol
SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
EPROM Error
When the power is switched on the CPU will perform a checksum check of the EPROM. If an error is
detected the RED LED will start flashing with a frequency of 2 Hz and the PCB will remain inactive.
During normal operation the CPU will continuously check the EPROMs by adding one cell every 1 ms. If
a checksum error is detected the CPU will remove the PC6 from the ring network and the RED LED starts
flashing with 2 Hz.
The only way to restart the RS150/100 when one of the above errors has been detected is to turn off
the ABL and then turn it on again.
Wet Section Self-Test Programs

The Wet Section has a built-in test program for start-up test of the circuits and is constantly monitoring the
performance of the circuits.
A RED LED is located on the Wet Section Control at the upper right corner of the PCB for indication of
detected faults on the PCB.
Watchdog Error.
, The Watchdog error circuit (WD) is a hardware circuit monitoring the function of the CPU.
If the CPU does not send a Watchdog triggerto the WD circuit within every 71 ms the WD will reset the CPU.
This will happen twice and if the CPU has not cleared the WD circuit when the third reset occurs the WD
circuit will shut down the CPU and remove the Wet Section Control PCB from the ring network.
The LED will be turned on with a steady light.
Every time the Wet Section CPU is reset it will send a message to the Main Computer PCB. The Main
Computer PCB will display the following message on the screen: Wet section control fault, Error Code
0. Then the Main Computer PCB will perform a Power On Reset of the ABL.
Watchdog Time Out

The watchdog time out circuit is a combined hardware and software test program monitoring the function
of the CPU.
The time out register will be incremented by one every time the WD circuit resets the CPU. If the time out
program counts 6 resets in less than 12 minutes, the CPU will not clear the last watchdog error but leave
the Wet Section inactive. The LED will be turned on with a steady light.
Every 12 minutes the time out register is decremented by one.
RAM Error
When power is switched on the CPU will carry out a complete RAM test. If a fault is detected the Busy
and Ready light will start flashing with a frequency of 1 Hz for approximately 5 seconds. Then the CPU
sends a message to the Main CPU. The Main CPU will display on the screen Wet section control fault Error
code S, and then it will perform a Power On Reset of the ABL.
During normal operation the CPU is continuously performing tests of the RAM, one cell per 1 ms. If a fault
is detected the Busy and Ready light will start flashing with a frequency of 1 Hz for approximately 5
seconds. Then the CPU sends a message to the Main Computer PCB. The Main Computer PCB will display
the following on the screen: Wet section control fault Error code S, and then perform a Power On Reset
of the ABL.
6.3 - 8
SELF-TEST PROGRAMS
EPROM Error
When the power is switched on the CPU will perform a checksum checkof the EPROM. If a checksum error
is detected the Busy and Ready light will start flashing with a frequency of 2 Hz for approximately 5
seconds. Then the CPU sends a message to the Main Computer PCB. The Main CPU will display the
following on the screen: Wet section control fault Error code 2 and then perform a Power On Reset of
the ABL.
During normal operation the CPU will continuously check the EPROM by adding one cell every 1 ms. If a
checksum error is detected the Busy and Ready light will start flashing with a frequency of 2 Hz for
approximately 5 seconds. Then the CPU sends a message to the Main Computer PCB. The Main Computer
PCB will display this on the screen: Wet section control fault Error code 2 and then perform a Power On
Reset of the ABL.
a 6.3 - 9
a 6.4 SERVICE PROGRAMS
Introduction
The instrument provides a number of service programs to improve the servicability of the instrument.
This section provides a description of the individual service programs. For the detailed checkout, ad-
justment and troubleshooting procedures, please refer to the appropriate sections.
Survey of Service Programs

The service programs are devided into two groups and are available from two submenus as shown
below.
Wet section service programs Other service programs
1. Electrode checkout 1. Loop-back test

2. Temperature checkout 2. Printer test
3. Gas mixer alignment 3. Dump/load setup
4. pO2 zero calibration 4. Software versions
5 Waste calibration 5. Service setup
6. Valve test 6. CRT alignment
7. Pump/main valve test 7. Electrode updatings
8. Liquid sensor test 8. Password
9. Check of various modules 9. Factory code
10. Wet section control step 10. Clear all data in RAM
11. Change gas mixer EEPROM 1 1. Cuvette compensation 1)
12. Shut down procedure 12. Software upgrade 2)
13. Photodiode checkout 1)
14. ~02 100 % adjustment 1)
1) ABL5101520 only.
2) ABL500/510/520 from Run 50/8/8 onwards only. In ABL500 this program is listed as Other
service program No. 11 (since Cuvette compensation does not exist).
Entry
The service programs are available whenever the Menu softkey is visible. Press the sequence of
softkeys as shown below.
Menu Utilities Other utilities Service
Revised 9 1.04.05 6.4-l

..
SERVICE PROGRAMS
Password: After having pressed “Service”, it is necessary to key in a password and press ENTER to
confirm in order to obtain access to the service menu. From the factory, the service password is set to
“89:452”, however, this may be changed or deleted using the other service program no. 8 (Password).
Wet Sect. Programs: In case an activity is taking place in the Wet Section when entering the ser-
vice menu, “Wet section service programs” is displayed with low intensity and the corresponding
softkey is extinguished to indicate that these programs are presently not available.
Program selection: When one of the above two service program menus is displayed, a specific
program is selected either by:
keying in the program number followed by ENTER, or
moving the curser to the program using the finger wheel and then pressing ENTER.
moving the curser to the program using the finger wheel and then pressing “Enter program”.
Auto Exit: Please note that if the instrument is left idle with one of the submenus displayed for
three minutes, it will automatically exit from the submenu and return to the highest level (where the
“Menu” softkey is visible).
6.4-2 Revised 91.04.05

6.4.1 SERVICE PROGRAMS (WET SECTION)
0
Electrode Checkout, Wet Section Service Program No. 1
Purpose: Checkout of the electrode channels. Each channel may be checked:

As a whole,
Excluding the electrode (and the wet section), or
Excluding the electrode (and the wet section) and the Preamplifier Unit
The K+, Na+ and Ca++/CI- refer to ABL505.
Screen
1. ABL500/5l O/520:
2. ABL505:
a
a REVISED 92.01.15 6.4.1-l

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Soft keys
Fill menu: Provides a menu for filling the electrode chambers (and cuvette, ABL510/520) with the
following liquids:
Cal 1: Cal 1 solution after which a liquid junction is established.
Cal 2: Cal 2 solution after which a liquid junction is established.
Sample: Enables introduction of a liquid sample followed by establishment of liquid
junction.
Exit: Returns to the main menu for the electerode checkout program.
When one of the softkeys in the fill menu is activated, the main menu for this
program is shown. TheFill menu key is, however, not available, but an Empty
is available instead.
Gas menu: Provides a menu for flushing gasses through the measuring chamber as follows:
Gas 1: Flushes Gas 1 through the electrode chambers for 60 seconds.
Gas 2:
Gas 3:
Flushes Gas 2 through the electrode chambers for 60 seconds.
Flushes Gas 3 through the electrode chambers for 60 seconds. l
-
stop: Terminates the gas flush.
Exit: Returns to the main menu for the electrode checkout program.
When one of the softkeys in the Gas menu is activated, the main menu for this
program is shown.
Only elect. channels: Enables quick updating (every 0.57 second) of electrode signals only (the
remaining parameters are frozen).
Replaced by All channels which enables updating of all parameters again
(approx. every 6 seconds).
Print: Provides printout of the data displayed.
Exit: Returns to the Wet Section Service Program Menu.
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The rinse will, however, not be called
until exit from the wet section service program menu is carried out.
Please note that if one of the softkeys in the Fill menu" or Gas menu has been activated,
the sample stays in the electrode chambers as long as you stay in the wet section service
programs (unless, of course, Empty is activated). This means that it is possible, for
l
example, to inject a cold sample in the temperature checkout program to see how the
temperatures vary and then afterwards go into the electrode checkout program to check
the elecrode signals.
Channel Signal Description Unit Limits Notes

pH, K+, Na+, Elect Electrode signal mV - 200.00; +70.00
Ca++/CI-, pCOs
0 Vr 0 V reference Counts 21850; 27400
2.5 Vr +2.5 V reference Counts 46800; 58800
PO2 Elect Electrode signal PA 5; 40000

0 Vr 0 V reference Counts 425; 900
- 2.5 Vr - 2.5 V reference Counts 31800; 39650
Pol-r Reference for the mV 1200.00; 1250.00
Polarization voltage
Pol-e Polarization voltage mV 625.00; 635.00
Batt Battery voltage mV 2700.00; 3400.00
I I
6.4.1- 2 REVISED 92.01.15

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Temperature Checkout, Wet Section Service Program No. 2
Purpose: Checkout of the temperature channel.
Screen :
Signal Description Unit Limits Note
Block Block temperature C 36.90 ; 37.10 1,2

Heat duty cycle % 0; 100
Heat- 1 Preheater 1 temperature C 36.00 ; 38.00 *) 1
Heat-2 Preheater 2 temperature C 36.00 ; 38.00 *) 1
Sense Block temperature C 36.90 ; 37.10 *) 1,2
AUX Auxilliary temperature input C 36.90 ; 37.10 3
Ref-37 6.1 kQ reference resistor (37.00 C) Counts 26900 ; 44500
OVr 0 V reference for the A/D converter Counts 5950 ; 9200
5Vr + 5 V reference for the A/D converter Counts 36000 ; 55 175
V-Supp Supply voltage V 28.00 ; 42.00
V-Test Test voltage input for A/D converter mV 0.00 ; 5000.00
Note 1: When stabilized. The monitor is linear for the range [33 C ; 41 Cl.
Note 2: Max. difference between Block and Sense is 0.05 C when stabilized.
Note 3: When the test resistor is connected (6.1 kQ, 0.05 %, Code 152-332)
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-3

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Softke ys
Fill elect. chamber: Fills electrode chambers (and cuvette, ABL510/520) with CAL1 solution and
establishes the liquid junction. When activated, it is replaced by Empty.
Sample: Enables introduction of a liquid sample followed by establishment of liquid junction.
Print: Provides printout of the data on the screen.
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however, not be
called until exit from the wet section service program menu is carried out.
Please note, that if Fill elect. chambers has been activated, the sample stays in the
electrode chambers as long as you stay in the wet section service programs (unless, of
course, Empty is activated). This means that it is possible, for example, to inject a cold
sample in the temperature checkout program to see how the temperatures vary and
then afterwards to go into the electrode checkout program to check the elecrode sig-
nals.
Gas Mixer Alignment, Wet Section Service Program No. 3
Purpose: Checkout and alignment of the Gas Mixer mechanics and electronics.
Screen:
6.4.1-4 Revised 91.04.05

Bar0 p Monitor output mV - 300.00 ; + 5300.00

Baro c Calculated baro press. mmHg or 440; 810
kPa 60.00; 106.67
Bar0 r Reference voltage for baro circuit mV 5000.00 ; 5040.00
Offset Offset entered in user setup program mmHg or - 20.0 ; + 20.0
(bare) kPa - 2.67; + 2.67
Airflow Monitor output mV - 300.00 ; + 5300.00 1
Calculated air flow ml/min 144; 216 2
Pump speed rpm 0; 1200 3
Offset (air) Zeropoint for the monitor mV 4
co2 P Monitor output mV - 300.00 ; + 5300.00 5
Offset (CO2) Zeropoint for the monitor mV 4
Gas mixer Status of the gas mixer Off/starting
status Running correct
Running -fault
Note 1: Dynamic range given. Limits for GM on are: 1550 + voffset ; 2050 + Voffset.
Note 2: Limits given for GM on. When off, the value is 0.
Note 3: With GM off, the value is 0 rpm. With GM on the upper limit before replacing the
membrane pump is 1200 rpm.
Note 4: Adjusted to 50 mV at factory. The maximum drift is only limited by the dynamic range of
the monitor.
Note 5: Dynamic range given. Limits for GM on are: 1440 + Voffset ; 2 160 + Joffset,
Softkeys
a Decrease air flow: Decreases the air flow by decreasing the pump speed in steps of 10 rpm per ac-
tivation. Used when adjusting the air flow monitor.
Backspace may be used as an alternative for this softkey.
Increase air flow: Increases the air flow by increasing the pump speed in steps of 10 rpm per acti-
vation. Used when adjusting the air flow monitor.
Enter may be used as an alternative for this softkey.
Gas mixer on: Turns the gas mixer on (the gas mixer supplies Gas 1). The ENTER key may be
used as an alternative to the Gas mixer on softkey.
Gas mixer off: Turns the gas mixer off.
Exit: Returns to the Wet Section Service Program Menu. The gas mixer is turned off
upon exit.
A Rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however,
not be called until exit from the wet section service program menu is carried
out.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-5

SERVfCE PROGRAMS
~02 Zero Calibration, Wet Section Service Program No. 4
Purpose: Offset Calibration of the ~02 channel. The program is to be used in case the pO2 Pre-
amplifier Unit or the Wet Section Control PC3 has been replaced.
Screen:
Softkeys
Calibr. : Provides a new calibration value.
Please note that the pO2 electrode must be disconnected before pressing Calibrate.
Save: Used for saving the new calibration value. It is possible to save values in the range
[SO00 ; 7000 PA].
However, in a service situation only values in the range [6000 ; 6350 pAI should be
saved.
kin t: Provides a printout of the data on the screen.
A Rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however, not be
6.4.1-6 Revised 91.04.05

a SERVICE PROGRAMS
Waste Detector (Waste Calibration), Wet Section Service Program No. 5
Purpose: Calibration of the waste sensor 902-053 (mounted from the factory in ABL500/510/
520 below Run 50/8/8). To be used when the waste detector has been replaced.
Check of the Waste detector 902-155 (mounted from the factory in ABL500/510/520
from Run 50/8/8 onwards).
Please refer to Section 2.4 for calibration/checkout procedures.
Screen: The two upper lines aaply only for the earlier type waste detector and are always
shown. The three lower lines apply only for the new type waste detector and are only
shown in case the new type is actually mounted.
ABL520 WASTE DETECTOR
waste empty constant 291
Actual waste sensor voltage 2913.22 mV
waste S.zSOT voltage T(amb.) 2095.28 mV

waste sensor voltage T(ahlgh) 1917.44 mv
waste sensor voltage T(low) 2029.77 mv
Softkeys
Calibr. : Earlier waste detector Stores the output of the waste detector in the E*PROM.
In a service situation only values in the range [2200 ; 3200 mV] should be saved
(only the three most significant digits are stored, e.g. 220).
Please note that an empty waste container must have been mounted for at least
10 minutes before pressing Calibrate.
New waste detector Initiates a measuring cycle to update the displayed values.
Print: Provides a printout of the data on the screen.

A Rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however, not
be called until exit from the wet section service program menu is carried out.
Revised 9 1.04.05 6.4.1-7

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Valve Test, Wet Section Service Program No. 6
Purpose: Checkout of the valves in the Wet Section and the Gas Mixer.
Screen:
off
off
of f
off
off
off
off
of f
off
off
Softkeys
Pull and release: Pulls and releases the selected valve. Used for checking the pull circuit.
Pull and hold: Pulls and holds the selected valve. Used for checking the pull and hold function.
It is possible to setup a combination of held valves by pulling and holding the
valves one after the other.
Release all: Releases all valves which are held activated.
Exit: Returns to the Wet Section Service Program Menu. All valves are released upon
exit.
Enter key: May be used as a toggle key for a selected valve. May alternately be used as pull
and hold and release for the selected valve.
NOTE Please note that the valve, V3, is not included in the ABLSOO.
6.4.1-g Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
a
Pump/Main Valve Test, Wet Section Service Program No. 7
Purpose: Checkout of the pumps and the main valve in the Wet Section.
Screen :
Softkeys
Decrease: Is used for decreasing the pump speed or the position of the main valve.
The Backspace key may be used as an alternative to this softkey.
Increase: Is used for increasing the pumpspeed or the position of the main valve.
The Enter key may be used as an alternative to this softkey.
The function of increase and decrease are visualized overleaf. 4
Both pumps may be set up to run simultaneously one after the other. When any of the pumps are
turning, the main valve is at position 0. If any of the pumps are turning when the main valve is moved
away from position 0, the pumps are immediately stopped.
Start/stop: When the pumps have been setup, they may be stopped simultaneously and
restarted using this softkey.
When the main valve has been set to a certain position, say pos. 4, this softkey
may alternately rotate the main valve to position 0 and 4 respectively.
Exit: Returns to the Wet Section Service Program Menu. The pumps are turned off
and the main valve is returned to position 0 upon exit.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-g

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Values: The calibration and present values for the liquid sensors are shown in counts. The dy-
namic range for present value is from 0 through 1023 counts.
The absolute maximum range for the calibration value is from 16 to 612 counts.
However, to allow for drift after a service visit, the calibration value should be in the
range from 30 to 550 counts.
Please note that the ABL will give LSx error if the empty value for a liquid sensor is
below 34 during a liquid sensor calibration (adjustment). In addition it will not up-
date the calibration value, but simply repeat the latest accepted value.
Since LS3 is not used in ABLSOO, the numbers in the corresponding column on the
screen are not shown.
Softkeys
Fill liquid sensors: Fills all the liquid sensors. When activated, it is replaced by Empty. All liquid
sensors are empty at entry to the program.
(Print: Provides printout of the data on the screen).
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The rinse will, however, not
Check of Various Modules, Wet Section Service Program No. 9
Purpose: Checkout of the various parts in in the Wet Section.
Screen :
Inlet nodule on
tnlet flap closed
&pirate button releaseci
covet on
Uaste container mPtY
Fa? regulate
neas light off
Ready/Busy LED busy
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-11

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Status: Inlet module on/off

Inlet flap closed/open
Aspirate button released/pressed
Cover (of thermostatted box) on/off
Waste container empty/full/bad
Fan regulate/off/on
Meas light off/on
Ready/Busy LED ready/busy
Softkeys
Ready Busy LED: A toggle switch for alternately switching on the Ready and Busy LEDs.
Meas light: Used for turning on/off the measuring chamber light.
Fan: Used for controlling the fan. Three settings are available; Regulate (default)
where the ambient temperature controls the fan, Off, On.
a
6.4.1-12 Revised 91.04.05
SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Wet Section Control Step, Wet Section Service Program No. 10
Purpose: For checking the wet section. It is possible to design an individual wet section control
program with up to five steps.
Screen (main):
54 0 Cl0 0 0(1 0 II 0 0 0 0 0 :: :
Status o f L i q u i d Smsnrs 0 0 0 0 1 Current Step 0
Softkeys (main screen)

start: Used for starting the keyed-in wet section control program.
Next step: Used for forcing the program to the next step (skip function).
stop: Used for stopping a running program.
Design step: Used for designing the selected step. The procedure is to select the step to be de-
signed using the finger wheel. Then to press Design step causing a design
screen to be displayed (including another set of softkeys), see below.
(Print: Provides a printout of the entire keyed-in program.)
Exit: Returns to the Wet Section Service Program Menu. If a keyed in program is run-
ning, it will be stopped upon exit -the program remains, however, in the mem-
ory.
Revised 9 1.04.05 6.4.1-13

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Change of Gas Mixer EEPROM, Wet Section Service Program No. II
Purpose: For manual entry of gas mixer percentages, e.g. in case the EEPROM on the Gas Mixer
Interface PCB is defective. In this case the percentages may be read on the Gas Mixer
itself and then be manually entered in this program. In order to avoid accidental
change of the gas mixer percentages, a check value must be calculated and entered
together with the percentages before the ABL will accept the change.
Screen :
Softkeys
Save and restart: Saves the keyed in values after which the ABL is restarted. That is the wet section
control programs are reloaded and the ABL goes into STARTUP.
Procedure: a) Key in the CO2 percentages for Gas 1 and Gas 2.

b) Add the above percentages.
c) Add 12.3456 to the result of the above.
d) Key in the result obtained in step c) as Check value.
An example: a) Gas 1 = 5.6211 % CO2, Gas 2 = 11.2337 % CO2.
b) 5.621 1 + 11.2337 = 16.8548.
c) 16.8548 + 12.3456 = 29.2004 = check value.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-15

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Shut down procedure, Wet Section Service Program No. 12
Purpose: Used for cleaning and drying the Wet Section in a controlled way when shutting
down the ABL for a longer period. The program is used in the production department
after having completed the final test and before transferring the instrument to the
warehouse
Screen: The screen provides the shut down procedure step by step (only the initial screen is
shown).
1:. Will LWN PFWCCDIIRL

1.
2.
3.
2:
Softkeys
Start: Initiates the next part of the cleaning/drying procedure. Please note that once
started, the program cannot be interrupted.
6.4.1-16 Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Photodiode checkout, Wet Section Service Program No. 13 ABL5101520
Purpose: Checkout of the six photo diode channels of the optical system. Each channel may be
checked as a whole (optics and electronics) or electronics alone.
Screen : The screen is devided into four columns providing channel number, present counter
values, present current values (individual and mean), and individual current values
during the latest zero point calibration (the fourth column also provides drift and
status values).
-520 PHOTODIODE CHECKOUT
lNNEL COUNT DIODECURRENT LAST CAL RESULTS
1 37945 x 0013 nA I-1 175.026 nA

2 37937 # 0013 nA I.2 196.537 nA
3 37949 t 0013 nA l-3 166.751 nA
4 37936 # 0013 nA I-4 78.683 nA
5 37929 # 0014 nA l-5 48.790 nA
6 37934 t 0.013 nA l-6 11.183 nA
OVWf 7612 + Drift 0.0 g/dL
5VWf 46882 # M&S! 0013 nA status 112.8 nA
0 Vref 0 V reference for the A/D converter Counts 6300 ; 8500

5 Vref + 5 V reference for the A/D converter Counts 39000 ; 50000
Softkeys
Fill elect. chamber: Fills electrode chambers and cuvette with CAL1 solution and establishes the
liquid junction. When activated, it is replaced by Empty.
Sample: Enables introduction of a liquid sample; liquid junction is establish.
Lamp on/off: Used for turning on/off the bulb in the lamp unit.
Hemol. on/off: Used for turning on/off the hemolyzation circuit
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-17

SERVICE PROGRAMS
l
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however, not be
Please note, that if Fill elect. chambers has been activated, the sample stays in the
electrode chamber and the cuvette as long as you stay in the wet section service pro-
grams (unless, of course, Empty is activated). This means that it is possible, for
example, to inject a cold sample in the temperature checkout program to see how the
temperatures vary and then afterwards to go into the electrode checkout or photo
diode checkout program to check the elecrodeidiode signals.
502 100% adjustment, Wet Section Service Program No. 14 ABL5101520
Purpose: Checkout and adjustment of the Monochromator Unit. To ensure that the wet section
is empty at entry, it is important that the program is called directly from the ready
mode where ti Menu s is visible.
Screen : The screen may display up to five measurements showing ~02, tHb and cturb. Sample
#l is the latest measurement (earlier results are pushed downwards).
READY Novemb~f3.1990 15:30

Nextcal(Cal2) lb:00
Lastcal(Cal 1)was 15.00
AEL520S02100% ADJUSTMENT
Sample '02 ttib cTurb
1 100.0 % 13.0 g/dL 0.000 mmol/L

2 0.0 % 0.0 g/dL 0.000 rnrnOl/L
3 0.0 % 0.0 g/dL 0.000 rnrnOl/L
4 0.0 0% 0 0 g/dL 0.000 InrnOllL
5 0.0 % 0.0 g/dL 0.000 mmol/L
Sample. Repeat Exit Print

II meas. I II
Softkeys
Sample: Enables introduction of the sample with an ~02 of 100 %. The key is extinguished
after activation.
After introduction, the sample is transported into the cuvette, hemolyzed and
measured. When the results are displayed, the acoustic alarm sounds.
6.4.1-18 Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Repeat meas. Appears approximately 30 seconds after the results are displayed.
Repeats the measurement to update the screen according to the new adjustment
of the Monochromator Unit. The key is extinguished during the measurement
and for 30 seconds after the new results are displayed (to avoid a temperature in-
crease of the system).
Print: Provides a printout of the data on the screen (only available when at least one measure-
ment has been performed).
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however, not be called until exit
from the wet section service program menu is carried out.
Important: During adjustment the following conditions must be fullfilled:

tHb = [ll.O ; 15.01 g/dL or [6.82 ; 9.311 mmol/L or [6.82 ; 9.311 mmol/L
cturb < 0.200 mmol/L
If any of the two above parameters are outside rangs, the procedure must be repeated using another
blood sample. That is, exit from the wet section service programs, wait for the rinse to complete and
reenter.
The adjustment has been successfully completed when:

so2 = [99.9; lOO.l]%
In case any of the three parameters is outside the specified range, the parameter will be questioned.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.1-19

6.4.2 SERVICE PROGRAMS (OTHER )
0
Loop-back Test, Other Service Program No. 1
Purpose: Used for testing the various serial communication channels.
Screen:
Softkeys
Select channel: Used for selecting the channel to be tested.
Start test: Used for starting the test. When activated, the test will be repeated infinitely
until Stop test is activated. This makes it possible to work with cables, plugs,
etc. to reveal errors caused by bad connections, etc.
Stop test: Used for ending a test.
Exit: Returns to Other Service Program Menu. An ongoing test is stopped upon exit.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-l

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Printer Test, Other Service Program No. 2
Purpose: Used for checking the Printer and Printer Control PCB.
Screen:
Signal Description Unit Limits
Current factor Difference between nominal % - 25 ; + 35

and actual current.
24 volt factor Difference between nominal % - 7 ; +9
and actual voltage.
Impedance Result of the above two % - 3 2 ; +44
factor factors - used for adjusting the
heat pulse.
Temperature Factor for adjusting the heat % - 5 6 ; +121
factor pulse according to the tem-
perature of the therm0 head.
Printer head Temperature of the therm0 C 5; 55
temp. head.
6.4.2-2 Revised 91.04.05

Softkeys
Therm0 head cal: Used for initiating a calibration of the therm0 head, that is, measurement of
the current consumption.
Start test printout: Used for starting the test printout, see Section 2.1 O-2.
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu. It is possible to exit, even though
an initiated test printout has not yet been completed.
Dump/Load Setup, Other Service Program No. 3
Purpose: Used for setting up the ABL temporarily in a service situation without changing the
users own setup.
Note: Please note, that if a temporary setup is used, the contents of the status field (e.g.
Ready) will be displayed in black letters. This is to inform you that the instrument is
not operating according to the users setup.
Screen :
3. I
Softkeys
Change setup: Used for selecting which part of the RAM memory the subsequent changes in
the setup is to be stored in. The possibilitiesare:
Permanent which is battery backed-up (default setting). If Permanent is
selected, the ABL will be in the normal mode where all changes to the setup
will overwrite the original setup.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-3

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Screen
ABL500/51 O/520:
AB L.505:
Disreyarri y a s E tent) fvfors

I n l e t ~3nd Lover o f f rfmwill iyWrfett
Disable UaSte check.
Additional decimal digit for IfleS

-
Softkeys
Yes/no: Used for setting up.
If Disregard gas & temp errors, Cover off removal ignored, Disable gas checkand/
or Disable waste check are set to Yes, it is possible to run the ABL in the normal
mode as if no errors were present.
If Rinse only at power on is selected, the ABL will only perform a Rinse when
switching on the power (that is, no refill, no LS adjustment, no warming period, etc.).
It is possible to work with the ABL as soon as the upstart rinse has completed.
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu. The service setup remains unchanged
after having activated Exit.
6.4.2- 6 Revised 92.02.07

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Software Versions, Other Service Program No. 4
Purpose: Provides an overview of the software versions on the various PCBs.
Screen:
Softkeys
Print: Provides a printout of the data on the screen.
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu. It is possible to exit, even though a
printout of the data on the screen has not yet been completed.
Service Setup, Other Service Program No. 5
Purpose: Used for setting up the control of the wet section during service. It is possible to change
or cancel the ABLs normal action caused by the status of the various parts of the wet
section.
Note: If a service setup is used, the contents of the status field (e.g. Ready) will be displayed
in black letters. This is to inform you that the instrument is not operating according to the
Users Handbook.
Above note does not apply to *‘Additional decimal digit for bytes’?’
Rinse only at power on must be selected before power is switched off.

Inlet and Cover off removal ignored must be selected before removing the parts;
otherwise the ABL will enter into the Hold mode.
Revised 92.02.07 6.4.2- 5

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Electrode Updatings, Other Service Program No. 7
Purpose: ABLSOO: Provides the possibility of obtaining a printout of the electrode updat-
ings. It is possible to select the printout for measurements, calibrations, and/or gas
flushes. For measurements and gas flushes both electrode signals (mV or PA) and the
calculated values (e.g. mmHg) are printed out. However, for calibrations it is possible
to choose the updatings to be printed out as electrode signals and/or as calculated
values.
ABLSlOl520: Provides in addition to the above the possibility of obtaining a prin-
tout of the photo diode currents (dark and light) during an OXI measure-
ment/calibration.
Examples of printouts of the electrode updatings are shown at the end of this section.
Note: Please note, that if printout of updatings has been selected, the contents of the status
field (e.g. Ready) will be displayed in black letters. This is to inform you that the ABL
is not operating according to the Users Handbook.
Screen :
READY November 8.1990 15.30

Next cd [Cal 2) 16 00
Last Cal (Cal 1) was 15 00
ARL520 El FCTRODF LIPDATING
ACTIVITY pH, ~02, pCO2

Measurements Yes
Calibrations (mVlpA) NO
Calibrations (talc.) No
Gasflushes No
ACTIVITY OXI
Measurements No
Calibratcons No
11 BGlQC 11 SGcal 1 1II oxica1 II
Softkeys
Yeslno: Used for setting up the updating printout, that is, for which activities the updat-
ings printout should be generated and in which unit the parameters should be
printed out.
Automatic: The updatings may be printed out automatically just after the
normal printout for the activity in question.
6.4.2-8 Revised 91.04.05

a SERVICE PROGRAMS
CRT Alignment, Other Service Program No. 6
Purpose: Used for aligning the picture on the CRT monitor. The program provides three
different test pictures, each serving their own function for performing an align-
ment of the picture.
Screen :
Softkeys
Test picture 1: White screen; used for adjusting the height and width of the picture.
Test picture 2: Horizontal lines; used for adjusting the vertical linearity.
Test picture 3: Vertical lines; used for adjusting the horizontal linearity.
When any of the above softkeys has been activated, the test picture, which uses the entire screen, is
displayed. This leaves no space for displaying any softkeys, however, all softkeys have the same func-
tion, Exit, which causes a return to the screen shown above.
Exit: Returns to Other Service Program Menu.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-7

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Softkeys
Clear user password: Deletes the user password protecting access to the setup programs.
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu. The setup remains unchanged
at exit..
Factory Code, Other Service Program No. 9
Purpose: Used for entering the factory code (run number of the ABL) if desired, or reentering it
in case the Main Computer PCB has been replaced.
_
Screen:
Softkeys
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu. The setup remains unchanged at
exit.
Format: The factory code has the following format Rxx Nxx (e.g. R04 N14). When using
the numerical keyboard, the ID is keyed in as follows:
“.04..14”.
When pressing Enter to confirm, the decimal points are replaced by R and m
N * respectively.
6.4.2-10 Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Manual: The updatings for e.g. a single bloodgas calibration may be printed
out manually by entering this program and then pressing Print last Cal.
Print last meas/QC: (ABL500 only). Provides a printout of the electrode updatings for the latest
measurement on blood or QC. The softkey is only visible if a measurement ac-
tually has been performed.
Print last BGIQC: (ABL510/520 only). As above.
Print last cal: (ABL500 only). Provides a printout of the electrode updatings for the latest cali-
bration. The softkey is only visible if a calibration actually has been performed.
Print last BG cal: (ABL510/520 only). As above.
Print last OX/ cal: (ABL510/520 only). Provides a printout of the photo diode updatings for the la-
test OXI calibration. The softkey is only visible if an OXI calibration actually has
been performed.
Print: Provides a printout of the setup in this program.
exit.
Password, Other Service Program No. 8
Purpose: Used for keying in a password for protecting the service programs from unauthorized
entry.
Screen:
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-9

SERVICE PROGRAMS
Cuvette COmpeIISatiOtI, Other Service Program No. 11 ABL51 O/520
Purpose: Used for compensating for variations in the lenght of the light path through different
cuvettes. The program is used after having replaced the Hemolyzer Unit or the Wet
Section Control PCB. Refer to Section 2.15 for the actual procedure.
IMPORTANT: The program MUST be called directly from READY and the latest activ-
ity which MUST be carried out prior to entry is either a tHb calibration
or a measurent on S2190.
Screen:
*I
ABL520 CUVETTE COMPENSATION
Uncorrected tlib durmg last S2190 measkal: 134 g/d1

Current ttib cahbratlon factor- 1.005
Current ttib cuvette factor: 0.93754
Calculated tHb cuvette factor: 0.93416
ttib range: 10.0. 15.0 g/dL, or 6.20 - 9.30 mmOl/L

Factor range: 0.75 - 1.25
I I I-
I Save
Softkeys
-
Save: Used for saving the tHb factor calculated on basis of the last measurement or tHb cali-
bration on 52190; the calculated tHb factor will then replace the current tHb factor.
When pressed, Current tHb cuvette factor is set equal to m Calculated tHb cuvette
factor and Current tHb calibration factor is set to 1 .OOO. In fact, a tHb calibration is
carried out.
The ABL510 will not save the calculated tHb cuvette factor in case:
- calculated tHb cuvette factor is outside the range displayed. The factor is then
questioned and the acoustic alarm will sound if Save is pressed.
- tHb from last S2190 meas/cal is outside the range displayed. Both tHb from
last 52190 meas/cal and Calculated tHb cuvette factor are then questioned and
the acoustic alarm will sound if Save is pressed.
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu. The setup remains unchanged at exit.
Print: Provides a printout of the data on the screen
6.4.2-l 2 Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
a
Clear all data in RAM, Other Service Program No. IO
Purpose: Used for resetting the sample and calibration counters to zero and for deleting all
data stored in the data management system (except the contents of the optional
floppy disk). That is, the patient report, calibration, quality control and system status
logs are deleted.
In addition, the contents of the setup and service programs is reset to factory stan-
dard (default).
Screen:
Softkeys
Clear all: Erases the parity bit of the data stored in the RAM memory.
a
Note A few seconds after having pressed Clear all, the ABL will show a fatal
error (due to the erased parity bits). When this appears, switch the ABL off
and then on again. During the power upstart the contents of the RAM
memory is reset to default.
exit.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-l 1

SERVICE PROGRAMS
a
Screen : Displayed after activation of Program on the initial screen. This basic screen will
during the software upgrade include various messages indicating the status of the
upgrade together with prompts, cautions and error messages. Please refer to Section
2.17 for the actual software upgrade procedure.
Copyright, Radiometer Ais, Denmark,

1991. All Rights Reserved
6.4.2-14 Revised 91.04.05

a SERVICE PROGRAMS
Software upgrade, Other Service Program No. 12
Purpose: Used for loading new software into the flash PROM S on the Main Computer PCB.
NOTE: The program is only available in ABL500/510/520 of Run 50/8/8 onwards (that
is, instruments including flash PROM S on the Main Computer PCB).
NOTE: The complete procedure for loading new software into the flash PROMS is
found in Section 2.17.
Screen : Displayed upon entry.
LADY ~ ~ 15.30
16.00
15'00
~~~520 SOFTWARE UPGMDE
lnrertfloppy disk conta,n,ng new software.

Press Program to start software upgrade
WARNING: SelectmgProgram WIII erase exirtmg

software and set-upof the mstrument.
Softkeys
Program : Used for initiating the software upgrade. The software upgrade may take up to 20
minutes. On activation the screen changes to the one shown overleaf.
Exit: Returns to the Other Service Program Menu.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-l 3

SERVICE PROGRAMS
a
31 -79.52 -41.99 -44.53 -27.97 3097. 361.

32 -79.51 -41.97 -44.53 -27.94 3095. 343.
33 -79.52 -41.97 -44.54 -27.93 3094. 326.
34 -79.53 -41.97 -44.54 -27.91 3091. 312.
35 -79.52 -41.96 -44.53 -27.90 3091. 299.
36 -44.53 -27.99 3093. 287.
37 -44.53 -27.95 3099. 275.
30 -44.53 -27.95 3091. 264.
39 -44.53 -27.93 3090. 256.
40 -44.52 -27.81 3090. 247.
41 -44.53 -27.90 3091. 237.
42 -44.53 -27.90 3090. 230.
43 -44.52 -27.90 3095. 223.
44 -44.53 -27.79 3093. 216.
45 -44.52 -27.90 3092. 209.
46 -44.53 -27.79 3086. 203.
47 -44.52 -27.78 3089. 196.
49 -44.52 -27.76 3090. 191.
49 -44.51 -27.75 3092. 197.
50 -44.52 -27.75 3091. 182.
51 -44.52 -27.75 3091. 177.
52 -44.52 -27.73 3091. 173.
53 -44.52 -27.72 3096. 169.
54 -44.52 -27.73 3007. 166.
55 -44.51 -27.73 3099. 163.
56 -44.51 -27.73 3006. 159.
57 -44.51 -27.71 3094. 155.
50 -44.52 -27.72 3091. 153.
59 -44.52 -27.71 3094. 149.
60 -44.52 -27.73 3099. 147.
61 -44.53 -27.72 3091. 145.
62 -44.52 -27.73 3089. 142.
63 -44.52 -27.72 3091. 139.
64 -44.53 -27.73 3006. 137.
65 -44.52 -27.74 3091. 134.
66 -44.52 -27.75 3091. 133.
67 -44.52 -27.74 3091. 131.
69 -44.52 -27.75 3091. 129.
69 -44.53 -27.75 3091. 126.
70 -44.53 -27.76 3091. 124.
71 124.
72 121.
73 121.
74 118.
75 118.
76 116.
77 11s.
70 115.
79 113.
SO 113.
81 111.
92 111.
03 111.
84 109.
es 108.
86 106.
87 105.
6.4.2-l 6 Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
Total calibration results with
electrode updatings in mV/pA:
RADIOmETER FIBI-
Hay 21, 1991 9:lO

ML510 TOTAL CAL RESULTS Cal # 839
PH 7.400 Dr I ft 0 .ooo St at us 7.376

6.000 Dr I ft 0 .ooo Sens . 99.1 %
PC02 39.4 nnHg Dr i ft -0.2 St at us 1 5 3 . 1 nnHg

7 0 . 5 nnHg Dr I ft -0.4 Set-is. 91.1 %
PD2 1 4 0 . 1 nnHg Dr I f t 0 .o Sens . 21 .3 pfi/nnHg

0 . 0 nnHg Dr i f t -0.4 Zero 4 . 9 nnHg
tHb 0 . 0 g/dL Dr I ft 0 .o Status 1 4 0 . 9 nFI
8 7 5 6 nnHg
Printed Hay 21, 1991 9117 f r o n a n a l y z e r 5 0 5
# pH CnUl pCOZ CnUl PO2 CpAl

pHlcal pHZca I g a s l c a l gaskal g a s l c a l gas3cal
1 -70.56 - 4 1 .97 - 4 4 .Sl -44.55 3093. 3309.

2 -70.57 - 4 1 .97 - 4 4 .Sl -44.56 3096. 3360.
3 -70.56 -41.90 - 4 4 .so -44.56 3094. 3201 .
4 -70.56 - 4 1 .96 -44.07 -44.55 3094. 2000.
5 -70.56 -41.90 -44.04 - 4 4 .Ol 3094. 2550.
6 -70.55 - 4 1 .97 -44.00 -42.04 3092. 2257.
7 -70.55 -41.97 -44.76 -39.44 3094. 2003.
0 -70.55 -41.97 -44.72 -37.03 3000. 1700.
9 -70.54 -41.97 -44.60 - 3 5 .os 3092. 1607.
10 -70.55 -41.97 -44.66 -33.49 3093. 1453.
11 -70.54 -41.97 -44.63 -32.31 3094. 1322.
12 -70.54 -41.97 -44.62 - 3 1 .39 3093. 1200.
13 -70.54 -41.90 - 4 4 ;60 -30.69 3094. 1111.
14 -70.55 -41.97 -44.50 -30.14 3095. 1029.
15 -70.54 - 4 1 .07 -44.50 - 2 s .72 3094. 946.
16 -70.54 -41.97 -44.57 -29.30 3096. 076.
17 -70.54 -41.97 -44.56 - 2 s .12 3090. 017.
1E -70.54 -41.97 -44.56 - 2 0 .Sl 3009. 762.
19 -70.54 - 4 1 .96 -44.56 -20.75 3009. 711.
20 -70.54 - 4 1 .97 -44.56 -20.60 3091. 667.
21 - 7 0 .!i3 -41.97 - 4 4 .!i5 -20.49 3091. 625.
22 -70.53 -41.97 - 4 4 .!i6 -20.40 3091. 500.
23 -70.54 -41.96 - 4 4 .s5 -20.31 3091. 553.
24 - 7 0 .S4 - 4 1 .97 -44.54 -20.25 3090. 521.
25 -70.53 - 4 1 .97 - 4 4 .s4 - 2 0 .lS 3005. 491 .
26 -70.53 -41.97 -44.53 -20.14 3094. 466.
27 -70.52 -41.96 -44.54 - 2 0 .lO 3093. 441 .
20 -70.53 -41.96 - 4 4 .s3 -20.06 3095. 419.
29 -70.52 -41.97 -44.54 -20.03 3009. 400.
30 -70.52 - 4 1 .96 - 4 4 .s4 -20 .oo 3094. 303.
Revised 91.04.05 6.4.2-l 5

SERVICE PROGRAMS
15 -79.23 7.404 -32.09 74.7 841. 42.0

16 -79.21 7.404 -31.96 75.1 824. 41.0
17 -79.20 7.404 -31.86 75.4 009. 40.2
18 -79.19 7.403 -31 . ,' !' 75.7 795. 39.4
19 -79.18 7.403 -31 .69 76.0 703. 30.7
20 -79.17 7.403 -31.60 76.2 770. 38.0
21 -79.17 7.403 -31.54 76.4 759. 37.4
22 -79.16 7.403 -31.46 76.7 749. 36.8
23 -79.16 7.403 -31.40 76.9 740. 36.2
24 -79.14 7.402 -31.34 77.0 730. 35.7
25 -79.14 7.402 -31.30 77.2 721. 35.2
26 -79.13 7.402 -31.25 77.3 711. 34.6
27 -79.11 7.402 -31.21 77.5 703. 34.2
20 -79.10 7.402 -31.16 77.6 696. 33.7
29 -79.10 7.402 -31.12 77.7 687. 33.2
30 -79.09 7.401 -31.09 77.9 680. 32.9
31 -79.08 7.401 -31.06 77.9 673. 32.5
32 -79.07 7.401 -31.03 70.0 667. 32.1
33 -79.07 7.401 -31.00 78.1 661. 31.8 -
34 -79.07 7.401 -30.97 78.2 655. 31.4
35 -79.07 7.401 -30.94 78.3 650. 31.1
36 -79.07 7.401 -30.92 78.4 644. 30.0
37 -79.06 7.401 -30.91 78.4 639. 30.5
30 -79.05 7.401 -30.89 70.5 635. 30.3
39 -79.04 7.401 -30.87 78.5 630. 30.0
40 -79.04 7.401 -30.86 78.6 626. 29.0
41 -79.04 7.401 -30.85 78.6 619. 29.4
42 -79.02 7.400 -30.83 78.7 614. 29.1
43 -79.02 7.400 -30.82 78.7 610. 28.9
44 -79.01 7.400 -30.00 70.8 606. 28.7
45 -79.01 7.400 -30.79 78.8 600. 28.4
46 -79.00 7.400 -30.78 70.8 606. 28.7
47 -79.00 7.400 -30.77 78.9 600. 28.3
40 -79.00 7.400 -30.76 70.9 594. 28.0
49 -79.00 7.400 -30.75 78.9 588. 27.7
50 -78.99 7.400 -30.75 78.9 591. 27.8
51 -78.98 7.400 -30.74 79.0 507. 27.6
52 -78.98 7.400 -30.74 79.0 50s. 27.5
a
53 -78.98 7.400 -30.74 79.0 503. 25.9
54 -30.74 79.0 574. 25.4
55 -30.74 79.0 573. 25.4
56 -30.73 79.0 569. 25.4
57 -30.73 79.0 569. 25.4
58 -30.71 79.1 565. 25.2
59 -30.71 79.1 564. 25.3
60 -30.71 79.1 565. 25.4
61 -30.71 79.1 562. 25.3
62 -30.70 79.1 566. 25.6
63 -30.71 79.1 558. 25.3
64 -30.71 79.1 559. 25.3
65 -30.71 79.1 562. 25.6
66 555. 25.3
67 553. 25.2
66 550. 25.0
69 550. 25.1
70 549. 25.1
71 550. 25.2
72 554. 25.5
73 553. 25.5
6.4.2-l 8 Revised 91.04.05

SERVICE PROGRAMS
February 7, 1992 10:14
ASLSOS TOTAL CRL R E S U L T S Cal # 405
ABL505 total calibration results with PH 7.400 Or i ft 0 .ooo Status 7.400

electrode updatings in mV/pA. 6.800 Or i ft 0 .ooo Sens . 98.2 %
PC02 3 9 .S nnHg Or i ft -0.2 Status 8 6 . 6 nnHg

The special graphic layout with dots 7 9 . 7 nnHg Or i ft -0.3 Sens . 97.4 %
instead of signal values for pH
PO2 1 4 1 .4 nnHg Ori ft -0 .l Sens . 1 9 . 4 pA/nnHg
updatings no. 1,2,3, 8,9,10 etc. is
0 . 0 nnHg Or i ft 0.1 Zero 2 . 0 nnHg
due to the limited paper-width and
because the pH channel is shared K 4 . 0 nnol/L Drift 0 .o Status 5 . 2 nnol/L
by the pH, K+, Na+, and Ca++/CI- 1 0 . 0 nnol/L Drift 0 .o Sens . 99.2 %
signals.
Na 1 4 5 nnol/L Or i ft 0 St at us 135 nnol/L
50 nnol/L D r i f t 0 Sens . 96.9 %
pH updating no. 1, 8, 15, 22 and
-0 .Ol St at us 1 .26 nnol/L
29 refer to K+. No. 2,9, 16, 23 and Ca l 1 . 2 5 nnol/L Drift
5 . 0 0 nnol/L Orlft 0 .oo Sens . 101.4 %
30 refer to Na+, and no. 3,10,17,24
and 31 are for Ca++/CI-. B 7 6 2 nntig
The updating signals for the elec-

Printed February 7, 1 9 9 2 lo:22
trolyte electrodes are printed to-
gether at the end of the printout.
# pH CnUl pCO2 CnUl PO2 CpAl
pHlca I pH2ca I g a s l c a l gas2cal g a s l c a l gas3cal
1 ..... ..... -60.11 - 5 s .50 2782. 2003.

2 ..... ..... -60.19 - 5 s .51 2782. 1823.
3 ..... ..... -60.51 -59.51 2782. 1652.
4 -69.07 -32 .SO -60.56 -59.60 2783. 1496.
5 -69 .O? -32.91 -60.31 - 5 3 .SO 2792. 1358.
6 -69.07 - 3 2 .Sl -60.03 -48 .SS 2782. 1238.
7 -69.07 - 3 2 .Sl - 5 9 .S2 - 4 6 .OS 2781. 1130.
S . . . . * ..... -59.70 -44.48 2780. 103s.
9 ..... ..... -59.62 -43.55 2780. 940.
10 ..... ..... -59.58 -42.97 2779. 070.
11 -69.06 - 3 2 .El -59.54 -42.60 2779. BOO *
12 -69.06 - 3 2 .Sl - 5 s .51 -42.34 2779. 736.
13 -69.05 - 3 2 .El -59 .Sl -42.17 2779. 680.
14 -69.06 -32 .Sl -59.49 -42.04 2778. 629.
15 ..... ..... -59.48 -41.94 2778. 502.
16 ..... . ..** -59.47 - 4 1 .S7 2779. 540.
17 . . . . * ..... -59.47 - 4 1 .SO 2778. so2.
18 -69.06 - 3 2 .Sl -59.46 -41.75 2777. 467.
19 -69.05 -32 .Sl -59.46 - 4 1 .72 2778. 435.
20 -69.06 - 3 2 .Sl -59.45 - 4 1 .6S 2777. 406.
21 - 6 9 .OS - 3 2 .Sl -59.44 -41.66 2777. 380.
22 ..... ..... -59.43 -41.63 2770. 355.
23 ..... ..... -59.44 -41.60 2777. 332.
24 ..... ..... -59.43 - 4 1 .!is 2777. 311.
25 -69.04 -32 .SO -59.43 - 4 1 .S6 2777. 292.
26 -69.04 - 3 2 .Sl -59.43 - 4 1 .!is 2777. 275.
27 -69.04 - 3 2 .SO -59.43 -41.52 2777. 258.
28 -69.04 -32.01 -59.42 -41 .so 2777. 244.
29 ..... ..... -59.42 -41.50 2777. 229.
30 ..*.. ..... -59.42 -41.49 2776. 216.
31 ..*.. ..... -59.42 -41.47 2777. 204.
32 -69.03 - 3 2 .SO -59.42 -41.47 2777. 193.
33 -69.03 - 3 2 .El -59.42 -41.45 2777. 183.
34 -69.03 - 3 2 .BO -59.42 - 4 1 .44 2776. 173.
35 -69.03 - 3 2 .Sl -59.42 -41.44 2777. 164.
6.4.2- 20 Written 92.02.07

SERVICE PROGRAMS
0
OXI calibration results with
photo diode currents:
R A D I O M E T E R AELSIO
Novenber 13, 1990 10:54

AEL510 CAL 1 RESULTS Cal # 209
PH 7.400 Dr i f t 0 .OOl St at us 7.434
PC02 4 0 .l nnHg Dr i ft 0 .S Status Sl .S nnHg

0 0 . 7 nnHg Dr i ft 1 .7 Sens . 89.3 %
PO2 141 .7 nnHg Drift -0.2 Sens . 2 4 . 4 pA/nnHg
tHb 0 . 0 g/dL Dr i ft 0.1 status 1 7 1 . 1 nA
B 7 6 4 nnHg
P r i n t e d N o v e n b e r 1 3 , 1 9 9 0 lo:57
Channe I I Cal I Light I Dark

InAl Ml CnAl
0 271 .OS 271 .ll 0.0237

1 272 .OS 272 .lO 0.0244
2 242.79 242.02 0.0243
3 129.82 129 .a4 0.0238
4 86.70 86.72 0.0252
5 24.03 24.06 0.0241
Revised 9 1.04.05 6.4.2-l 9

SERVICE PROGRAMS
February 7, 1992 10:40

ABL505 PATIENT REPORT Sanple # 19
ABL505 measurement results with
electrode updatings. IDENTIFICATIDNS
D p e r a t o r ID Patient ID
The special graphic layout with dots Depart nent Sex Not spec I f i ed
Sanple type Not spec ifI ed Rge 0 years
instead of electrode signals for pH Sanpl ing tine We i ght 0 kg
updatings No. 1,2,3, 8,9,10 etc. is Pat i ent t enp . 37.0 oc Height 0 cn
due to the limited paper-width and pso (st )d 26.84 nnHg
because the pH channel is shared t Hbd 15 .O g/dL
FfDzd 21 .o %
by the pH, K+, Na, and Ca++/CI- Report I ayout # 1
signals.
BLOOD GRS UALUES ACID EIRSE STRTUS
7.394 HCD; e 2 4 . 4 nnol/L
pH updating No. 1, 8, 15, 22 and P
~332 4 0 . 9 nnHg SBC. 2 4 . 5 nnol/L
29 refer to K+. No. 2,9, 16, 23 and ~02 1 0 5 . 4 nnHg t CD2 (P >c 5 7 . 6 Uol %
30 refertoNa+, and No. 3,10,17,24 ARE. 0 . 1 nnol/L
and 31 are for Ca++/CI-. TEHPERRTLIRE CORRECTED URLUES SBEc 0 . 1 nnol/L
pH < 37.0) 7.394
pCD2 ( 37 .O > 4 0 . 9 nnHg
The updating signals for the elec- PDF ( 37.0 > 1 0 5 . 4 nnHg
trolyte electrodes are printed to-
gether at the end of the printout.
ELECTROLYTE URLUES
K+ 4 . 1 nnol/L
Na 1 4 2 nnol/L
Ca l 0 . 6 1 nnol/L
Ca(7.4) 0 . 6 1 nnol/L
OXYGEN STRTUS
sD2. 97.9 %
tDzs . . . . . Uol %
Printed February 7, 1 9 9 2 lo:41
# PH pCD2 P=
CnUl C 1 InUl CnnHg 1 CpAl CnnHg 1
1 ..... m.... -60.24 39.7 2277. 118.6

2 ..... ..*.. -60.20 39 .B 2254. 117.3
3 ..... **... -60.14 39 .s 2234. 116.2
4 -68.61 7.394 -60.11 39 .s 2217. 115.2
5 -66.61 7.394 -60 .OS 40 .o 2201 . 114.4
6 -68.62 7.394 -60 .OO 40.1 2188. 113.7
7 -68.62 7.394 -59.97 40 .l 2176. 113.0
B ..... ..... -59.93 40.2 2165. 112.5
9 ..... ..... -59.89 40.3 2155. 111.9
10 ..... ..... -59.06 40.3 2145. 111.4
6.4.2-22 Written 92.02.07

SERVICE PROGRAMS
36 -59.42 -41.43 2776. 157.

37 -59.42 -41.42 2776. 149.
38 -59.42 -41.41 2777. 141.
39 -59.41 -41.40 2776. 135.
40 -59.42 -41.40 2776. 129.
41 -59.41 -41.39 2777. 123.
42 -59.41 -41.39 2776. 117.
43 -59.41 -41.38 2776. 112.
44 -59.41 -41.38 2776. 108.
45 -59.41 -41.38 2777. 103.
46 -59.41 -41.37 2776. 99.
47 -59.42 -41.36 2776. 95.
48 -59.41 -41.37 2776. 91.
49 -59.42 -41.35 2777. ee.
50 -59.42 -41.35 2777. e5.
51 -59.41 -41.35 2776. 82.
52 -59.41 -41.35 2776. 79.
53 -59.41 -41.35 2776. 77.
54 -59.41 -41.34 2776. 74.
55 -59.42 -41.34 2776. 72.
56 -59.41 -41.34 2776. 71.
57 -59.41 -41.33 2777. 68.
se -59.42 -41.35 2776. 66.
59 -59.42 -41.35 2776. 64.
60 -59.42 -41.35 2776. 63.
61 -59.42 -41.37 2776. 61.
62 -59.42 -41.37 2777. 59.
63 -59.42 -41.38 2776. 50.
64 -59.42 -41.38 2776. 57.
65 -59.42 -41.38 2777. 55.
66 -59.43 -41.40 2776. 54.
67 -59.42 -41.39 2777. 53.
68 -59.43 -41.41 2777. 52.
69 -59.43 -41.41 2776. 51.
70 -59.44 -41.42 2777. 50.
71 49.
72 48.
73 47.
74 46.
75 45.
76 45.
77 44.
78 43.
79 42.
eo 42.
ei 42.
82 41.
83 40.
84 40.
85 39.
96 39.
87 39.
# K' CnUl Na CnUl Ca CnUl

pNlcal pN2cal pHlcal pH2cel pHlcal pH2cal
1 8.33 32.63 -75.98 -103.36 1.65 is.88

e 8.26 32.57 -75.97 -103.40 1.71 20.26
15 8.27 32.57 -75.95 -103.41 1.77 20.47
22 8.28 32.57 -75.93 -103.42 1 .e5 20.60
29 8.29 32.56 -75.90 -103.44 1 .es 20.66
Written 92.02.07 6.4.2-21

SERVICE PROGRAMS
11 -69.64 7.394 -59.93 40.4 2139. 111.0

12 -69.63 7.394 -59.79 40.4 2130. 110.6
13 -69.64 7.394 -59.76 40.5 2124. 110.3
14 -68.64 7.394 -59.75 40.5 2117. 109.9
15 ..... ..... -59.72 40.6 2112. 109.6
16 . ..** a.... -59.69 40.6 2107. 109.4
17 ..*.. ..... -59.67 40.6 2102. 109.1
19 -69.63 7.394 -59.65 40.7 2097. 108.9
19 -69.64 7.394 -59.63 40.7 2093. 109.6
20 -69.64 7.394 -59.60 40.7 2099. 109.4
21 -69.64 7.394 -59.60 40.7 2096. 109.2
22 ..... ..*.. -59.59 40.9 2093. 109.1
23 ..... ..... -59.57 40.0 2079. 107.9
24 ..... *..a. -59.56 40.9 2077. 107.9
25 -69.64 7.394 -59.54 40.0 2074. 107.6
26 -69.64 7.394 -59.53 40.9 2071. 107.5
27 -69.64 7.394 -59.52 40.9 2069. 107.4
29 -68.63 7.394 -59.51 40.9 2066. 107.2
29 ..... n.... -59.51 40.9 2064. 107.1
30 ..... ..... -59.51 40.9 2063. 107.0
31 .a... ..... -59.50 40.9 2061. 106.9
32 -60.64 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2059. 106.9
33 -60.64 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2059. 106.9
34 -69.64 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2056. 106.7
35 -68.63 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2055. 106.6
36 ..... ..... -59.49 40.9 2053. 106.5
37 ..... ..... -59.49 40.9 2052. 106.4
39 ..... ..... -59.49 40.9 2051. 106.4
39 -69.63 7.394 -59.47 41.0 2050. 106.3
40 -69.64 7.394 -59.47 41.0 2049. 106.3
41 -69.63 7.394 -59.40 40.9 2049. 106.2
42 -69.64 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2046. 106.1
43 ..... a.... -59.40 40.9 2046. 106.1
44 ..... ..... -59.40 40.9 2045. 106.1
45 ..... ..... -59.40 40.9 2044. 106.0
46 -69.62 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2043. 106.0
47 -69.63 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2042. 105.9
49 -69.62 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2041. 105.9
49 -69.63 7.394 -59.48 40.9 2041. 105.9
50 ..... ..... -59.49 40.9 2040. 105.8
51 ..... ..... -59.49 40.9 2040. 105.9
52 ..... ..... -59.49 40.9 2040. 105.0
53 -69.61 7.394 -59.49 40.9 2039. 105.4
54 2039. 105.4
55 2037. 105.4
56 2037. 105.4
57 2037. 105.4
59 2036. 105.4
# K’ Na’ Ca"
CnUl CnnoIA_l [Ml Cnnol/Ll CnUl CnnoIA_l
1 9.62 4.2 -76.24 141. 3.89 1 .44

e 9.23 4.1 -76.05 142. -0.79 0.99
15 9.30 4.1 -76.03 142. -3.19 0 .a1
22 9.36 4.1 -76.02 142. -4.57 0.72
29 9.36 4.1 -76 .Ol 142. -5.39 0.67
36 9.37 4.1 -76 .Ol 142. -5.91 0.64
43 9.37 4.1 -76.02 142. -6.23 0.62
50 9.37 4.1 -76.02 142. -6.47 0.61
Written 92.02.07 6.4.20 23

SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABL50)
Common for all Service Programs
Program Stack: The programs are organised as a stack consisting of 1 through 5 displays. In some of
the programs are included help text pages showing the function of the various keys in
the service program in question.
Page Softkey: Used for selecting a specific display in a program stack.
ENTER key: Used for stepping between the various underlying choices in a service program.
Exit Softkey: Softkey for stepping back up in the menu hieraki; in a service program Exit will return
to the part of the service main menu from which the program was called; in the service
main menu Exit will return to the Utilities menu.
Printout: All the relevant displays may be printed out; for this purpose the Paper feed key is used
(functions as screen dump).
None of the help pages can be printed; this is also the case for some of the displays
containing figures. If the paper feed key is activated in a non printable display the
acoustic signal will sound.
Software Versions Program
The software versions for the various modules is to be found in the user Setup menu. Do as follows:
1, Press MENU,
2. Select 3 Utilities,
3. Select 2 Setup,
4. Press Page,
5. Select 10 Analyzer ID,
6. Press Page.
The software versions may be printed out as part of the user setup.
6.5 - 2 WRITTEN 93.02.08

6.5 SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABL50)
a
Introduction
The ABL50 provides a number of service programs to improve the serviceability. This section provides a
description of the individual service programs. For the detailed checkout, adjustment and troubleshooting
procedures, please refer to the appropriate sections.
Entry
Please note that the entry into the service programs is hidden (not shown in the menu).
Do as follows:
1. Press MENU,
2. Select 3 Utilities,
3. Key in 89.452 (pass word)
The leftmost service main menu display (see below) is shown upon entry.
In case a wet section activity is in progress at the time of entry, the service programs enabling control of
the wet section are unavailable; this is indicated by displaying a bar rather than the program number in the
service main menu.
In case an incorrect pass word is entered it is ignored; if this is the case exit from the Utilities menu and
reenter.
Auto Exit: Please note that if the ABL50 is left idle in the service main menu for two minutes,, it will
automatically exit and return to the highest level (where the Menu softkey is visible).
Survey of service programs

Below is shown the service main menu, a stack of three displays containing the 16 service programs
available:
ISERVICE 12:341 SERUICE 12:341 SERUICE 12:341

Seruice main menu Service main menu Service main menu
1 Electrode c h e c k 7 Pump4lU te5t 13 Service setup
2 Temperature check 8 Liquid sensor test 14 Clear all RRM
3 Gas mixer check 9 Nodules check 15 Print error log
4 ~02 zero cal. 10 Wetsection control 16 FIuxiliary setup
5 Waste detect check 11 Gas mixer EEPRDM
6 Ualue check 12 L o o p - b a c k t e s t
1 Paqe 1 Exit Exit Exit
Page 1
I Page I I
a REVISED 93.02.08 6.5 - 1

SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABLSO)
a well defined condition in the wet section.
Keys:
Liquid fill: Menu for filling the electrode chambers with the liquids listed and establishment of liquid
junction:
1 Call fill: Cal 1 solution.
2 Cal2 fill: Cal 2 solution.
3 Sample: Enables introduction of a liquid sample.
Procedure:
- Press 3 Sample,
- Open the inlet flap (BUSY will be lit for a few seconds during renewal of
the SBS solution),
- Wait for READY to be lit, and then introduce the sample,
- Close the inlet flap.
4 Empty: Empties the electrode chambers.
Gas fill: Menu for flushing gasses through the measuring chamber for 60 seconds as follows:
5 Gas7 fill: Flushes Gas 1.
8 stop: Terminates the gas flush.
Printout: of displayed data; press paper feed (help displays cannot be printed out).
Channel Signal Description Unit Limits Notes

PH, PC02 Elect Electrode signal mV - 200.00 ; +70.00
0 Vr
2.5 Vr
0 V reference
+2.5 V reference
Counts
Counts
21850
46800
;
;
27400
58800 0
-
PO2 Elect Electrode signal PA 5 ; 40000

0 Vr 0 V reference Counts 425 ; 900
- 2.5 Vr - 2.5 V reference Counts 31800 ; 39650
Pol-r Reference for the mV 1200.00 ; 1250.00
Polarization vottage
Pol-e Polarization voltage mV 625.00 ; 635.00
Batt Battery voltage mV 2700.00 ; 3400.00
6.5.-l- 2 WRITTEN 93.02.08

6.51 SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABL50)
a
Electrode Check, Service Program No. 1
Purpose: Checkout of the electrode channels. Each channel may be checked:

As a whole,
Excluding the electrode (and the wet section), or
Excluding the electrode (and the wet section) and the Preamplifier Unit
Electrode Displays:
SERuICE 12:34( SERVICE 12:341 1 SERUICE 12:341

Electrode check Electrode c h e c k Electrode check
PH -183.00 nU PC02 -183.00 M PO2 3332 pR
OUr 24638 # OUr 24638 # OUr 630 St
0 2.5 Ur 52095 # 2.5 Ur 52095 # -2.5 Ur 35504 St
Pal-r -1215.09mU
Pol-e -629.12mU
Batt -3 102.25 mU
Page I Exit I Page I Exit 1 I
Page I Exit
Help Displays:
;ERUICE 12:341 I SERU~CE 12:34)

_iquid f i l l GFIS fill
1 CQL1 fill 5 GFlSl f i l l
2 CFLL2 fill 6 GM2 f i l l
3 Sample 7 GQS3 fill
4 Empty 8 Stop
Page 1 Exit
Sottkeys Page: To access the next display in the stack.

Exit: To return to the Service Main Menu.
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The rinse will be called upon
exit from the Service Main Menu.
Please note that if one of the functions in the Liquid fill or Gas fill menus has
been activated, the sample stays in the electrode chambers as long as you stay
in the service programs (unless, of course, Empty is activated).
Any wet section activity will be interrupted upon exit.
Important: It is important to activate Empty prior to exit, or prior to changing
from one type of liquid in the electrode chamber to another, in order to ensure
WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1- 1

Temperature Check, Service Program No. 2

Purpose: Checkout of the temperature channel.
Displays:
ISERVICE 12:341 1 SERUICE 12:341 1 SERUICE 12:341 1

Temperature check Tcmpcrature check Liquid fill
Block 37.00 “C 12% Ref 37 33000 # 1 CFzLl fill
Heat 1 37.00+c 9 % OUr 7QOcl% 2 Sample
Heat2 37.00+c 3 % 5Ur 42000 # 3 Empty
Sense 37.00 C Usuppl 37.00 u
wx 37.00 C utest 3000 r-II
I 1 I I
I Page I Exit I 1I Pase 1 I
Exit 1 1
1
Paw 1
L I
Exit 1
1
Signal Description Unit Limits Notes

Block Block temperature C 36.90 ; 37.10 182
Heat duty cycle % 0 ; 100
Heat-l Preheater 1 temperature C 36.00 ; 38.00 1
Heat 2 Preheater 2 temperature C 36.00 ; 38.00 1
Sense Block temperature C 36.90 ; 37.10 1,2
Aux Auxiliary temperature input “C 36.90 ; 37.10 3
Ref-37 6.1 kohm reference resistor (37.00) Counts 26900 ; 44500
0 Vr 0 V refernce for the A/D converter Counts 5950 ; 9200
5Vr +5 V reference for the A/D converter Counts 36000 ; 55175
v-supp Supply voltage V 28.00 ; 42.00
V-test Test voltage input for the A/D converter mV 0.00 ; 5000.00
Note 1: When stabilized. The monitor is linear for the range [33 C ; 41 Cl.
Note 2: Max. difference between Block and Sense is 0.05 C when stabilized.
Note 3: When the test resistor is connected (6.1 kohm, 0.05 %, Code 152-332).
0
WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-3
Softkeys Page: To access the next display in the stack.

Exit: To return to the Service Main Menu.
be called until exit from the Main Service Menu is carried out.
Please note that if one of the functions in the Liquid fill or Gas fill menus
has been activated, the sample stays in the electrode chambers as long as you
stay in the service programs (unless, of course, Empty is activated).
Important: It is important to activate Empty priorto exit, or prior to changing
from one type of liquid in the electrode chamber to another, in order to ensure
a welldefined condition in the wet section.
Keys:
Liquid fill: Menu for filling the electrode chambers with the following liquids and establishing the liquid
juntion:
1 CAL1 fill: CAL 1 solution
2 Sample: Enables introduction of a liquid sample. 0
-
Procedure:
- Press 2 Sample,
- Open the inlet flap (BUSY will be lit for a few seconds during renewal of
the SBS solution),
- Wait for READY to be lit, and then introduce the sample,
- Close the inlet flap.
3 Empty: Empties the electrode chambers.
Printout: of displayed data, press paperfeed (help displays cannot be printed out).
Gas Mixer Check, Service Program No. 3
Purpose: Checkout and alignment of the Gas Mixer mechanics and electronics.
Displays:
SERUICE 12:34( SERVICE 12341 :ERUICE 12:34(

Gas mixer c h e c k Gas mixer check Sas mixer check
Bare p 3835.99 mU Flirf 1. 1898.96 mU 1 Flirflow down
Bar0 c 749.7 mmHg 179.17 ml&in 2 Flirflow up
Offs 0.0 mdig 653 rpm 3 Gas mixer on
Bat-o r 5D05.3 1 mu Offs 68.00 mu 4 Gas mixer o f f
CD2 P 1811.48mU
Offs 53.10 mu
Exit
I Pago I Exit I
Page 1 Exit Page I
Note: A ?I in the upper right corner of the screen indicates that the gas mixer is not running correctly.
6.5.1- 4 WRITTEN 93.02.08

l
Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu. The gas mixer is turned off upon exit.
A Rinse is set when entering this program. The rinse will be called upon exit
from the Service Main Menu.
Keys: 1 Airflow down: Decreases the air flow by decreasing the pump speed in steps of 10
9 rpm per activation. Used when adjusting the air flow monitor.
2 Air flow up: Increases the air flow by increasing the pump speed in steps of 10
rpm per activation. Used when adjusting the air flow monitor.
3 Gas mixer on: Turns the gas mixer on (the gas mixer supplies Gas 1).
4 Gas mixer off: Turns the gas mixer off.
Printout: of displayed data; press paper feed (help displays cannot be printed out).
Signal Description Unit Limits Notes

Baro p Monitor output mV -300.00 ; +5300.00
Baro c Calculated baro press mmHg or 440 ; 810
kPa 60.00 ; 106.67
Baro r Reference voltage for baro circiut mV 5000.00 ; 5040.00
Off set Offset entered in user setup program mmHg or -20.00 ; +20.00
kPa -2.67 ; +2.67
Airflow Monitor output mV -300.00 ; +5300.00 1
Calculated airflow ml/min 144 ; 216 2
Pump speed rpm 0 ; 1200 3
Offset (air) Zero point for the monitor mV 4
co2 p Monitor output mV -300.00 ; +5300.00 5
Offset (C02) Zero point of the monitor
Note 1 Dynamic range given. Range for running GM is: 1550 mV + Offset ; 2050 mV + Offset
Note 2: Limits given for running GM. When off, the value is 0.
Note 3: With GM off, the value is 0 rpm. When on, the upper limit before replacing the membrane
pump is 1200 rpm.
Note 4: Adjusted to 100 mV at the factory. The maximum drift is limited by the dynamic range of
the monitor.
Note 5: Dynamic range given. Range for running GM is: 1440 mV + Offset ; 2160 mV + Offset.
a WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-5

p0, Zero calibration, Service Program No. 4
Purpose: Offset Calibration of the p0, channel. The program is to be used in case the p0,
Preamplifier Unit or the Wet Section Control PCB has been replaced.
Displays:
SERUICE 12:341 SERUICE 12:34 t

~02 zero Cal. ~02 zero cal.
Offset current Offset c u r r e n t Offset current

present 6216.19pFs present 6216.19pFI present 6275.47 pFI
new . . . . . pFl new 6275.47 pFI new 6275.47 pFI
Calibrate 1 Exit I
Save I Exit I Exit
The three steps of a calibration is shown above.
Softkeys Calibrate: Provides a new calibration value.

Please note that the p0, electrode must be disconnected and the displayed
value must be stable before pressing Calibrate.
Save: Used for saving the new calibration value. It is possible to save values in the
range 15000 ; 7000 PA].
However, in a service situation only values in the range [6000 ; 8850 pAI
should be saved.
Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu.
A Rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will be called
upon exit from the service main menu.
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed (rightmost display cannot be printed out).
6.5.1- 6 WRITTEN 93.02.08

Waste Check, Service Program No. 5
Purpose: Check of the Waste detector.

Please refer to Section 2.4 for checkout procedures.
Display:
SERUICE 12:34)
Waste detect check
Fimbicnt 2095.28 m’J

High 1917.44 mu
Low 2029.77 mu
I Exit
I I
Softkeys Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu.

A Rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will, however,
not be called until exit from the wet section service program menu is carried
out.
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed.
I) WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1- 7

Valve Test, Service Program No. 6
Purpose: Checkout of the valves in the Wet Section and the Gas Mixer.
Display:
I SERUICE 12:34) SERVICE 12:341

Valve test Valve t e s t
1 PuWrclease
ws 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 Pull/hold
03 000 3 Release all
4 Toggle
C;tl 1 2 3 4
0000
Exit
L Page I Exit Page I I

Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu. All valves are released upon exit.
Important: If it is desirable to enter into another service program which
exercises the wet section after having worked with the valves in this program,
you should exit from the service main menu and then reenter (to call the rinse
cycle). This ensures a welldefined condition in the wet section before entering
the second service program.
Menu keys: 1 Pull/release: Pulls and releases the selected valve. Used for checking the pull circuit.
2 Pull/hold: Pulls and holds the selected valve. Used for checking the pull and hold
function. It is possible to setup a combination of held valves by pulling and -
holding the valves one after the other.
3 Release all: Releases all valves which are held activated.
4 Toggle: Used as a toggle key for a selected valve. May alternately be used aspull/
hold and release for the selected valve.
ENTER: Is used for selecting the valve to be tested (moving the cursor).
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed (help display cannot be printed out).
NOTE Please note that the valve, V3, is not included in the ABL50.
6.5.1-6 WRITTEN 93.02.08

l
Pump/MV Test, Service Program No. 7
Purpose: Checkout of the pumps and the main valve in the Wet Section.
Displays:
SERVICE 12:34)
Pump/MU test
1 Increase
Pl 2 Decrease
P2 3 Start&top
I MU pas. 0
Exit
I
L Page I I
Soffkeys: Page: To access the next display in the stack

Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu. The pumps are turned off and the main
valve is returned to position 0 upon exit.
exercises the wet section after having worked with the pumps and main valve
in this program, you should exit from the service main menu and then reenter
(to call the rinse cycle). This ensures a welldefined condition in the wet section
before entering the second service program.
Menu keys: 1 Increase: Is used for increasing the pump speed or the position of the main valve.
2 Decrease: Is used for decreasing the pump speed or the position of the main
valve.Both pumps may be set up to run simultaneously one after the other.
When any of the pumps are turning, the main valve is at position 0. If any
of the pumps are turning when the main valve is moved away from position
0, the pumps are immediately stopped.
3 Start/stop: When the pumps have been setup, they may be stopped simultaneously
and restarted using this softkey.
When the main valve has been set to a certain position, say pos. 4, this
softkey may alternately rotate the main valve to position 0 and 4 respec-
tively.
ENTER: Is used for selecting which of the three electromechanical parts is to be manipulated.
Printout: Not available.
WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1- 9

Liquid Sensor Test, Service Program No. 8
Purpose: Checkout of the liquid sensors in the Wet Section.
Displays: First display: First column contains liquid sensor #; second and third columns contain
the latest calibration values (up to two, first and second) for each liquid sensor (calibration
value=60 % of the empty value during the calibration).
The fourht column indicate the present value of each liquid sensor together with the status
(E=empty / F=full).
Second display: Contains time and date for the up to two liquid sersor calibrations
stored.
12:341 SERVICE 12:34(

SERVICE
1 321 311
12:341
Liquid sensor test
2E
SERUICE
_iquid s e n s o r t e s t
1
_iquid s e n s o r t e s t
1 Fill
a
-
2 321 321 400 E F i r s t 1 4 . 0 3 . 9 2 12:32 2 Empty

3 Last 22.06.92 7:54
4 321 321 4F
5 286 291 398 E
Page I Exit Page Exit Page I Exit
Values: The calibration and present values for the liquid sensors are shown in counts. The dynamic
range for present value is from 0 through 1023 counts.
The absolute maximum range for the calibration value is from 16 to 612 counts.
However, to allow for drift after a service visit, the calibration value should be in the range
from 30 to 550 counts.
Please note that the ABL50 will give General Error #15 if the empty value for a liquid sensor
is below 34 during a liquid sensor calibration (adjustment). In addition it will not update the
calibration value, but simply repeat the latest accepted value.
Since LS3 is not used in ABL50, the numbers in the corresponding line on the display are
not shown.

A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The rinse will be called upon
exit from the service main menu.
exercises the wet section after having activated the Fill and Empty keys in
this program, you should exit from the service main menu and then reenter (to
call the rinse cycle). This ensures a welldefined condition in the wet section
before entering the second service program.
6.5.1- 10 WRITTEN 93.02.08

0
Keys: 1 Fill: Fill liquid sensors: Fills all the liquid sensors. All liquid sensors are
empty at entry to the program.
2 Empty: Empties the liquid sensors.
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed (help display cannot be printed out).
Modules Check, Service Program No. 9
Purpose: Checkout of the various parts in in the Wet Section.
Display:
SERVICE 12:341
Status: Fan r=regulate / O=off / 1 =on
Modules c h e c k
(Ready/Busy) LED r=ready / b=busy
Fan r Inlet 0
(Meas) Light O=off / l=on
Led Flap 0I
Inlet (module) O=on / l=off
Light L RSP 0I
Cww 0I (Inlet) Flap O=closed / 1 =open
Waste e Asp(irate button) O=released / 1 =pressed
Cover (thermostat. box) O-on I 1 =off
Waste (container) e=empty / f=full / b=bad
Change 1 Exit
t J
Sofikeys Change: Changes status of the selected module (ENTER is used for selecting the
module (Fan, LED or Light).
A Rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The Rinse will be
called upon exit from the service main menu.
exercises the wet section after having worked with this program, you
should exit from the service main menu and then reenter (tocall the rinse
cycle). This ensures a welldefined condition in the wet section before
entering the second service program.
ENTER: Used for selecting the module (Fan, LED or Light) whoose status is to be changed
using Change.
l WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-11

l
Wet Section Control, Service Program No. 10 NOT IMPLEMENTED
Purpose: For checking the wet section. It is possible to design an individual wet section control
program with up to four steps.
Displays:
SERUICE 12:341 SERVICE 12:341

Wetsection control W&section control
0 OOOOOO 000000 000 0 i Clear all
1 OOOOOO OOOOOO 000 0 2 Clear step
2 OOOOOO 000000 000 0 3 Change
3 OOOOOO 000000 000 0 4 Start
4 OOOOOO 000000 000 0 5 Next step
LS 00001 curr st 0 6 stop
page I Exit Page I Exit
Explanation of display
Each line on the display describes a programmed wet section control step; each column of the line
(denoted A, B, C etc.) describes the state of the electromechanical parts of the wet section as follows:
Line byouts A BCOEFG WJKLM NOP Q
Column lnterpreta tion: A Step number

BCDEFG Valves 1 through 6 (1 = pulled; 0 = released)
H Gas type (1, 2 or 3)
IJ Pump1 (,,OO = off; +l= CW6;+2=CW8;+3=CW13;
+4 = CW22; +5 = CW36; +6 = CW60; +7 = CWl 00;
# = same speeds CCW)
KL Pump2 (as for Pumpl)
tvl Main valve position
NOP Duration of step (maximum 145 seconds)
cl Number of next step to be executed.
Last Line Layout: LS ABCDEF curr st G
Column Interpretation: ABCDEF = Liquid sensors 1 through 5 (1 = full; 0 = empty)

G = Number of step currently executed
6.5.1- 12 WRITTEN 93.02.08

a SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABL50)

Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu. If a keyed in program is running, it will
be stopped upon exit - the program remains, however, in the memory.
A rinse flag will be set when entering this program. The rinse will be called
exercises the wet section after having worked with this program, you
should exit from the service main menu and then reenter (to call the rinse
cycle). This ensures a welldefined condition in the wet section before
entering the second service program.
Keys: 1 Clear all: Used for clearing the keyed-in data for ALL steps.
2 Clear step: Used for clearing the keyed-in data for the selected step.
3 Change: Used for changing the selected parameter. The procedure is to select the
parameter to be changed using the finger wheel. Then to press Change
repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed.
4 Start: Used for starting the keyed-in wet section control program.
5 Next step: Used for forcing the program to the next step (skip function).
6 Stop: Used for stopping a running program.
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed (help displays cannot be printed out).
Gas Mixer EEPROM, Service Program No. II
Purpose: For manual entry of gas mixer percentages, e.g. in case the EEPROM on the Gas Mixer
Interface PCB is defective. In this case the percentages may be read on the Gas Mixer itself
and then be manually entered in this program. In order to avoid accidental change of the
gas mixer percentages, a check value must be calculated and entered together with the
percentages before the ABL50 will accept the change.
Display:
1 SERUICE 12:34(
Gas mixer EEPROM
Present
5.6400 11.2915
New
0.0000 0.0000
Check 0.0000
kcept 1 Exit I
-
WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-13
Softkeys Accept: Saves the keyed in values (see note in Exit paragraph).
NOTE: In case new values have been accepteed above, the ABL50 will
enter the startup upon exit from the service main menu. This is to
ensure that measurements are not performed until a total calibration
based on the new values has been accepted.
ENTER: is used for moving the cursor between the input fields.
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed.
Procedure: a) Key in the new CO, percentages for Gas 1 (left column) and Gas 2 (right).
b) Add the above percentages.
c) Add 12.3456 to the result of the above.
d) Key in the result obtained in step c) as Check value.
An example: a) Gas 1 = 5.6211 % CO,, Gas 2 = 11.2337 % CO,.

b) 5.6211 +l 1.2337 = 16.8548.
c) 16.8548+12.3456 = 29.2004 = check value.
6.5.1-14 WRITTEN 93.02.08

0
Loop-back Test, Service Program No. 12
Purpose: Used for testing the serial communication channels. Please note that it is not possible to
test the printer port (Port3).
Display: Pott2 is always displayed. RSl50 isonlydisplayed in case the board is actually installed.
I stop I Exit I
Softkeys Start: Used for starting the test. When activated, Start is replaced by Stop.
?, The test will be repeated infinitely until Stop, Exit or ENTER is activated.
This makes it possible to work with cables, plugs, etc. to reveal errors caused
by bad connections, etc.
During an ongoing test, the status field will indicate either OK or Failed.
Please refer to Section 2.11 for the actual test procedure.
stop: Used for ending a test.
Exit: Returns to Service Main Menu. An ongoing test is stopped upon exit.
ENTER: is used for selecting the channel to be tested (moving the cursor). At entry the cursor is
placed at Port2.
Service Setup, Service Program No. 13
Purpose: Used for setting up the control of e.g. the wet section during service. It is possible to change
or cancel the ABL50s normal action caused by the status of the various sensors.
Note: If a service setup is used, the contents of the status field (e.g. Ready) will be inversed.
This is to inform you that the instrument is not operating according to the Users Handbook.
Rinse only must be selected before power is switched off.
Inlet cover off must be selected before removing the partzotherwise the ABL50 will enter
into the Hold mode.
l . 6.5.1-15
WRITTEN 93.02.08
r
Display / Printout:
11-5
SERUICE 12:341
hruice setup
Rinse only Y6ZS 5-401
Print updatings No
-Gas/temp err-w5 Yes
Inlet/cover off No
-Waste check Yes
Print ext. errors No mf% Meatuvemen t l-701
Change 1 Exit c
%3c% Measuvemen t 2-702

*
Softkeys Change: Used for setting up. Default selection is No for all setups.
Rinse only: forces the ABL50 to only perform a Rinse when switch-
ing on the power (that is, no refill, no LS adjustment, no
warming period, etc.). It is possible to work with the
ABLSO as soon as the upstart rinse has completed.
Print upda tings: Provides the possibility of obtaining a printout of the
electrode updatings (measurements and calibrations).
Both electrode signals (mV or PA) and the calculated
values (e.g. mmHg) are printed out for measurements,
for calibrations only the electrode signals are printed..
Examples of printouts of the electrode updatings are
shown at the end of this section. The printout takes
longer than a complete measuring cycle and the ABL50
is locked during the printing (not possible to carry out
measurements etc - this is indicated by Printing in the
status field). The locked time may be up to 30 seconds
after the measurement rinse has completed.
-Gas/temp errors: forces the ABL50 to disregard gas mixer errors,
/n/et cover of: forces the ABLSO to disregard removal of the inlet
module or top part of thermostatted box (cover),
-Waste check: forces the ABL50 to stop monitoring the waste level.
Print ext.effofs: enables printout of extended error codes. All error
messages will be printed out as they appear (however,
not in the middle of e.g. a measurement result.
The various extended error codes are described in the
Troubleshooting Section.
6.5.1-16 WRITTEN 93.02.08

c
.- SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABL50)
0
Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu. The service setup remains unchanged
after having activated Exit.
Printout: of displayed data, press paper feed. - .

.
Clear all RAM, Service Program No. 14
Purpose: Used for resetting the sample and calibration counters to zero. In addition, the contents of
the user setup and service programs is reset to factory standard (default).
a Display:
SERUICE 12:34)
Clear all RQM
Char I Exit
Softkeys Clear: Resets the above data to default settings.
l 6.5.1-17
WRITTEN 93.02.08

.
Print error log, Service Program No. 15
Purpose: Used for printing out the error log which contains the up to IO lat?st different errors which
have occured on the ABL50. If the program is selected Printing error log,,is displayed for
approximately 3 seconds while the printer starts printing out the error log.
Note: Please note, that this program is unavailable in case the pririter is already busy
printing or in case the printer has not been selected in the setup program.
Printout Below is an example of an error log printout.
R A D I O M E T E R ABL5O
ERROR LOG
Measuvemon t 2-702 11:30 13.01.93

Measuvemen t l-701 11:30 13.01.93
Pleaswomen t 5-401 11:30 13.01.93
Measuvemen t 11-5 11:28 13.01.93
Geneva 1 10-120 11:24 13.01.93
Cal ibvat ion 5-514 2:03 12.01.93
Cal ibvat lon l-501 2:03 12.01.93
Cal ibvat ion 6-515 22:03 11.01.93
l
Cal lbvat ion 3-509 22:03 11.01.93
Cal ibvat ion 2-505 12:05 11.01.93 -
11:32 1 3 . 0 1 . 9 3 ANALYZER tt 1234567890
6.5.1-18 WRlll-EN 93.02.08

Auxilliary setup, Service Program No. 16
Purpose: The program enables suppression of frequent calibrations after startup and some mainte-
nance for e.g. demonstration purposes.
Note: If Yes is selcted, the contents of the status field (e.g. Ready) will be displayed in black
letters. This is to inform you that the instrument is not operating according to the Users
Handbook.
Display:
SERUICE 12:341
Ruxiliary setup
Supp. freq. cals No
Change Exit
Softkeys : Change: Used for setting up. Default selection is No.

Supp. freq. cals: forces the ABL50 to skip the frequent calibrations called
in connection with starting up the instrument or after
having carried out maintenance.
Exit: Returns to the Service Main Menu. The setup remains unchanged upon exit.
Printout: of the displayed data, press paper feed.
e WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-19

a
Electrode updatings for a Total Cal:
I Pli WI dxc! WI PO2 [dll

PHlcd plpcal deal sEi2cal aasl~l !asw
I -76.15 -39.28 -47.63 -48.57 1651 1951

2 -76.14 -39.29 -47.61 -48.57 1651 lM9
3 -%.I5 -39.28 -477.61 -48.56 1653 1908
-76.13 -34.28 -47.59 -48.51 1653 1791
: -76.13 -39.28 -47.62 -47.30 1651 16%
6 -76.13 -39.28 -47.76 -43.89 1651 !W
7 -76.13 -39.28 l 47.% -40.18 1651 1371
8 -76.12 -39.28 -48.13 -37.36 1651 1248
9 -%.12 -39.28 -48.25 -35.45 1650 1138
10 -96.11 -39.27 -43.34 -34.20 1652 IO40
I1 -76.10 -39.28 -48.41 -33.38 1651 952
12 -16.10 -39.28 -48.45 -32.81 1650 074
13 -76.11 -39.28 -48.48 -32.42 16!Xl Ku
14 -76.10 -39.28 -48.50 -32.16 1591 741
15 -%.lO -39.27 -46.52 -31.% 1653 682
16 -76.10 -39.27 -48.53 -31.81 1653 630
17 -76.10 -39.28 -4ll.54 -31.69 1651 562
18 -76.10 -39.27 -4R.56 -31.60 mill 539
19 -76.09 -39.28 -46.56 -31.54 1652
20 -76.10 -39.27 -48.57 -31.1 1650 ifi
21 -%.a9 -39.28 -48.58 -31.43 1651 430
22 -76.09 -39.27 -4uiEl -31.39 1652 400
23 -76.09 -39.28 -48.58 -31.35 1652
24 -%.09 -39.2fl -48.59 -31.32 1652 iit
25 -96.09 -39.27 -48.58 -31.30 1651 323
26 -76.09 -39.27 -40.59 -31.28 1650 300
27 -76.09 -39.27 -48.59 -31.25 1650 aB1
26 -%.03 -39.26 -48.59 -31.24 1651 262
29 -76.09 -39.27 -48.59 -31.21 1652 244
30 -16.09 -39.n -4n.59 -31.19 1653 229
31 -76.08 -39.27 -48.59 -31.18 1652 214
32 -76.09 -39.26 -46.59 -31.17 1651 2m
33 -76.07 -39.27 -488.59 -31.16 1650 WI
34 -76.03 -39.26 -48.59 -31.15 1650 175
35 -76.08 -39.27 -48.59 -31.14 1651 161
36 -4E.59 -31.13 1652 155
37 -48.59 -31 .I2 1651 145
30 -4UlI -31.12 1651 137
39 -48.59 -31 .lO 1651 129
40 4.59 -31.11 1651 121
41 -48.60 -31.09 1651 113
42 -4a.60 -31.09 1650 108
43 -46.60 -31.08 16!xl 101 .
44 -49.60 -31.08 1652 95
45 -48.61 -31.07 1651 91
46 -48.60 -31.07 1651 86
47 -48.61 -31.07 1651 81
49 -48.60 -31.06 ml 78
49 -48.60 -31.06 1652 73
50 -48.61 -31.05 1651 70
51 -48.61 -31.04 1651 67
52 -4ml -31.04 1652 63
53 -48.60 -31.03 1653 60
54 -4t.61 -3l.Ip 1651 57
55 -48.61 -31.01 1652 54
6.5.1-20 WRllTEN 93.02.08

a
0
Electrode updatings for a Total Cal (continued):
56 -48.61 -31.03 1652 53

57 48.60 -31.03 1650 50
58 -48.60 -31.03 1651 48
59 -48.61 -31.04 1652 47
60 -48.60 -31.m 1652 44
61 -4.61 -31.04 1652 43
62 -48.60 -3l.W 1w 42
63 -48.60 -31.04 16!iZ 40
64 -48.59 -31.05 Ml 36
65 -48.60 -31.05 1651 37
66 -4859 -31.05 1650 36
67 -48.60 -31.06 1650 35
68 -48.59 -31.06 1650 34
69 -48.59 -31.07 16M 33
70 -4&59 -31.07 Ml 32
71 31 ,
72 30
73 29
14 29
75 28
16 28
R 28
18 27
79 26
&I 25
81 a
82 25
83 25
84 24
85 23
86 23
87 23
a WRITTEN 93.0208 6.5.1-21

Electrode updatings for a measurement:
? PH do2 PO2
UllI 1 WI uk 1 Ml imlb 1
1 -5e.50 7.145 -43.53 48.8 1467 laJ.7

2 -58.55 7.145 -43.06 49.7 1423 97.5
3 58.57 7.145 -42.61 50.5 137a 94.3
4 58.56 7.145 -42.38 51.1 1339 91.5
5 58.57 7.145 -42.14 51.6 1305 69.1
6 58.53 7.145 -41.91 52.0 1276 87.0
1 -58.56 7.145 -41.R 52.4 1251 85.3
8 58.53 7.145 -41.65 52.6 1229 83.7
9 58.53 7.145 -41.55 52.8 12m a.2
10 sB.54 7.145 -41.46 53.0 llae Ea.9
11 58.53 1.141 -41.38 53.2 1173 79.7
12 -58.51 7.144 -41.32 53.3 1157 18.7
13 58.51 7.114 -41.26 53.5 1143 n.6
14 -58.51 7.1U -41.20 53.6 1131 76.8
15 -!B.!il 7.144 -41.16 53.7 1120 76.1
16 -5e.51 7.114 -41.11 53.8 1109 75.2
17 sB.50 7.144 -41.m 53.8 1100 14.6
18 -58.50 7.141 -41.M 53.9 10% 14.1
19 -58.48 7.144 -41.m 54.0 1084 73.5
20 sB.49 7.114 -41.00 54.0 1076 72.9
21 58.49 7.144 -40.91 54.1 1070 72.5
z sB.40 7.143 -40.95 54.1 1061 71 .v
23 -5a.4e 1.144 -a.93 54.2 1053 71.7
24 -5e.48 7.144 -40.92 54.2 1051 71.2
25 -5e.I 7.143 -a.% 54.2 104l 11 .o l
26 -58.18 7.144 -40.89 54.3 1042 70.6
n -56.49 7.143 du.81 cd.3 1038 70.2
a
28 -5u 7.143 -ulm 54.3 1035 70.0
29 -5a.47 7.143 -a% 54.3 103U 69.7
30 -50.47 7.143 -4oJ6 54.3 1027 69.5
31 a45 7.143 -10.84 54.3 1022 69.2
32 58.46 9.143 -40.81 54.4 1019 68.9
33 58.45 7.143 -40.64 54.4 1018 68.9
34 58.46 7.143 -40.63 54.4 1016 68.7
35 -50.44 7.143 -a@ 54.4 1011 6a.4
36 58.44 7.143 -40.82 54.4 10% 9.3
37 58.44 7.143 -4tl.81 54.4 Ial7 a.1
38 -5&u 7.143 -ul.Bl 54.4 1003 67.9
39 58.43 7.143 -10.81 54.4 loal 67.8
40 58.40 7.142 -ul.E2 54.4 999 67.6
41 a42 7.143 -4lm s.4 999 67.6
42 -58.40 7.142 -40.81 54.4 996 67.4
43 58.41 1.142 -40.7V 54.5 996 61.3
U -5e.39 7.142 -4oo.w 54.4 953 67.1
45 58.39 7.142 -am w.4 992 61.1
46 -5l.39 7.142 -40.80 54.4 990 66.9
47 -58.39 1.142 -4o.m 54.4 989 66.9
48 *.3V 7.142 -40.81 54.4 9m Q.8
49 58.39 1.142 -4a.m 54.4 9% 66.7
6.5.1-22 WRllTEN 93.02.08

0
m SERVICE PROGRAMS (ABLSO)
Electrode updatings for a measurement (continued):
50 -!a.38 7.142 -40.80 w.4 S 66.7

51 -56.37 7.142 -40.80 54.4 986 66.6
52 -!a.37 7.142 -40.80 51.4 9e3 66.5
53 4a.36 7.142 -40.81 54.4 982 65.7
54 -40.81 n.4 902 65.9
55 do.@ 54.4 980 65.7
56 -40.81 54.4 980 65.7
a 4J.81 54.4 9uo 6.7
58 -40.80 54.4 919 65.7
59 -40.81 54.4 918 6.7
60 97a 65.7
61 918 65.7
62 ¶5 65.6
63 976 li5.7
64 R 65.7
65 97s B.7
66 975 65.7
67 ¶4 65.6
66 975 65.7
e WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-23

Service Test Program in Keypad with Display.
To enter the Service Test Program in the Keypad with Display unit press key number 3, 6 and 9
simultaneously and then turn power on. Alternatively, unplug and re-insert one of the plugs on the cable to
the unit while pressing the above-mentioned keys simultaneously.
During the test the Keypad with Display unit is off the Ring Net. This causes the LED CR805 on the Main
Computer PCB to light. At the same time the Ring Net connection is looped back in the Main Computer PCB
to be able to test the connection.
The test consists of four sequences. To step to the next sequence press any of two keys simultaneously.
When all sequences are passed, the unit performs a normal start-up procedure as described in chapter 6.3
Keypad with Display Self-test Program.
EPROM test.
When the service test program is entered the CPU performs a checksum check of the EPROM. During this
test the display will show the picture seen in figure 1. If an error is detected the CPU will stop allactivity.
KEYPAD - UNIT
VERSION: V.VV
EPROM-TEST: XXXX SS RR
Figure 1.
Where: V.VV is the Keypad with Display Software version.

XXM is:
t*** - test in progress.
OK - test passed successfully.
ERR. - test failed:
SS is the sum written in the EPROM
RR is the calculated sum.
RAM test.
When the EPROM test is passed without error, the CPU performs a RAM test. This test is a write/read test
in which the following is carried out for all cells in succession: two patterns are written into and read from
the cell in question, first 01010101 (55) and then 10101010 (AA) to check for stuck at faults.
During this test the display will show the picture seen in figure 2. If an error is detected the CPU will stop
all activity.
6.5.1-24 WRITTEN 93.02.08

0
KEYPAD - UNIT
VERSION: V.VV
EPROM-TEST: OK
RAM-TEST: XXXX aaaa
Figure 2.
Where: V.VV is the Keypad with Display Software version.

XXXX is:
0 ***t - test in progress.
OK - test passed successfully.
ERR. - test failed:
aaaa indicates the cell block being tested.
When both the EPROM and RAM tests are passed without error, the display will look like figure 3.
~KEYPAD - UNIT
VERSION: V.VV
EPROM-TEST: OK
RAM-TEST: OK FCOO
PRESS TWO KEYS TO CONTlNUt
Figure 3.
To continue the service test program press any of two keys simultaneously.
Display test.
When entering this test the display shows alternately black and white vertical lines, see figure 4. Each time
one key is pressed, the display is inverted (black lines get white and reverse). To continue the Display test
press any of two keys simultaneously. Now horizontal lines are displayed, as shown in figure 5. Again, each
time one key is pressed the display is inverted.
WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-25

Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Keypad test.
In this Keypad test the display has a text for each key, as shown in figure 6. Pressing a key inverts the
corresponding text in the display.
KEY-TEST
SOFT1 SOFT2
7 8 9 FEED
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . BACK ENTER
PRESS TWO KEYS TO CONTINUE
Figure 6.
6.5.1-26 WRITTEN 93.02.08

0 .
Ring Net test.

During the Service Test Program the Keypad with Display unit is off the Ring Net. This causes an electronic
switch on the Main Computer PCB to loop back the signals transmitted from the Keypad with Display unit.
The test is carried out by sending blocks of 256 characters. The received blocks are then compared with
the transmitted blocks. Each time a block is received correctly an OK counter is incremented one step.
An erroneously block increases an ERR: counter by one. The state of the counters is shown in the display,
Figure 7.
KEYPAD - UNIT
VERSION: V.VV
COM-TEST: OK nnnn
ERR. nnnn
PRESS TWO KEYS TO CONTlNUt
Figure 7.
Where nnnn are the counters value.
To continue press any of two keys simultaneously. This causes the unit to perform a normal start-up
procedure, as described in chapter 6.3 Keypad with Display Self-test Program.
m WRITTEN 93.02.08 6.5.1-27

ELECTRONICS
CRT Compartment
CRT-Deflection PCB
Video Amplifier PCB
Printer Control PCB
Therm0 Printer
Softkey Pad
Flomw Disk Control PCB ‘)
Floip) Disk Drive
Numerical Keyboard
Numerical Keyboard PCB /
Numerical Keypad
Computer Unit
Main Computer PCB
Main Memory PCB *)
Wet section
Wet section Control PCB
Wet section Distribution PCB
pH Preamplifier PCB Base unit
~02 Preamplifier PCB Gas Mixer Interface PCB
pCO2 Preamplifier PCB Power Supply PCB
Monochromator Interface PCB ) Software Gate
Waste Detector PCB *) Up to three (four *) ) optional
PCBs
) ABL51 O/520 only

*) ABL500/510/520 below Run 50/8/a only
Figure 7.4. Physical location of PCBs

(ABL500/505/51 O/520).
7-4 REVISED 92.11 .Ol

ELECTRONICS
0
Keypad with Display

Keypad with Display PCB
Keyboard
LCD module
Wet section
Wet section Con
Base unit
Gas Mixer Interface PCB
pH Preamplifier PCB
Power Supply PCB
~0, Preamplifier PCB
Main Computer PCB
pC0, Preamplifier PCB
One optional PCB
Figure 7.5. Physical location of PCBs

(ABL50).
WRllTEN 92.11 .Ol 7-5

MAIN COMPUTER
Memory Map
The total address domain for the 8OC186 Main processor is 1 Mbyte. However, since the memory
needed in the ABL is larger, up to 3 Mbyte, bank switching is included for the EPROM and the
EzPROM situated on the Main Memory PCB, and the NVRAM (Non Volatile RAM) situated on the
Main Computer PCB itself. The memory map is outlined as shown below:
Main Memory EPROM 16,QD9,128 kbytes EOOOO,, through FFFFF,
Matn Memory EPROM 15, QD8.128 kbytes COOOO,, through DFFFF,
16 bankseach of 128 kbytes (EPROM, EZPROM, NVRAM) AOOOO,, through BFFFF,
VSDDs (and video DRAM), 128 kbytes 80000H through 9FFFF,
512 kbytesof DRAM (temporary storage) OOOOOH through 7FFFF,
Figure 7.1.1.3, Memory map, overview.
Ban& switching The bank switching is obtained by the four bank select signals, BSO through BS3,
which are provided via the output port on the DUART. The banks are shown below.
- Bank 0 is special since word access is not possible (only byte access). Selection of which EZPROM is
selected when is determined by strap connectors mounted on the PCBs at the factory.
Main Memory PC6
Bank
0000 AOOOOn-AFFFF, even addr.: NVRAM
odd addr.: E2PROM QD19
80000,-BFFFF, e v e n addr.: EZPROM QD20
odd addr.: EZPROM QD21
0001 EPROM 0 (QDl)
0010 EPROM 1 (QD.3
0011 EPROM 2 (QW
0100 EPROM 3 (QW
0101 EPROM 4 (Qbs)
0110 EPROM 5 (Qbs)
0111 EPROM 6 (Qo7)
Figure 7.1.1.4, 16 banks.
Revised 91.04.11 7.1.1-3

MAIN COMPUTER
0
nal of the main processor). The DT/R (data transmit/receive) signal is used for selecting the direction
through the transceivers. DEN (data enable) and ERAM (enable RAM), both active low, are used for
latching the data through the transceivers to the DRAM data bus. The DRAM Controller decodes di-
rectly the status signals SO, 51 and S2 from the main processor; the decoding is used for controlling
the WE (write enable) signal.
DRAM interface
The address lines connected to the DRAM Controller itself (AXl-AX18) are internally converted into
row and column addresses, each consisting of nine bits. In this way, each DRAM is organized as a ma-
trix consisting of 512 rows and 512 columns. The DRAM Controller provides a time multiplexed ad-
dress output for the DRAM S; the CASx and RASx signals indicate to the DRAMS that Column or Row
address, respectively, is now available. Each bank has its own set of CASx and RASx signals.
The combined write enable and bank select signals (WE-BANK-LOW and -HIGH) for the DRAMS
shown in Figure 7.1.1.8. AX0 (active low) are used for selecting the lower byte, and BHeX (active low)
is used for selecting the high byte. The AACK signal is used for synchronizing the bank select (and
therewith the write enable) to the DRAM refresh cycle. The synchronized bank select is gated
together with the actual write signal WE, providing combined bank select and write signals for the
DRAMS. The AACK signal is also used for deciding which bank (or both banks) is to be accessed at a
given time (high or low byte, or word access).
DRAM refresh
The storage elements of each DRAM cell is a capacitor which eventually discharges due to leak cur-
rents. The DRAMS are continuously refreshed to prevent the stored data from becoming lost. During
a refresh cycle, the charge of each capacitor is read, amplified and stored on the capacitor; this all
happens within the DRAM chip itself. The refresh cycle consists of 512 subcycles in which one row is
refreshed. The row address output of the DRAM Controller is incremented continuously, and when
the RASx signal is low, the addressed row is refreshed. The entire DRAM domain is refreshed every 7
ms. The DRAM Controller sets up the SRDY signal for the main CPU and can thereby hold the CPU in
case it tries to access the DRAM during a refresh cycle.
Parity check
The parity check circuit consists of a parity generator and some gates. The purpose of the circuit,
which is shown in Figure 7.1.1.8 overleaf, is to check if the data, stored in the DRAM, do not change
during storage. When data are written into the DRAM, a parity bit (even ) is calculated and stored in a
separate DRAM. When the same data later on is read again, the parity bit is re-calculated and com-
pared with the one calculated previously. If the two parity bits differ, the Parity Error signal goes high
causing a NMI signal to the main CPU.
Revised 91.04.11 7.1.1-7

a MAIN COMPUTER
Request Destination Length
Figure 7.1.1.14. Data format for the Internal Ring Network.
First three control words are transferred, a Request indicating to the other PCBs that the Main
Computer wishes to use the Ring Network, then a Destination indicating to which PCB it wishes to
transfer data (destination address), and finally a Length indicating the length of the message
(number of bytes to be transferred) to the destination PCB. Then the data are transferred byte by
byte, and then finally the control word Stop is sent to indicate that the transmission has been com-
pleted and that the Ring Network is available for the other PCBs.
If two PCBs output a Request at the same time, the one with the highest priority will be granted
permission to use the Ring Network.
The destination PCB will acknowledge the Destination and Length words to tell the source that
the words have been received and that the destination is ready to receive data. The destination PCB
will echo all received data bytes together with an acknowledgement to tell the source that the data
have been received and to enable the source to check for transmission errors.
PCBs which do not communicate on the Ring Network at a given time, function as repeaters for the
PCBs which do.
110 ports
The eight bit wide output port provides the following signals:
- BSO through BS3 providing a four bit bank select for the various types of memories, please see the
paragraph concerning memory map. The bank select signals are applied to the decoders which
generate the actual chip select signals.
- Two outputs for controlling the LEDs, CR 501 and CR502. The LEDs are used for indicating RAM
and PROM write errors in the I/O processor circuit.
The seven bit wide input port is used for the following purposes:
- One bit is connected directly to the Attention button (ATTN).
- Five bits are connected to the test points TPl/l through TP1/5 which are used for test purposes at
the factory.
Revised 91.04.11 7.1.1-13

MAIN COMPUTER
Programmable Peripheral Interface (I/O ports)

A programmable peripheral interface chip including three times eight input/output lines provides the
following signals:
outputs:
FDCRESET Reset for the Floppy Disk Control PCB.
VSDDRESET Reset for the VSDDs on the Main Computer PCB.
PDISI through PDISG Used for generating a error in the DRAM memory, active low;
PDISl and -2 for the temporary storage DRAM,
PDIS3 and -4 for the VSDD DRAM.
RSNMI Reset for Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI) circuit.
ACKNMI Acknowledge for Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI) circuit.
RSATTN Reset for the Attention circuit.
-
FDCO Floppy Disk motor on/off (0 / * 1); connected to Floppy Disk Control PCB.
FDCl Floppy Disk format; 0 = 720 kbyte, rr 1 x = 1.44 Mbyte; connected to
Floppy Disk Control PCB (always u 1 fl = 1.44 Mbyte).
PC0 and PC1 Used for generating the GPSEL signal.
Inputs:
P.ERRX Parity error in temporary storage DRAM has been detected.
GPERRX Parity error in VSDD DRAM has been detected.
PRERRX PROM write error has been detected (not E*PROM).
PWFX Power failure has been detected.
ATTNX Attention button has been activated.
RXRDY Receive status of the I/O processor, 1 m indicates that the I/O processor is
ready to receive new data.
TXRDY Transmit status of the I/O processor, * 1 II indicates that the I/O processor has
data for transmission to the main processor.
7.1.1-14 Revised 9 1.04.11

I/O processor 8OC32
The I/O processor circuit is built-up around an 8OC32 CPU. This circuit carries out a number of relative
time-consuming functions (processor-time) in connection with the MMI (Man Machine Interface). In a
standard ABL, the I/O processor monitors the softkeys and the numerical keyboard and controls the
beeper. In addition, it may monitor a bar code reader and an alphanumerical keyboard; all options.
The I/O processor circuit is shown in Figure 7.1.1.17.
Processor/Memory
The Processor/Memory circuit is built-up in an conventional way with a latch separating the time
multiplexed data and low order address bus and an address decoder generating the various chip se-
lect and latch enable signals.
The memory consists of a 32 kbyte PROM (software) and a 8 kbyte RAM (for temporary storage of
data-data buffer for external communication)
Communication with the Main Processor

The communication between the main processor and the I/O processor is carried out in a parallel
manner byte by byte via two latches, one for each direction. The two latches separate the local data
bus of the I/O processor from that of the main processor. The various data transfer control (hand-
shake) signals are shown in Figure 7.1.1.17 (l/O processor); their function is described below.
Main processor to 110 processor: First, the main processor checks the status of the T X-RDY signal via
a port. If TX-RDY is high, it indicates that the I/O processor has read the previously sent data (if any)
and is ready to receive new data.
Then the main processor latches the new data into the input latch (using the PSC2 and WR signals,
both active low). This causes the MRx-RDY signal to go high (applied to P1.7 of the I/O processor). At
the same time T X-RDY goes low, causing an INTl interrupt (active low) to the I/O processor.
The INTl causes the I/O processor to fetch the data in the latch (using the RD-M.CPU signal, active
low). This, in turn, resets the T X-RDY signal (goes high) causing an INTl interrupt to the main proces-
sor indicating that transfer of another data byte is now possible.
When the I/O processor has read the last data byte from the output buffer of the main processor cir-
cuit, the main processor clocks a 0 into a D-flipflop (using PCS3 and WR, both active low) - this pre-
vents the main processor from being interrupted when communication is not carried out. See Figure
7.1.1.15 overleaf.
110 processor to main processor: First, the I/O processor checks the status of the MTx-RDY signal via
Pl .O. If MTx-RDY is high, it indicates that the main processor has read the previously sent data (if any)
Then, the I/O processor latches the data into the output latch (using the WR-M.CPU signal, active
low). This causes the Rx-RDY to go high and an INTI interrupt (active high) to the main processor. At
the same time MTx-RDY goes low.
Then, the main processor fetches the data (using the PSC2 and RD signals, both active low). This, in
turn, resets the MTx-RDY signal (goes high) causing an INTl interrupt to the I/O processor, indicating
that transfer of another data byte is now possible.
Revised 91.04.11 7.1.1-15

MAIN COMPUTER
0
Housing: Shield
Beeper
P1.5 of the I/O processor is used for controlling the beeper, which is used for several purposes, e.g. to
indicate a correct reception of bar code and to indicate error conditions.
QUALICHECKTM is a trademark of Radiometer A/T, Denmark and IS registered in the USA and in some other countries.
7.1.1-18 Revised 91.04.1 1

MAIN COMPUTER
Memory Map
The total address domain for the 8OC186 Main processor is 1 Mbyte. However, since the memory
needed in the ABL is larger, up to 1.5 Mbyte, bank switching is included for the FEPROM and the
EZPROM, and the NVRAM (Non Volatile RAM). The memory map is outlined as shown below:
256 kbytes of FEPROM QD201 and QD2 11 COOOO,, through FFFFF,
10 banks each of 128 kbytes (FEPROM, EZPROM, NVRAM) AOOOO, through BFFFF,
128 kbytes of VSDD DRAM (video) 80000, through 9FFFF,
512 kbytes of DRAM (temporary storage) OOOOOH through 7FFFFn
Bank switching The bank switching is obtained by the four bank select signals, BSO through 853,
which are provided via the output port on the DUART. The banks are shown below.
- Bank 0 is special since word access is not possible (only byte access)
Bank
0000 AOOOO,-AFFFF, even addr.: NVRAM
80000,-BFFFF, odd addr.: E*PROM QD2 1
0001 FEPROM (QD202 + QD2 12)
0010 FEPROM (QD202 + QD212)
0011 FEPROM (QD203 + QD213)
0100 FEPROM (QD203 + QD213)
0101 FEPROM (QD204 + QD2 14)
0110 FEPROM (QD204 + QD214)
0111 FEPROM (QD205 + QD215)
1000 FEPROM (QD205 + QD215)
1001 empty
1010 empty
1011 empty
1100 empty
1101 empty
1110 FEPROM (QD201 +QDZll) l )
1111 FEPROM (QD201 +QDZll) l )
l) These two FEPROMs are replaced by the Boot PCB in the memory domain when connected during upgradmg of the
software.
Figure 7.1.2.4, 16 banks.
Revised 91.04.11 7.1.2-3

MAIN COMPUTER
rectly the status signals SO, Sl and 52 from the main processor; the decoding is used for controlling
the WE (write enable) signal.
DRAM interface
The address lines connected to the DRAM Controller itself (AXI-AX18) are internally converted into
row and column addresses, each consisting of nine bits. In this way, each DRAM is organized as a ma-
trix consisting of 512 rows and 512 columns. The DRAM Controller provides a time multiplexed ad-
dress output for the DRAMS; the CASx and RASx signals indicate to the DRAM S that Column or Row
address, respectively, is now available. Each bank has its own set of CASx and RASx signals.
The combined write enable and bank select signals (WE-BANK-LOW and -HIGH) for the DRAMS
shown in Figure 7.1.2.10. AX0 (active low) are used for selecting the lower byte, and BHEX (active
low) is used for selecting the high byte. The AACK signal is used for synchronizing the bank select
(and therewith the write enable) to the DRAM refresh cycle. The synchronized bank select is gated
-
together with the actual write signal WE, providing combined bank select and write signals for the
DRAMS. The AACK signal is also used for deciding which bank (or both banks) is to be accessed at a
given time (high or low byte, or word access).
DRAM refresh
The storage elements of each DRAM cell is a capacitor which eventually discharges due to leak cur-
rents. The DRAMS are continuously refreshed to prevent the stored data from becoming lost. During
a refresh cycle, the charge of each capacitor is read, amplified and stored on the capacitor; this all
happens within the DRAM chip itself. The refresh cycle consists of 512 subcycles in which one row is
refreshed. The row address output of the DRAM Controller is incremented continuously, and when
the RASx signal is low, the addressed row is refreshed. The entire DRAM domain is refreshed every 7
ms. The DRAM Controller sets up the SRDY signal for the main CPU and can thereby hold the CPU in
case it tries to access the DRAM during a refresh cycle.
Parity check
-
The parity check circuit consists of a parity generator and some gates. The purpose of the circuit,
which is shown in Figure 7.1.2.10 overleaf, is to check if the data, stored in the DRAM, do not change
during storage. When data are written into the DRAM, a parity bit (even ) is calculated and stored in a
separate DRAM. When the same data later on is read again, the parity bit is re-calculated and com-
pared with the one calculated previously. If the two parity bits differ, the Parity Error signal goes
high.
7.1.2-8 Revised 9 1.04.11

MAIN COMPUTER
The pin designation for the external CRT Monitor is as follows:

Pin designation: Pin 1: Ground
Pin 2: GREEN
Pin 3: RED
Pin 4: WSYNC
Pin 5: HSYNC
Pin 6: Composite.Video
Housing: Shield
When connecting both an alphanumerical keyboard and an external CRT monitor, it is possible to set-
up a remote working place, for example in connection with editing one of the data bases (patient in-
formation, etc.).
Real Time Clock

The Main Computer PCB includes an MM58274 rea! time clock which provides both time and date. -
The input clock for the real time clock is a 32.768 kHz crystal which is internally divided to 10 Hz. The
user may enter the following information (setup):
Year Month Date Hour Minute

00-99 01-12 01-31 00-23 00-59
The real time clock puts 19 or 20 in front of the year and is capable to keep track of leap years.
The real time clock includes battery backup, see the description below.
NVRAM (non volatile)

The 32 kbytes NVRAM is used for storing the status of the ABL in case the ABL is switched off or in
case of a power fai I ure.
The NVRAM includes, of course, battery backup, please see the description below.
Battery backup
The Real Time Clock and the NVRAM include battery backup to prevent the data in the NVRAM to be
erased in case the ABL is switched off or in case of a power failure. The circuit consists of a programm-
able voltage detector, a 3.0 V battery, and a number of transistors.
The voltage detector prevents the processor from accessing the real time clock and the NVRAM, in
case the + 5 V supply decreases to below + 4.6 V. This is done by disabling the RD, WR, and chip select
signals (via transistors).
The supply voltage switches from the + 5 V supply to the battery when the + 5 V has decreased to
below 2.4 V (the battery voltage).
7.1.2-12 Revised 9 1.04.11

MAIN COMPUTER
Request Destination Length
Figure 7.1.2.16. Data format for the Internal Ring Network.
First three control words are transferred, a Request indicating to the other PCBs that the Main
Computer wishes to use the Ring Network, then a Destination indicating to which PCB it wishes to
transfer data (destination address), and finally a Length indicating the length of the message
(number of bytes to be transferred) to the destination PCB. Then the data are transferred byte .~y
byte, and then finally the control word Stop is sent to indicate that the transmission has been com-
pleted and that the Ring Network is available for the other PCBs.
If two PCBs output a Request at the same time, the one with the highest priority will be granted
permission to use the Ring Network.
The destination PCB will acknowledge the Destination and Length words to tell the source that
the words have been received and that the destination is ready to receive data. The destination PCB
will echo all received data bytes together with an acknowledgement to tell the source that the data
have been received and to enable the source to check for transmission errors.
PCBs which do not communicate on the Ring Network at a given time, function as repeaters for the
PCBs which do.
110 ports
The eight bit wide output port provides the following signals:
- BSO through BS3 providing a four bit bank select for the various types of memories, please see the
paragraph concerning memory map. The bank select signals are applied to the decoders which
generate the actual chip select signals.
- NMI-EN is used for enabling the output of the NMI circuit.
- FLASH-PROG is used for enabling the 12 V supply for programming the FEPROMs.
The seven bit wide input port is used for the following purposes:
- One bit is connected directly to the Attention button (ATTN).
- Three bits are connected to the test points TPl/l through TP1/3 which are used for test purposes
at the factory.
- 12V-FL-ERR (LO-HI) indicates if the 12 V supply is OK.
_ 12V-FL-ON indicates if the SW switch on the rear of the Main Computer PCB is in the correct posi-
tion (for programming or for normal operation).
- FDC-INST detects if a floppy disk drive is installed.
7.1.2-14 Revised 9 1.04-l 1

a MAIN COMPUTER
Programmable Peripheral Interface (I/O ports)

A programmable peripheral interface chip including three times eight input/output lines provides the
following signals:
outputs:
VSDDRESET Reset for the VSDDs on the Main Computer PCB.
PDISl and PDlS2 Used for generating a error in the temporary storage DRAM memory dur-
ing factory test, the signals are active low;
RSNMI Reset for Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI) circuit.
RSATTN Reset for the Attention circuit.
GPSEL VSDD chip select signal.
PR-ERR-DIS Used for disabling the PROM Write Error during FEPROM programming.
Inputs:
P.ERRX Parity error in temporary storage DRAM has been detected.
PRERRX PROM write error has been detected (not EZPROM).
PWFX Power failure has been detected.
ATTNX Attention button has been activated.
RXRDY Receive status of the I/O processor, “1” indicates that the I/O processor is
ready to receive new data.
TXRDY Transmit status of the I/O processor, ” 1 I indicates that the I/O processor has
data for transmission to the main processor.
Revised 9 1.04.11 7.1.2-15

MAIN COMPUTER
l/O processor 8OC32

The I/O processor circuit is built-up around an 8OC32 CPU. This circuit carries out a number of relative
time-consuming functions (processor-time) in connection with the MMI (Man Machine Interface). In a
standard ABL, the I/O processor monitors the softkeys and the numerical keyboard and controls the
beeper. In addition, it may monitor a bar code reader and an alphanumerical keyboard; all options.
The I/O processor circuit is shown in Figure 7.1.2.19.
Processor/Memory
The Processor/Memory circuit is built-up in an conventional way with a latch separating the time
multiplexed data and low order address bus and an address decoder generating the various chip se-
lect and latch enable signals.
The memory consists of a 32 kbyte PROM (software) and a 8 kbyte RAM (for temporary storage of
data - data buffer for external communication)
Communication with the Main Processor

The communication between the main processor and the I/O processor is carried out in a parallel
manner byte by byte via two latches, one for each direction. The two latches separate the local data
bus of the I/O processor from that of the main processor. The various data transfer control (hand-
shake) signals are shown in Figure 7.1.2.19 (I/O processor); their function is described below.
Main processor to 110 processor: First, the main processor checks the status of the T X-RDY signal via
a port. If T X-RDY is high, it indicates that the I/O processor has read the previously sent data (if any)
Then the main processor latches the new data into the input latch (using the PSC2 and WR signals,
both active low). This causes the MRx-RDY signal to go high (applied to P1.7 of the I/O processor). At
the same time T X-RDY goes low, causing an INTl interrupt (active low) to the I/O processor.
The INTl causes the I/O processor to fetch the data in the latch (using the RD-M.CPU signal, active
low). This, in turn, resets the T X-RDY signal (goes high) causing an INTl interrupt to the main proces-
sor indicating that transfer of another data byte is now possible.
When the I/O processor has read the last data byte from the output buffer of the main processor cir-
cuit, the main processor clocks a 0 into a D-flipflop (using PCS3 and WR, both active low) - this pre-
vents the main processor from being interrupted when communication is not carried out. See Figure
7.1.2.17 overleaf.
110 processor to main processor: First, the I/O processor checks the status of the MTx-RDY signal via
Pl .O. If MTx-RDY is high, it indicates that the main processor has read the previously sent data (if any)
Then, the I/O processor latches the data into the output latch (using the WR-M.CPU signal, active
low). This causes the Rx-RDY to go high and an INTl interrupt (active high) to the main processor. At
the same time MTx-RDY goes low.
Then, the main processor fetches the data (using the PSC2 and RD signals, both active low). This, in
turn, resets the MTx-RDY signal (goes high) causing an INTl interrupt to the l/O processor, indicating
that transfer of another data byte is now possible.
7.1.2-16 Revised 91.04.11

When the ABL is ready to receive data, it sets both data and clock high (clear to send indication to the
keyboard). If the output buffer of the keyboard is not empty, it will start to clock the data out on the
data line at a rate of 15 kHz. At the same time, the keyboard provides the clock signal to time the
data reception at the Main Computer end.
bit 11 brt 1
sv ._r___T___T___T___T___T___T--:___T---I_
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I
nv
_
:
I
I I
___I___I___ ___L_--J.-__1__-L___ : ___J
I
I II 1 I
I 8 data bits (ASCII) I
Stop bit Start bit
Parity bit (odd)
Figure 7.1.2.18. Data format for alphanumerical keyboard.
If the Main Computer has commands to the keyboard, it first checks if the keyboard is transmitting
data. If not, it will set the clock line low (request to send) for 60 ms. Then, it outputs the start bit and
frees the clock line, enabling the keyboard to time the data flow from the Main Computer to the key-
board. Since the Main Computer is the master, it may overrule the transmission from the keyboard by
forcing the clock line low (this will cause the keyboard to stop transmission).
Pin designation: Pin 1: Clock out / in
Pin 2: Data in/out
Pin 3: NC
Pin 4: Ground
Pin 5: +5V
Housing: Shield
When connecting both an alphanumerical keyboard and an external CRT monitor, it is possible to set-
up a remote working place, for example in connection with editing one of the data bases (patient in-
formation, etc.)
Bar Code Reader Interface

This interface is compatible with an HP HBCR-8300 bar code reader (uses a 655 nm light source and
detector). The bar code reader enables input of patient number and QualicheckrM codes. It is able to
a number of different types of bar codes, see Users Handbook. The decoded output data of the bar
code reader is in ASCII format. The Main Computer may send configuration commands to the bar
code reader (baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, and inter character delay) - the configuration
used in the ABL is: 9600 baud, odd parity, 1 stop bit and 20 ms for inter character delay.
Pin designation: P i n s 1,4,5,6,8: N C
Pin 2: RxD (data from the bar code reader, TTL levels)
Pin 3: TxD (data to the bar code reader, RS-232-C compatible)
Pin 7: Ground
Pin 9: +5V
7.1.2-18 Revised 91.04.11

a MAIN COMPUTER
Housing: Shield
Beeper
P1.5 of the I/O processor is used for controlling the beeper, which is used for several purposes, e.g. to
indicate a correct reception of bar code and to indicate error conditions.
QUALICHECKTM is a trademark of Radiometer AK, Denmark and is registered in the USA and In some other countries.
Revised 91.04.11 7.1.2-19

MAIN COMPUTER
0
Memory map
The total address domain for the 8OC188EB Main processor is 1 Mbyte. The Main Computer PCB
includes 512 Kb FPROM, 128 Kb SRAM (Static RAM) and a Memory Card connector with up to 512 Kb
addressable memory area. To be able to boot the Main Computer when there is no functional program
in the FPROM, a Memory Card Boot Switch is mounted. If the Memory Card Boot Switch is pressed
during power up, an alternative memory map is selected. The two memory maps are outlined as shown
below:
FFFFFh
QD651
FPROM-0
256Kb
COOOOh Memory Card
512Kb
QD652
FPROM-1
256Kb
80000h
QD651
60000h FPROM-0
256Kb
Memory Card
256Kb 40000h
QD652
20000h FPROM-1
Static RAM 256Kb
128Kb
OOOOOh
Normal Boot Memory Card
Boot
(SW update)
WRITTEN 92.11 .Ol 7.1.3 - 3

MAIN COMPUTER
a
Interrupts
The Main Processor 8OC188EB may receive interrupts from a number of external and internal sources,
as shown below.
NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt)

INT-0 Connected to the Real Time Clock
INT-1 Connected to the Main Processors internal USARTs serial port (COM2)
INT-2 Connected to the external USARTs parallel port
INT-3 Connected to the external USARTs serial port 2 (Ring net)
INT-4 Connected to the external USARTs serial port 1 (COMI)
Timer-2 Operative system timer-tick
Battery Backup
The Main Computer PCB includes a 3V Lithium cell to keep the information in the RAM and the clock
running when the ABL is switched off or in case of power failure. A special switching circuit separates
the ground of the Real Time Clock and the RAM from the digital ground when the mains power is off.
This is done to extend the battery life by avoid current to leak backwards through the control pins to the
unpowered circuit. When measuring the battery voltage be sure to use the negative pole on the battery
and not a normal ground pin.
Programming
The FPROMs are programmed via a special program located on the Memory Card. Before applying the
programming voltage to the FPROMs, a window comparator checks that the voltage is within the limit
11.4V to 12.6V. If the voltage is outside the limits, the beeper beeps and an error code is displayed on
the four LEDs located under the Memory Card plug. For further information please refer to chapter
2.17: Software Upgrade.
Interface
The Main Computer PCB contains a USART with one parallel interface and one serial interface.
The parallel interface is connected to a 25 pin female plug for use with a printer using standard
Centronic interface as the PRS15. The serial interface is intended for connecting a ticket printer and
NOTa computer, due to missing galvanically isolation and missing protocol support.
To be able to connect a computer to the ABL50, a FM50 MUST be used.
WRITTEN 92.11 .Ol 7.1.3 - 5

MAIN COMPUTER
a
55 Parallel pot-t (no. 3)
Pin designation: Pin no. Name Direction
Pin 1: /STROBE out

Pin 2: DATA 0 out
Pin 3: DATA 1 out
Pin 4: DATA 2 out
Pin 5: DATA 3 out
Pin 6: DATA 4 out
Pin 7: DATA 5 out
Pin 8: DATA 6 out
Pin 9: DATA 7 out
Pin 10: /ACKNLG In
Pin 11: BUSY In
Pin 12: PE In
Pin 13: SLCT In
Pin 14: /AUTO LF out
Pin 15: ERROR In
Pin 16: /INIT out
Pin 17: /SLCT IN out
Pin 18-25: GND ___
54 Serial port (no. 1)
Pin designation: Pin no. Name Direction
Pin 1: DCD In
Pin 2: RXD In
Pin 3: TXD out
Pin 4: DTR out
Pin 5: GND ___
Pin 6: DSR In
Pin 7: RTS out
Pin 8: CTS In
Pin 9: RI In
J3 Serial port (no. 2) Service Connector. Only for factory use.
0
7.1.3 - 6 WRITTEN 92.11 .Ol
MAIN COMPUTER
a
Jl Internal connector to Power Supply
Pin designation: Pin no. Name Direction Description
Pin 1: +5V_IN In 5V Power

Pin 2: +5V_SENSE out 5V sense return to Power Supply
Pin 3: +5V_OUT out 5V return to opto-coupler in M.S.
Pin 4: OV_IN I n OV Power
Pin 5: OV_SENSE out OV sense return to Power Supply
Pin 6. OV_OUT out OV return to opto-coupler in M.S.
Pin 71 +12V_IN In 12V Power
Pin a: 12V_GND In 12V Ground
Pin 9: 33V_ACl In 33V AC Power
Pin IO: 33V_AC2 In 33V AC Power
Pin 11: TxD_WS out Transmit data to Wet Section
Pin 12: RxD_WS In Receive data from Wet Section
Pin 13: POWER_RES In Power on reset to Main Computer
Pin 14: POWER-VALID In Power valid from Power Supply
52 Keypad unit connector
Pin designation: Pin no. Name Direction Description
Pin 1: RxD In Receive data from Keypad unit

Pin 2: GND ___ Ground
Pin 3: TxD out Transmit data to Keypad unit
Pin 4: +5v out 5V Power
Pin 5: RING-ON In Ring Net connected
Pin 6: -Vdisp out -33V DC for LCD display
WRITTEN 92.11 .Oi 7.1.3 - 7

MAIN MEMORY
e
Memory Map
EpROM , 6, QDg, ,** kbytes

EOOOO,, through FFFFF,
EPROM 15, QD8,128 kbytes COOOO, through DFFFF,
EPROM, EZPROM 8 banks each of 128 kbytes AOOOO, through BFFFF,
Bank
0000 AOOO+,-AFFFF, odd addr.: EZPROM QD19
BOOOOH-BFFFF, even addr.: EZPROM QD20
odd addr.: EzPROM QD2 1
0001 EPROM 0 (QD1)
0010 EPROM 1 (QD2)
0011 EPROM 2 (QD3)
0100 EPROM 3 (QD4)
0101 EPROM 4 (QW
0110 EPROM 5 (QW
0111 EPROM 6 (407)
Figure 7.2.2, Memory map.
Revised 91.04.11
RSl50, SERIAL OUTPUT
0
Each UART includes the two data lines TxD and RxD. One output and two input lines are used for the
hardware handshake signals RTS, CTS, and DSR. The signals from/to the UART are passed through
buffers and optocouplers. The RS-232 driver, which converts output signals from TTL levels to + 12 V
(RS-232-C levels) and input signals from RS-232-C levels to TTL levels. The output connector is a nine
pin D-connector -the pin configuration is shown below.
Communication speed (50 through 19200 baud), protocol, frame format, etc. may be set-up, please
refer to the setup programs described in the Users Handbook.
Each time one of the UARTs receives a data byte, an INTl to the CPU is generated -this causes the CPU
to read the data.
Each UART includes two status signals, RxRDY and TxRDY. RxRDY indicates that the UART has
received a data byte from an external device, and TxRDY indicates that the UART is ready to receive
another data byte from the CPU for transmission to an external device. These status signals are
connected to port 1 of the CPU.
Pin Designation Description
1 NC Not connected
2 RxD Data received by the Serial Output PCB
3 TxD Data transmitted from the Serial Output PCB
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready (ON when the ABL is turned on)
5 GND Signal ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready (ON when the external equipment is on)
Request To Send (ON when the output buffer of the Serial
7 RTS
Output PCB is not empty)
Clear To Send (ON when the external equipment is ready
8 CTS
to receive data)
9 NC Not connected
Revised 91.04.22 7.4-5

RSl50, SERIAL OUTPUT
Voltage Supplies
The Serial Output PCB receives a 7 VAC from the Power Supply. This AC voltage is full-wave rectified
at the input of the RS-232-C Output PCB providing an unregulated 7 VDC. The voltage supplies
needed for the various circuits are all generated locally on basis of the full-wave rectified voltage. All
voltages are fixed and cannot be adjusted. The voltages are:
+SV, This voltage is regulated to + 5 V, using an LM2925 regulator. The + 5 V regulator
generates a reset signal for the CPU directly (see description below).
The voltage is used for supplying the digital ICs which are not connected to the ABL and
the external equipment.
The following supplies are derived using a DC/DC converter built-up around a tranformer. The
individual supplies are stabilized using zener diodes.
-+ 12 v For RS-232-C driver.
+5V For RS-232-C driver and optocouplers.
Reset The + 5 V regulator provides a reset signal for the CPU. The reset is removed (goes from
low to high) approximately 80 ms after the + 5 V supply has reached its nominal value.
The reset from the + 5 V regulator is gated together with the reset from the CPU
watchdog before it is applied to the reset terminal of the CPU and the DUART. The CPU
can then determine the source of a reset by checking the status of the WI-STATUS
signal.
Compatibility of new and earlier RS150s

The new type PCB is fully compatible with the earlier type whereas only one of the earlier type PCB
can be connected in new instruments (because of missing relay). In case both an RSISO and an RSllOO
is to be connected in a new ABL and one of the PCBs is of the new type and the other is of the earlier
type they must be connected as follows: The new type PCB must be connected as Option 1 and the
earlier type as Option 2 (refer to figure 7.9.2).
7.4-6 Revised 9 1.04.22

PRINTER and PRINTER CONTROL
Computer/Memory
The PCB is built-up around an 8OC535 CPU. The computer/memory part is built-up in a conventional
way with a latch separating the time multiplexed data and low order address bus and a decoder for
generating the various chip select signals.
The memory consists of a 64 kbytes EPROM (software and character table) and a 32 kbytes RAM (stor-
age of the data to be printed out).
The clock circuit consists of a 7.3728 MHz crystal which supplies the frequency used for the CPU and
the presettable counter.
Internal Ring Network

See Section 7.1 for details concerning the Internal Ring Network. The data signals (TxD and RxD) are
transferred through opto-couplers to obtain galvanical isolation.
After a successful completion of the selftest program on the Printer Control PCB, the PCB connects it-
self to the Internal Ring Network by setting the Relay Enable signal high. If the CPU is unable to con-
nect the PCB to the Internal Ring Network, the LED CR301 is extinguished (the LED is also used in the
service programs).
Printer Interface
The printer interface consists of a number of subcircuits which are described below.
Transfer of data This circuit consists of a five bit presettable counter (an EEPLD, Electrical
Erasable Programmable Logical Device) and an eight bit shift register. The transfer is carried out in 64
subcycles for each dot line, that is, one for each character, as follows:
Subcycle: The dot pattern for the left-most character (No. 1) is loaded into the shift regis-
ter. At the same time the presettable counter loaded is with eight (8). Then the counter starts count-
ing down to zero, transferring the data to the shift register in the thermal head at a rate of 3.6864
MHz (half the crystal frequency). When the counter reaches zero, it stops. Then the counter is loaded
l
with two (2), after which it is restarted (In case font B is used, the counter is loaded with six (6) the sec-
ond time instead of two). When the counter reaches zero, it stops again. Then the subcycle for char- _
acter 2 commences, and so forth.
Four port bits on the CPU are used for loading the four upper bits of the counter (bit 0 is always
loaded with 0, internally in the EEPLD).
Clk out and Prn elk are inverted in relation to each other, so that the one clocks the data out of
the shift register on the Printer Control PCB, and the other clocks the data into the shift register of
the therm0 head.
By setting the Width signal low, the frequency of Prn elk is doubled - this enables printout of the
character fonts with twice normal width (used for printout headings, e.g. RADIOMETER ABL500).
Printout of dot line When the 640 bit wide shift register in the therm0 head is filled, the CPU lat-
ches the dot pattern into the output latch (using a port bit).
Then it sets Enable 1 - 5 high simultaneously (five port bits) - these signals are applied to a buffer
which is enabled by the Heat signal. Then the Heat signal is set high for a period of time to activate
the heating elements.
l
7.5-4
PRINTER and PRINTER CONTROL
the CPU. This is done during adjustment of the printing intensity and when enabled via
a service program.
The + 24 V supply is held disabled until the selftest program has completed using the
24 V enable signal. The 24 V enable signal controls a transistor which causes the
+ 24 V to be decreased to approximately + 7.5 V during the selftest. This means that the
+ 5 V regulator which is powered from the + 24 V supply is unaffected by the disabling.
+ 15v This voltage is used for supplying the operational amplifier. It is derived from the + 33 V
supply using a 15 V zener diode.
The level of the + 15 V supply may be monitored via one of the A/D converter inputs of
the CPU. This is done during the final test in the production and when enabled via a ser-
vice program.
+SV, This regulated voltage is used for supplying the digital KS. The voltage is regulated
using an LM2925 regulator. The + 5 V regulator generates a reset signal for the CPU di-
rectly (see description below).
+sVAD This regulated voltage is used as a reference voltage for the ND converter in the CPU. It
is taken from the + 5 Vo via a low pass filter.
low to high) approximately 80 ms after the + 5 V supply has reached its nominal level.
7.57
0 7.6 WET SECTION CONTROL
Overview
Figure 7.617 on Page 19 gives an overview of the Wet Section Control PCB.
The main functions on the Wet Section Control PCB are:
- A/D conversion Of electrode, temperature and gas mixer signals, and additional signals from the
Monochromator Interface PCB (ABL510/520 only).
- Control of pump motors, tubing/membrane valves and the main valve.
- Control of temperatures.
- Control of the gas mixer.
- Control and monitoring of the liquid sensors and inlet.
- Communication via the Ring Network.
- Control of the optical system, ABL51 O/520 only.
The PCB includes its own CPU, and its function is in principle independent of the Main Computer PCB.
The Main Computer PCB is the master which may instruct the Wet Section Control PCB to Perform a
GM Upstart and a Gas Start. After having received the instruction, the CPU on the Wet Section Con-
trol PCB takes over the control, setting up the wet section and gas mixer to move the gas, obtain
results from the electrodes, perform the A/D conversion etc. During the calibration, the Wet Section
Control PCB presents the data to the Main Computer PCB. When the calibration has ended, the Main
Computer PCB then instructs the Wet Section Control PCB to perform either a GAS1 End or a Rinse de-
pending on which calibration is performed.
Two versions
Please note that the Wet Section Control PCB is found in two versions as follows:
901-774 Included in both ABLSOO and ABL510 from Run 1.
902- 157 Introduced in ABLSOO from Run 50 and ABL51 O/520 from Run 8
The basic differences between the two are shown below, a compatibility table is given on Page 18.
Circuit/function 90 1-774 902- 157
Power supply Cascade coupled linear regulators Switching circuit with transformer
Electrode channels output Transformer Opt0 coupler
Waste detector circuit On separate PCB, two NTCs On Wet Section Control, one NTC
Valve hold voltage 3v 6V *)
MV motor current (on/off) 770/l 10 mA 720/50 mA
A/D converter Less noise - improved channel

separation *)
*) 901-774 is modified to have these specifications when returned for replacement under the trade-
in arrangement.
Revised 91.04.05 7.6-l

WET SECTION CONTROL
Computer/Memory
The Computer/Memory part is shown in Figure 7.6.2 overleaf.
The circuit is built-up around a 8032 CPU. The computer/memory is built-up in a conventional way
with a latch separating the time multiplexed data and low order address bus and an address decoder
generating the various chip select signals.
The memory map is as follows:
128 bytes of I/O ports, timers etc. FF80H through FFFF,
FF7F,
32 kbytes (-128 bytes) of RAM
8000,
7FFF,
32 kbytes of PROM
OOOOH
Figure 7.6.1, Memory map.
The memory consists of 64 kbytes of PROM (only the lower 32 kbytes are used for startup, communi-
cation programs, etc.). During opstart, that is, when power is switched on, approximately 24 kbytes of
program (wet section control) from the Main Memory PCB is loaded into the 32 kbyte RAM memory
from which it is then executed. A 128 bytes EZPROM is used for storing pO2 zero and waste calibra-
tion values (the latter only for the original waste detector, 902-053). The remaining part of the RAM
(32 kbytes - 24 kbytes - 128 bytes) is used for temporary storage of data. The latter 128 bytes are used
for the various chip select signals. Communication with the PROM and RAM is carried out in a parallel
manner, whereas with the EJPROM it is serial.
A buffer is able to disconnect the PROM from the data bus during test of the PCB at the factory (when
running external programs (EP-CE, external program chip enable) or when setting the CPU to the free
run mode (F&EN, free run enable).
The data signals (TxD and RxD) are transferred through opto-couplers to obtain galvanical isolation.
The clock circuit consists of a 7.3728 MHz crystal and a counter which generates the various clock sig-
nals used on the Wet Section Control PCB as follows:
7.3728 MHz is used as a basic clock for the CPU. In addition, it is used as a reference clock for the
A/D converter for the various analog signals (except electrode signals), for generating
strobe signals for the heat transistors, and for generating the clock signal for the
pump stepping motor in the gas mixer.
460.8kHz is used by the programmable interval timers for generating clock signals for the pump
stepping motors, and is used by the CPU Watchdog.
115.2 kHz is used for generating the AC voltages for the electrode channels, as reference frequen-
cies for the respective A/D converters, and in the valve holding circuit for generating the
strobe signal.
57.6 kHz is used in the valve holding circuit for generating the strobe signal.
7.6-2 Revised 91.04.05

WET SECTION CONTROL
rents in the plugs). The preamplifiers, which are built-up around ADSlSs, function both as impedance
converters and preamplifiers.
The preamplifier for the pH and pCO2 channels amplify the input voltage by a factor of 10.
The preamplifier for the ~02 channel functions as a current to voltage converter (100 pV / PA).
Multiplexer: Each electrode channel include at the input end a multiplexer via which the CPU may
select which signal is to be converted. The signals are: the electrode signal, a factory adjusted ref-
erence voltage, which is +2,500 mV for pH and pCOz and -2,S.OO mV for the ~02 channel, and
ground (the tolerence for the reference voltages is + 0.5 mV). The reference voltage and GND are
used for determining the transfer function of the V/F converter (automatic calibration of the zero
point and the sensitivity) -this eliminates the need for manual adjustments. For the ~02 channel also
the polarization voltage and the battery voltage are connected to the multiplexer. The selected sig-
nal is buffered before it is applied to the V/F-converter.
Voltage to Frequency Converter: The V/F converter is in principle a voltage to duty cycle converter
where the output is gated together with the reference frequency (115.2 kHz). The V/F converter
generates a pulse train where the average frequency is proportional to the input voltage - the maxi-
a
-
mum average frequency is equal to the reference frequency.

Frequency to Counts Converter: The pulse train generated by the V/F converter, is applied to a
counter (each electrode channel has its own counter for simultaneous conversion). The count enable
signal is synchronized to the clock system via a D-flipflop and the 225 Hz clock. The counters are en-
abled for 0.57 seconds after which they are read. The resulting counter value will thus be in the range
from 0 to 65535 counts.
The sensitivity of the counters are as follows:
PH PC02 PO2
6.7 counts/ mpH 30.0 counts / % pCO2 1.4 counts I pA
Galvanical isolation: The electrode channels are galvanically isolated from each other and from the
remaining electronics. This is obtained by using separate power supplies for each channel, by passing
the multiplexer select signals through opto-couplers and by transferring the output signal through a
transformer (901-774) or an opto-coupler (902-157).
Voltage supply: Each channel receives its own 15 Vpp AC voltage (115.2 kHz) from the power sup-
ply circuit on the Wet Section Control PCB. The AC voltage is half-wave rectified and regulated by an
LM317 to provide + 11.5 V. An operational amplifier makes up an artificial ground splitting the + 11.5
V into a + 5.7 V supply. For the pOz channel, the + 11.5 V (901-774) or 10.5 V (902-157) is used direct-
a
ly; an additional - 14.6 V supply (901-774) or 11 .O V (902-l 57) is generated using a diode and a capa-
citor. The ~02 electrode is continuously polarized with - 630 mV. When the ABL is on, the polariza-
tion voltage is derived from the - 14.6 V (or 11.0 V) supply. When off, it is derived from a 3 V lithium
battery.
7.6-6 Revised 91.04.05

a WET SECTION CONTROL
Liquid Sensor Circuit

The principle of the five liquid sensors is shown below. When pointing the light beam from the LED at
an angle of 45 to the tangent of the channel, most of the light will be reflected to the photo-
transistor if the channel is empty. If the channel is covered by a liquid film or is filled with liquid, some
of the light will be scattered into the channel, causing a smaller amount to be reflected to the photo-
transitor. The LEDs and phototransistors are situated on the Wet L Section Distribution PCB, and the
-
light to and from the liquid sensors is transferred through optical fibres.
l-l l-l n
225 Hz, 24 V, 12.5% DC
;,.:g:?.;.i:;.y: .: ]
\0\ :..y
-b , ..::,: ..:::.
::$T.:;-i
Channel
1
Background
OptIcal / light
fibres
L
Figure 7.6.6, Liquid sensor principle.
The LEDs in the liquid sensors are driven by a 225 Hz, 24 V 12.5% duty cycle signal. The output of the
phototransistor will also be a 225 Hz signal, however, it will include a DC component caused by the
background light (the liquid sensor housings are made of clear plastic). The phototransistor signal is
therefore applied to a differential amplifier, where the DC component is stored on a capacitor, SO
that it may be subtracted from the total signal, see overleaf.
The output of the amplifier is then applied to a comparator, where the liquid sensor signal is com-
pared to a Trigger voltage derived from a D/A converter, During auto cleaning (every 24/12/8 hours) a
liquid sensor adjustment program is automatically called to calibrate the sensors. The sensors are
emptied, and then the trigger voltage is increased until the output of the comparator no longer tog-
gles (= maximum output of amplifier). This voltage is set to 100%; during normal operation the trig-
ger voltage is set to 60% of maximum (calibration value). If the output is above 60%, the sensor is
hereafter regarded as being empty; if the output is below 60%, the sensor is regarded as being full.
Differential
amplifier
Photo
transistor
to pot-t
Digital value
Resolution
Figure 7.6.7, Liquid sensor detection circuit.
Revised 91.04.05 7.6-7

WET SECTION CONTROL
The values obtained in the liquid sensor test service

program expresses the trigger voltage as follows:
60% trigger voltage [mV] x 1024 / 5 mV.
V trigger _A
If the empty value during a liquid sensor adjust-
Full ment is below 34, the calibration for this sensor is
omitted and the latest accepted calibration value is
0% reused.
Figure 7.6.8, Reference voltage.
In the service program, the present value is obtained by increasing the trigger voltage until the
comparator output no longer toggles. During normal operation, the circuit only has two states,
empty and full since the trigger voltage is fixed. -
The trigger voltage for the latest six calibrations is stored so the drift may be obtained in the liquid
sensor service program.The maximum output of the differential amplifier (trigger voltage) may
change over time due to contamination of the channel through the sensor, deteriation of the LED
etc.
The trigger voltage may be set in steps of 20 mV if the Resolution Voltage is above 1.25 V (low resolu-
tion) and in steps of 5 mV if below 1.25 V (high resolution).
The CPU reads the status of the port syncronuously with the 225 Hz clock, that is, syncronuously with
the LEDs being lit.
As for the various other parts of the wet section, the WD-ERROR signal disables the liquid sensor sup-
ply in case the CPU is faulty.
Electrode Chamber light

When the wet section is active, that is, when liquids are transported through the wet section, the
lamp illuminating the electrode chambers is lit. The lamp control circuit is coupled as a current gener-
ator which delivers approximately 170 mA to the bulb.
In case the CPU is faulty, the lamp is disabled by the WD-ERROR signal.
7.6-8 Revised 91.04.05

WET SECTION CONTROL
Dosage
pllsec ( 0 / 6 ( 8 1 13 ( 22 1 36 ( 60 1 100
Pl Clk (Hz) 0 104 134 224 373 622 1036 ---
P2 Clk (Hz) 0 104 134 224 373 622 1036 1728
Pl-DIR Decides the pump direction by changing the phase of the current applied to the
motor windings.
PQX-X Outputs for the motor windings.
The main valve provides two additional signals as follows:

MV-STATUS This signal is used by the CPU to check the status of the main valve in connection with
change of direction (clockwise to counter-clockwise or vice versa).
MV- POS Generated by a strobo-disc and a photosensor situated on the main valve shaft. The
strobo-disc includes holes at the places corresponding to the various positions of the
main valve. MV-POS is used for checking if the main valve is moving and for indicat-
ing that it has reached the correct position. The hole in the strobo-disc at position
zero is larger than the others - this is used during the automatic main valve alignment
to differentiate between position zero and the other positions.
Valve driver
The six valves, Vl through V6 (V3 is not mounted in ABLSOO), are supplied from the + 24 V DC via the
driver circuit shown overleaf.
To ensure a quick activation and to minimize the current consumption, the valves are driven as fol-
lows:
Pulling: The valve pull circuit is built-up around the counter and Decoder No. 1. When a valve is to
be pulled, the CPU first enables the valve itself via the programmable peripheral interface setting the
appropriate VALVE-X line low (X may be 1 through 6). Then it enables the pull circuit by setting up
the lines VALVE-SEL-X (1 through 3) via the programmable peripheral interface. Then it resets the
counter applying + 24 V DC to the selected valve. The counter counts at a rate of 28.8 kHz and stops
itself after 71 ms (when Ql 1 goes high) disabling the pull circuit.
Holding: When the valve has been pulled, it is still held activated by the hold circuit built-up
around Decoder No. 2. This decoder is coupled as a Johnson counter which strobes all enabled valves
in succession as follows:
901-774: One valve at the time is energized with 4.3 ps 24 V pulses at a rate of 28.8 kHt. The re-
sulting hold signal for each valve is a 28.8 kHz 24 V square wave signal with a duty cycle
of 12.5% (the power applied to the valve corresponds to a 3 V DC voltage).
902- 157: Two valves at the time are energized with 4.3 ps 24 V pulses at a rate of 57.6 kHz. The
resulting hold signal for each valve is a 57.6 kHz 24 V square wave signal with a duty
cycle of 25% (the power applied to the valve corresponds to a 6 V DC voltage).
See the note concerning compatibility on Page 18.
Revised 91.04.05
WET SECTION CONTROL
two different speeds as follows: When the mean duty cycle of the Block heat signal decreases to
below 2 % (ambient temperature approx. 28 C), the fan is turned on with the low speed (supply volt-
age is 9.0 V). If the duty cycle of the Block heat signal decreases to below 2 % with the fan at the slow
speed (ambient temperature approx. 34 C), the fan is set to turn at the high speed (supply voltage is
13 V). The speed of the fan is controlled by means of the D/A converter (which is also used in the
liquid sensor circuit). The maximum current supplied to the fan is limited to 250 mA.
Cover off A reed relay in the base plate for the thermostatted box senses whether the lid of the
thermostatted box is mounted or not - if removed, COVER-OFF is set high and a message is sent to the
Main Computer PCB.
l Heat1 and Heat2 The temperature of Heat1 and Heat2 is regulated to 37C * 1C. The regulation
circuit consists of a switching FET transistor, a ceramic heating substrate and an NTC resistor which is
calibrated to be 6.1 kQ at 37.OC using a parallel resistor.
l AUX In a test situation, it is possible to connect e.g. a variable resistor to the AUX input of the
temperature circuit.
Gas mixer interface

The Wet Section Control PCB provides the + 33 V supply for the gas mixer. It controls the various elec-
tromechanical components situated in the gas mixer (via the Gas Mixer Interface PCB), four magnetic
valves and the stepping motor for the membrane pump.
In addition, it performs an A/D conversion of the various signals received from the Gas Mixer Interface
PCB, CO2 pressure, pump flow, barometric pressure, and the reference voltage for the barometer cir-
cuit Baro Vref ( + 5.0 V).
The Gas Mixer Interface PCB includes an EZPROM for storage of the gas mixture percentages. The Wet
Section Control PCB use four signals for communicating with the EZPROM, a chip select and a clock
signal, and two data lines, in and out.
The various signals are described in detail in the Section concerning the Gas Mixer Interface PCB. A
block diagram is given overleaf.
To
Gas Mixer
Interface
PCB
Figure 7.6.15. Gas mixer interface.
7.6-14 Revised 91.04.05

WET SECTION CONTROL
On 902-157 the above three AC voltages are obtained on three separate windings on
the transformer in the fly back converter.
The AC voltages are regulated in the electrode channels themselves.
All voltages except the + 5 Vref are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
The reset from the + 5 V regulator is gated together with the reset from the CPU watch-
dog before it is applied to the reset terminal of the CPU. The CPU can then determine
the source of a reset by checking the status of the WD-STATUSsignal.
Compatibility Survey
ABL510
ABLSOO ABLSOO ABL510 ABL520 ABL505
AB L520
Rl-R49 R50 + Rl-R7 Rl-R7
R8 +
90 l-774 YE5 NO 2) NO NO NO 2) NO 2)
w. 368-673
90 l-774 YES NO 2) YE5 1) NO NO 2) NO 2)

w. 368-720
90 l-774 YES NO 2) YES 1) YE5 1) NO 2) NO 2)

w. 368-787
or above
902- 157 YE5 YE5 YE5 YES YE5 YE5
1) Only PCBs delivered from RADIOMETER after week 42/1990 can be used due to hardware re-
quirements (improvement of A/D converter and inclusion of connector for the Software Gate)
2) No, because the new waste detector cannot be connected.
7.6-18 Revised 92.02.14

WET SECTION CONTROL
Voltage Supplies
The Wet Section Control PCB receives an unregulated + 33 V DC supply from the Power Supply. The
voltage supplies needed for the various circuits are all generated locally on basis of the + 33 V. How-
ever the way in which the voltages are generated on 901-774 and 902-l 57 respectively is different.
On 901-774 the voltages are generated using a forward converter with cascade coupled regulators.
On 902-157 the voltages are generated using a flyback converter built up around a transformer and
an LTl172CT regulator (reduces power consumption). The flyback converter is selfstarting (oscillates
at approx. 100 kHz), but as soon as the clock circuit has started up it is syncronized to the 115.2 kHz
clock.
The voltages are:
+33VDC This unregulated supply is received directly from the Power Supply. It is used for sup-
0 plying the stepping motors for the two main pumps Pl and P2 and the main valve MV. It
is also used for the three heating elements. In addition, the voltage is supplied to the
Gas Mixer Interface PCB.
+24VDC This regulated voltage is derived from the + 33 V supply using an LM317 regulator and is
used for supplying the liquid sensors LSl through L55 (the voltage is also supplied to the
auxillary connector). It is also used for supplying the valves Vl through V6.
+18VDC This unregulated supply is used for the fan (only found on 902-l 57).
+lSVDC This supply is regulated using an LM340T15 regulator and is used for supplying the inlet
section, the V/F converter (except for electrode signals), and the liquid sensor detection
circuit. On 901-774 it is derived from the + 24 V supply - on 902-l 57 it is derived via the
flyback converter from the + 18 V supply.
- 15VDC This supply is regulated using a LM320T15 regulator and is used for supplying the analog
circuits. On 901-774 it is derived via a transformer (DC/DC converter) - on 902-157 it is
derived via the flyback converter.
+lOVDC This supply is used for the measuring chamber light. On 901-774 it is derived from the
+ 33 V supply via a switch mode regulator (4193), the supply includes a 300 mA current
limitation - on 902-157 it is derived from the flyback converter. On 902-157 the 10 V is
fed back to the flyback regulator to adjust the power transferred.
+SVDC This supply is used for the various digital circuits. On 901-774 the supply is derived from
the + 10 V supply using a LM2925 regulator - on 902-157 is derived from the fly back
converter using a L387A regulator.
The + 5 V regulator generates a reset signal for the CPU directly (see description below).
The voltage is used for supplying the digital KS (CPU, memory I/O ports, gates, etc.). A
manual reset may be obtained by shorting together the two pins of J2B momentarily.
+SV,fDC This regulated voltage is derived from the + 15 V supply using a reference zener diode.
The voltage is used as a reference voltage for the temperature monitoring circuit, the
V/F converter (except for electrode signals), and the D/A converter in the liquid sensor
detection circuit.
AC supplies On 901-774 the transformer used in the DC/DC converter includes three additional wind-
ings providing three separate AC voltages, one for each electrode channel.
Revised 91.04.05 7.6-17

+??U The voltage connected to the grid G4 may be adjusted to obtain maximum focus within
the range from - 64 V through + 542 V.
+58U Used for supplying the output stage of the video amplifier which is connected to the ca-
thode.
+ ?? u The voltage connected to the grid, G 1, may be adjusted to obtain the desired brightness
level within the range from - 64 V through + 58 V.
Vertical Deflection
The vertical deflection circuit is built-up around a TDA2653 chip. The input to the circuit is the VSYNC
signal (50 or 60 Hz). The TDA2653 includes an oscillator which is triggered by the VSYNC signal to run
at a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz (picture frequency). The oscillator will continue to oscillate (at a fre-
quency of approximately 50 Hz), in case the VSYNC signal from the Main Computer PCB becomes lost;
this ensures that the beam will not be concentrated in a single horizontal line. The free running fre-
quency may be adjusted.
A constant current generator charges a capacitor, providing a ramp output. The voltage across this
capacitor determines the current through the deflection coil and thus the deflection of the electron
beam. When the electron beam reaches the bottom of the screen, the capacitor is shortened via a
diode. This causes a reversed field in the deflection coil, causing the electron beam to start its flyback.
The maximum magnetic field in the deflection coil, that is, the picture height, as well as the linearity,
S-correction of the deflection curve, may be adjusted.
Video Amplifier PCB

All signals to the CRT-tube (except the ?? kV supply) are passed via the Video Amplifier PCB, which is
mounted on the base of the CRT-tube. However, the main function of the PCB is to amplify the video
signal, BLUE, which determines the intensity of the beam.
In the input stage, which is supplied from the 12 V supply, the video level may be adjusted (via a volt-
age divider). The output stage, which is supplied from the 58 V supply, is connected to the cathode of
the CRT-tube. The output stage is turned off during the vertical flyback using the frame blank signal.
7.84
POWER SUPPLY
SENSE The + 5.1 V supply is regulated so that the voltage on the Main Computer is cor-
rect. The SENSE line is a current less line for monitoring the level on the Main Computer PCB. In this
way the Power Supply compensates power loss in the interconnecting cable.
12VDC
This voltage is supplied to the Main Computer PCB where it is used for generating a 1.59 reference
voltage for the R, G, and B signals provided by the VSDD (Video Storage and Display Device). In addi-
tion, the voltage is supplied to the CRT Deflection PCB and the Floppy Disk Control PCB (the latter
only in ABL500/510/520 below Run 50/B/B).
The switching frequency of the regulator is approximately 50 kHz.
Soft start The regulator employs a soft start-up which slowly increases the maximum cur-
rent that may be drawn from the supply. This ensures that the regulator is not overloaded when
switching the ABL on.
Current limitation The maximum current to be drawn from this supply is 3.2 A (set by the fuse F3,
3.2 A).
Power Valid The regulator provides a power valid signal which is applied to the Main Com-
puter PCB. The power valid signal will go low in case the 20 V DC at the input of the regulator de-
creases to below 16 V, that is, when the mains supply decreases to below 80% of its nominal value.
Protection The regulator will automatically shut off in case it becomes overheated.
7 V AC (on 901-786, earlier)

Tl includes four secondaries each providing a 7 V AC voltage. These supplies are intended for the (up
to four) optional PCBs which may be installed in the base unit. The Power Supply PCB does not in-
clude circuit for rectifying or regulating the AC supplies, this is carried out locally on the optional
PCBs. The four supplies are protected by the fuses F5, F6, F7, and F8 (all 1 A).
7 V AC (on 902- 154, new)

Tl includes a secondary providing a 7 V AC voltage. This supply is intended for the (up to three) op-
tional PCBs which may be installed in the base unit. The Power Supply PCB does not include circuit for
rectifying or regulating the AC supply, this is carried out locally on the optional PCBs. The supply is
protected by the fuse F5 (1 A).
11 VAC
The transformer also provides 11 V AC which is connected to the Monochromator Interface PCB in
ABL510/520. The supply is used for the hemolyzer and lamp drivers.
33VDC
Another secondary of the transformer Tl provides a 33 V DC voltage for the Wet Section Control PCB.
The voltage is also supplied to the Gas Mixer Interface PCB. The voltage is used for supplying the
7.9-2 Revised 91.04.05

a 7.9. POWER SUPPLY
Introduction
The power supply is found in two versions (where both the transformer and the Power Supply PCB)
are different. The Power Supply consists of the following parts:
- Mains filter including the main fuse.
- Mains voltage selector with six positions: 100 V, 120 V, 140 V, 200 V, 220 V and 240 V.
- Mains transformer, Tl, including four separate primaries] a thermal switch, and eight (earlier)
or five (new) separate secondaries.
- Power Supply PCB including secondary fuses, two regulation circuits, and relays for
(dis)connecting the various PCBs (from) to the internal Ring Network.
The reason for the change is reduction of power loss (= heat emission).
Introduction-compatibility: The new parts which were introduced in ABL500/510/520 of Run
50/8/8 onwards are NOT compatible with the earlier.
Voltage Supplies
The Power Supply PCB provides two regulated voltages for the Main Computer PCB, 5.1 V and 12 V.
The two regulated voltages are derived from an unregulated 20 V supply obtained from a separate
secondary of the transformer. The voltages are generated using two integrated switching regulators
of type L296.
The Power Supply provides, in addition, a number of AC voltages which are applied to the various
PCBs where they are rectified and regulated locally.
5 . 1 VDC
This voltage is supplied to the Main Computer PCB where it is used for the digital circuits. It is, fur-
thermore, used for supplying the opto-couplers connected to the internal Ring Network on the Wet
Section Control PCB and the four optional PCBs.
The switching frequency of the regulator is approximately 50 kHz.
Soft start The regulator employs a soft start-up which slowly increases the maximum cur-
rent that may be drawn from the supply. This ensures that the regulator is not overloaded when
switching on the ABL.
Current /imitation If the current drawn from the 5.1 V supply exceeds 4 through 7 A, the regulator
will be shut off (the wide range is caused by the tolerances of the regulator). The slow blow fuse F2
through which both the load on the 5.1 V and the 12 V supplies flow is a 3.2 A fuse.
Reset The regulator provides a reset signal used on the Main Computer PCB. When
switching power on, the reset signal will go high for at least 250 ms after the output has increased to
5.0 V. The duration of the reset pulse is not critical as long as it is above 250 ms (it may be up to 750
ms). When switching power off, Reset will go low when the output has decreased to 4.75 V.
Protection If the output voltage increases to above 6.1 V, e.g. in case of a short circuit to
the 33 V supply, the SCR CR9 will be triggered shortening the 20 V DC to ground and thus blowing the
fuse.
The regulatorwill automatically shut off in case it becomes overheated.
Revised 91.04.05 7.9-l

POWER SUPPLY
valves, pumps, heating elements, etc. The fuse F4, which is a slow blow 4 A type, protects against
overloads. In case the + 33 V DC is too low, the message MAINS TOO LOW appears.
33 VAC
The last secondary of the transformer Tl provides a 33 V AC voltage for the printer (supplied to the
Printer Control PCB via the Main Computer PCB). On the Printer Control PCB itself, the AC voltage is
rectified and regulated. The fuse Fl, which is a slow blow 3200 mA type, protects against overloads.
Revised 91.04.05 7.9-3

POWER SUPPLY
If no PCBs are connected (other than the Main Computer PCB itself), all relays are deactivated, that is,
switched to the upper positions thus looping TxD back to RxD (both of the Main Computer PCB). The
various relays are controlled by the connected PCBs themselves as follows:
When the power is switched on, the connected PCB, say the Wet Section Control PCB, will perform a
selftest and initiation program. When this has been carried out successfully, that is, when the PCB has
started up and is running, it activates the appropriate relay (switches to the lower position), thus con-
necting itself to the Internal Ring Network. A CPU-Watchdog circujt found on each of the connected
PCBs, monitors if the CPU is working. If so, the PCB remains in the ring. However, if the CPU fails, the
CPU-Watchdog will automatically deactivate the relay, thus disconnecting the defective PCB from the
ring.
The above means that only well-functioning PCBs will be in the ring; this system prevents a fault on
one PCB from disabling all communication via the Internal Ring Network.
Compatibility of RSl50/100
The RSl50/100 have been changed for two reasons - to reduce power consumption and to change the
Interconnection in ring network.
Earlier PCBs are: 902-021 (RSISO) and 901-773 (RSllOO)
New PCBs are: 902-148 (RSl50) and 902-147 (RSllOO)
The new type PCBs are fully compatible with the earlier type whereas only one of the earlier type
PCBs can be connected in new instruments (because of missing relay). In case both an RS150 and an
RSllOO is to be connected in a new ABL and one of the PCBs is of the new type and the other is of the
earlier type they must be connected as follows: The new type PCB must be connected as Option 1 and
the earlier type as Option 2 (refer to figure 7.9.2).
7.9-6 Revised 91.04.05

RSllOO, SERIAL INTERFACE
Serial Communication Channels

The PCB includes five serial communication channels as follows:
One for the internal Ring Network.
Three independent channels using RS-232-C levels. Communication speed, protocol, and frame
format may be adjusted independently for each channel.
Internal Ring Network

Communication via the internal Ring Network is carried out directly via the RxD and TxD lines of the
CPU. Please refer to Section 7.1.1 or 7.1.2 for details of the communication via the internal Ring Net-
work.
In ABL500/510/520 below Run 50/8/8 all options are connected via the Power Supply wher also the
relay for connecting the PCBs into the Ring network are found. In ABL500/510/520/505 of Run 50/8/8/l
onwards only the first option is connected directly to the Power Supply - the second option is
connected via the first which now includes the relay for the second.
The Main Computer PCB is able to address up to 15 different PCBs (destinations) connected to the in-
ternal Ring Network. However, physically there is only room for up to seven PCBs simultaneously
(Main Computer, Printer Control, RS-232-C Interface, Wet Section Control and up to three optional
PCBs. Each PCB has its own address in the ring network; and since the number of existing and future
options may, with time, exceed 15, it is possible to assign different addresses to the various PCBs.
The three external communication channels all origin from two DUARTs controlled by the CPU. Each
DUART includes four data lines (two TxD and two RxD lines) together with eight output and six input
lines. The output part of each channel is galvanically isolated from the rest of the RSilOO PCB by pas-
sing all signals through optocouplers and using separate power supplies.
External “RS-232-c” Channels

The three external communication channels are identical -the principle of one channel is shown over-
leaf.
Each UART includes the two data lines TxD and RxD. One output and two input lines are used for the
hardware handshake signals RTS, CTS, and DSR. The signals from/to the UART are passed through
buffers and optocouplers. The RS-232 driver, which converts output signals from TTL levels to + 12 V
(RS-232-C levels) and input signals from RS-232-C levels to TTL levels. The output connector is a nine
pin D-connector-the pin configuration is shown below.
Communication speed (50 through 19200 baud), protocol, frame format, etc. may be set-up for each
channel independently, please refer to the setup programs described in the Users Handbook.
Each time one of the UARTs receives a data byte, an INTl to the CPU is generated - this causes the CPU
to read the data. Each DUART includes an INT output (interrupt) - the two INTs are ANDed and then
connected to the INTl input of the CPU.
Each UART includes two status signals, RxRDY and TxRDY. RxRDY indicates that the UART has re-
ceived a data byte from an external device, and TxRDY indicates that the UART is ready to receive an-
other data byte from the CPU for transmission to an external device. These eight status signals are
connected to port 1 of the CPU . .
7.10-4 Revised 92.02 14

RSll 00. SERIAL INTERFACE
The voltage is used for supplying the digital ICs which are not connected to the ABL and
the external equipment.
The following supplies are all derived using a DC/DC converter built-up around a tranformer with
three separate secondary windings - one for each of the RS-232-C channels. The individual supplies
are stabilized using zener diodes.
,+ 12 VI For RS-232-C driver for channel 1.
+ 5 Vl For RS-232-C driver and optocouplers for channel 1.
2 12 v2 For RS-232-C driver for channel 2.
+ 5 v2 For RS-232-C driver and optocouplers for channel 2.
f 1 2 v, For RS-232-C driver for channel 3.
+ 5 v3 For RS-232-C driver and optocouplers for channel 3.
The reset from the + 5 V regulator is gated together with the reset from the CPU watch-
dog before it is applied to the reset terminal of the CPU and the DUARTs. The CPU can
then determine the source of a reset by checking the status of the WI-STATUS signal.
Compatibility of new and earlier RSllOOs

The new type PCB is fully compatible with the earlier type whereas only one of the earlier type PCB
can be connected in new instruments (because of missing relay). In case both an RSl50 and an RSllOO
is to be connected in a new ABL and one of the PCBs is of the new type and the other is of the earlier
type they must be connected as follows: The new type PCB must be connected as Option 1 and the
earlier type as Option 2 (refer to figure 7.9.2).
7.10-6 Revised 91.04.22

l 8. MECHANICS DESCRIPTION
General Information
This section describes the wet section and gas mixer mechanics.
The wet section part includes a flow volume table, principle diagrams and the ABL51 O/520 optical system.
m REVISED 93.01 .I 5 8-I

.-
WET SECTION MECHANICS
0
LS3 Liquid sensor, testing that liquid samples are filling the hemolyzer (ABL510/520 only)
or the right electrode chamber branch (ABL505 only) completely.
LS4 Liquid sensor, testing for sufficient liquid samples.
LS5 Liquid sensor, testing for correct SBS flow.
8.1-2 REVISED 92.02.14

@ - 8.1. WET .SECTION MECHANICS
General information
The wet section is separated into a wet and a dry part.
1. Front part with liquid containers, inlet module, thermostatted electrode chamber,
valves, liquid sensors, tubings, and pumps.
2. Rear part with PC-board, stepping motors for the main valve and pumps, wiring,
and optical fibres for the liquid sensors.
The two parts are separated by a common mounting plate of painted aluminium.
The front part appears with an easy-to-clean, smooth surface. The inlet module is designed as a snap-
on, and completely water-proof unit.
The liquid containers are suspended electrically isolated from the rest of the wet section.
The front part of the wet section is covered by a transparent cover which is magnetically suspended
assuring an easy mounting/dismantling.
The entire wet section is suspended and fastened to the base unit by 4 guide pins and 9 screws ac-
cessible from the front.
When servicing the ABL, the entire wet section is easily dismountable by unscrewing the 9 front
screws.
Below is a short general description of the wet section components. For an overview please refer to
the wet section principle diagrams included in this section:
PI and P2 The wet section includes 2 pumps in order to reduce the measuring and calibration
time by allowing liquid and gas transport in the right and left tubing circuit simulta-
neously, e.g. P2 is rinsing the inlet while the ABL is measuring on the blood sample in
the electrode chamber.
Main valve Selection of liquid and gasses.
VI ,V2 and V3 Tubing valves which control the liquid and gas flow in the electrode chambers and
the hemolyzer (V3 in ABLS05/510/520 only).
v4 Membrane valve for rinse solution intake to the right tubing circuit.
VS Membrane valve for air intake.
V6 Membrane valve for flow control of Salt-Bridge Solution.
LSl Liquid sensor, testing that liquid samples are filling the left electrode chamber branch
completely.
LS2 Liquid sensor, testing for sufficient and homogenous liquid samples.
REVISED 92.02.14 8.1-1

il)
The following table shows the flow speeds of Pl and P2.
t I I I
I Nominal Flow,
&sec
100
I
Minimum Flow, Maximum Flow,
Fl/sec
90
I
&ec
120
I
60 54 72
36 32.3 43.2
22 19.4 25.9
1 13 11.6 15.5
I
l
I 6
I
5.63
I
7.5
I
8.1-4
The following table shows the wet section flow volumes for ABL50/500/505/510/520. The figures in
(brackets) are for ABL510/520 only, and in [brackets] are for ABL505 only
I T-junction - V2
I
4.6
I
3.9
I
5.3
REVISED 93.01.15 8.1-3

a OPTICAL SYSTEM
Monochromator
The Monochromator Unit converts the light transferred through the sample into a continuous spec-
trum as follows:
Due to the behavior of light, the beam transferred through the entrance slit of the Monochromator
Unit is cone-shaped. The beam is directed to the mirror unit which contains a concave mirror conver-
ting the cone-shaped beam into a parallel light beam.
The parallel light beam is reflected to the grating unit. The grating unit includes a plane grating that
converts the beam into a continous spectrum and again returns it to the mirror unit.
The spectrum is then reflected to the slit plate which, apart from the entrance slit, also includes six
output slits. These output slits are located so that they allow six monochromatic light beams, corre-
sponding to the six wavelengths in the continuous spectrum (535, 560,577,622,636, and 670 nm), to
pass through it. The monochromatic light beams are picked up by six photo diodes placed behind
each slit.
Due to low light intensity it is necessary to measure the photodiode current immediately before the
photo lamp is turned on (dark current) during each measurement and calibration and then when the
photo lamp is turned on. The dark current is substracted from the current measured with the photo
lamp on. The resulting current is then converted into absorbances for each of the six wavelengths.
Revised 91.04.19 8.1.1-3

GAS MIXER
CO2 Flow
Pure CO2 is obtained from the cylinder and is passed through a reduction valve before being applied
to the gas mixer itself. The output pressure of the reduction valve is 2.5 + 0.5 atmospheres. At the
input, the CO2 passes the COz input valve, which is only open when CO2 is needed. Then the CO2
passes the flow regulator which has two outputs, one (Gas 3 - pure CO2) in which the flow is
approximately 40 ml/min, and another in which the flow is approximately 8 ml/min the latter being
applied to the mixing coils. On the CO2 flow regulator a pressure transducer is mounted which
monitors the CO2 pressure; if the pressure is outside the nominal value ?r 20 %, an error message will
appear.
Differential Pressure Regulator and Mixing Coils

The air and the CO2 are then applied to the left and right chambers of the differential pressure
regulator respectively. The position of the jet in the air chamber together with the separating
membrane will ensure a pressure of approximately 180 mm water column in both chambers. The
pressure in the air chamber is regulated by exhausting excess air through the jet. After pressure
equalization, the air and the CO2 are applied to the mixing coils where the gas mixtures are actually
produced.
output
There is only one tubing going from the gas mixer to the flow selector in the wet section. Therefore,
one pass-through (on/off) valve for pure CO2 and two valves, each with two outputs for the gas
mixtures, are provided at the output (for selection of gasses). When the gas mixer is running, the
unused gas mixtures are exhausted via a separate outlet, whereas pure CO2 is only flowing when
actually needed.
Poiseuilles Law
The principle of operation of the gas mixer is based on a patented method using Poiseuilles law
which applies for gas flowing in a capillary tube. In this form Poiseuilles law states that:
Ap x d4
Q= X constant
PXl
where: Q = the gas flow in (for example) ml/set.,

AP = the pressure drop across the capillary,
P = the viscosity of the gas in question,
1 = the length of the capillary,
d = the diameter of the capillary.
Assumptions for the use of Poiseuilles law are:

1 Laminar gas flow (i. e., Reynolds number < 2300),
8.2-2
0 8.2. GAS MIXER
Introduction
The Gas Mixer produces three gas mixtures on basis of pure CO2 (from a cylinder) and atmospheric air
from the surroundings (drawn in by means of a membrane pump). The gas mixtures are used for
calibration of the two gas electrodes, pC02 and ~02, and for flushing the inlet system. The gas
mixtures and their use are outlined below:
Gas 1: 5.61% CO2 and 19.76% 0~~45 ml/min;
used for the first point calibration of both gas electrodes and for flushing the inlet system,
Gas 2: 11.22% CO2 and 18.58% 02,45 ml/min;
used for the second point calibration of the pCOz electrode, and
Gas 3: 100% CO2 from cylinder, 40 ml/min;
used for zero-point calibration of the ~102 electrode.
The gas mixture percentages are as indicated above when the content of CO2 in atmospheric air is
0.04% and the relative humidity is 50% (variations in the mixtures caused by a change in the two
parameters are insignificant for the function of the ABL).
The gas mixer is only running, that is, producing gas mixtures, when there is a need for it. This is to
minimize the CO2 consumption. On Page 4 of this section, a flow diagram of the gas mixer is shown.
Air Flow
When running, the membrane pump will circulate atmospheric air at a flow rate of 180 ml/min. The
atmospheric air is flowing through a capillary tube (resistance) to create a pressure drop (which is
proportional to the flow). Across the capillary tube is a pressure transducer, which controls the speed
of the membrane pump to ensure a flow rate of 180 ml/min. If the air flow is outside 180 mUmin f 25
ml/min, an error message will appear.
The atmospheric air taken from the surroundings is passed through two air filters, which also
function as vibration dampers. Of the 180 ml/min, only approximately 82 ml/min are passed on to the
mixing coils; the remaining 98 ml/min (already filtered air) are recirculated. This means that only
approximately 82 mI/min is drawn from the surroundings when the gas mixer is running. Please see
below.
Differential
. pressure regulator
I I
I 4
98 ml/min
180 ml/min
pump flow
1 82 ml/min to mixing coils
Figure 8.2.1. Air flow diagram.
8.2-l
GAS MIXER
2 Resistance caused by curvature of the capillary must be negligible compared to the Poiseuille
resistance, and
3 The dynamic pressure loss at the capillarys intake and exhaust must be negligible compared to
the Poiseuille pressure drop.
The following formulas apply for the gas mixtures:
Q
co2
x 100
02% = Qair + Q,,
2
That is:
1 Qair
1 0 0 x - = -+1
CO,% Q,,
2
and since the pressure drops (Ap) across the two mixing coils are the same, Poiseuilles law states:
1 pair x 5
100 x - = x constarrtl + 1
CO,% AP x 4
a That is:
Pco2 d; x I2
1
100 x - = - - x cXM.cq + 1
CO,% P,, x 4x1,
At a particular temperature, PCns/pair is constant, and within a certain temperature range, pCoalPair
only changes slightly, since the correction factor is 0.033 %/C. Therefore:
4X12
100 xc;z%
- = -
4 x 1, x constant2 + l
That is, l/COz% and therewith COz% is only dependent on the diameter and the length of the mixing
tubes.
8.2-3
9. SPARE PARTS LIST
0
Introduction
All spare parts available for the ABL50/500/505/51 O/520 are included in this list. Accessories available for
the end-user are listed in the Order Form, and have therefore not been included in the Spare Parts List.
Modules
Page 9.1-I gives a survey of the mechanical and electrical modules.
Defective modules marked M must be returned to the Radiometer Distribution A/S for replacement
under the Trade-In Arrangement with the exception of modules which have been damaged due to
attempted repairs. Repairs can only be made where special permission has been given by the Service
Department at Radiometer Medical A/S.
Defective modules marked C may be repaired by the Distributors personnel with the precautions
given for the modules in the Check-out and Adjustment procedures (Section 2), and using the
components given in this Spare Parts List only. C - modules may also be returned to Radiometer
Distribution A/S under the trade-in arrangement.
Component marking
A: Components only for the following series of instruments
ABL500 Run l-49
ABLSI O/520 Run l-7
B: Components only for the following series of instruments

ABL500 Run 50 and onwards
ABL505 Run 1 and onwards
ABL51 O/520 Run 8 and onwards
ABL50 Run 1 onwards (wet section and base units
only)
Components
The components available for service are listed in section 9.2. All parts are manufactured by RADIOM-
ETER, and can only be purchased from RADIOMETER.
Ordering
When ordering spare parts, please include the following information:
The code number and the description of the part.
Note: Items marked with I have changed since last revision
e
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 9-l
9.1 MODULES
0
Computer Unit (ABL500/505/510/520)
A 901-782 Main Computer PCB M
B 902-l 46 Main Computer PCB M
A 901-783 Main Memory PCB, Without EPROMS
(See section 9.2 for EPROM kits) M
CRT Compartment (ABL500/505/510/520)

901-770 CRT Deflection PCB
(ABL500 below R60, ABL51 O/520 below R30N6) M
A 901-772 Floppy Disk Control PCB M
901-781 Printer Control PCB M
902-241 Printer Control PCB (new version) M
902-060 CRT Monitor, Complete
(ABL500 below R60, ABL510/520 below R30N6) M
902-l 86 CRT Monitor, Complete
(ABL500 R60, ABL505 ROl , ABL51 O/520 R30N6, and onwards) C
Wet Section
901-577 Monochromator Unit (ABL51 O/520 only) M
A 901-774 Wet Section Control PCB M
901-775 Monochromator Interface PCB (ABL51 O/520 only) M
902-I 57 Wet Section Control PCB M
Base Unit
A 90 l-773 Serial Interface PCB, RSllOO, Optional M
901-785 Gas Mixer Control PCB M
A 901-786 Power Supply PCB M
901-822 Gas Mixer, Complete C
A 902-021 Serial Output PCB, RSl50, Optional M
B 902-l 47 Data Interface PCB, RSllOO, Optional (not ABL50) M
B 902-148 Serial Output PCB, RSl50, Optional M
B 902-l 54 Power Supply PCB M
902-224 Main Computer PCB (ABL50) M
The following assemblies are not considered Spare Parts/ Modules, and cannot be returned under the
Trade-in Arrangement. The listed items must be repaired by the distributors service center.
Computer Unit
CRT Compartment
Printer Unit
Floppy Disk Unit
Numerical Keyboard
Base Unit
Wet Section Unit
Keypad & Display Unit (ABL50)
REVISED 92.11 .Ol 9.1 - 1

COMPONENTS/MODULES
B 888-279 Frame for Floppy Disk

A 901-998 Lock for Tilt Adjustment
902-060 Monitor CRT, Complete. For top part 901-818. C
(ABL500 below R50 and ABL51 O/520 below R08)
901-771 Video Amplifier PCB
A 923-334 Frame for Intensity Control Roller
A 923-339 Roller for Intensity Control
923-424 Bracket with wheels for Printer Unit Right-hand Side
923-425 Bracket with wheels for Printer Unit Left-hand Side
B 923-613 Roller for Intensity Control
B 902-l 86 Monitor CRT, Complete. For top part 902-l 39. C
(ABL500 R50, ABL505ROl and ABL51 O/520 R08 and onwards)
902-l 84 CRT Deflection PCB
902-i 85 Video Amplifier PCB
923-424 Bracket with wheels for Printer Unit Right-hand Side
923-425 Bracket with wheels for Printer Unit Left-hand Side
923-613 Roller for Intensity Control
905274 Adaptation kii for CRT monitor 902-l 86. (Top part 902-I 39 run 1 - 34)
Printer Unit
636-063 Cable, Flat, W56, Printer Control PCB to Therm0 Printer
636-066 Cable, Flat, W45 Printer Control PCB to Main CPU
A 852-895 Printer Unit Out Button
B 852-897 Printer Unit Out Button
878-096 Ground strap
885-966 Retaining plate for 878-096
B 888-277 Chassis for Printer Unit, white
902-241 Printer Control PCB (new version) M
A 901-999 Printer Front Assembly with Paper Guide
B 902-253 Printer Front Assembly with Paper Guide
91 O-l 99 Therm0 Printer
923-458 Spindle for paper roll, without brake (Reorder 905-092)
923-634 Spindel, Paper, ABL5XX
923-650 Holder for Spindel, ABLSXX
Floppy Disk Unit, Optional
636-064 Cable, W54, Disk Drive to Floppy Disk Control PCB, Power
A 636-067 Cable, Flat, W44, Floppy Disk Control PCB to Main CPU PCB
B 636-l 60 Cable, Flat, Disk drive to Main CPU PCB. New design
A 885-930 Panel, Front
B 888-280 Panel, Front
A 901-772 Floppy Disk Control PCB M
A 91 O-l 71 Floppy Disk Drive, 3.5 inch (5/12 volt)
B 91 O-205 Floppy Disk Drive, 3.5 inch (5 volt)
A 923-329 Panel, Front for Control Station
B 923-617 Panel, Front for Control Station (with original CRT electronics)
B 978-756 Panel, Front for Control Station (silk screened, plastics)
9.2 - 2 REVISED 93.04.20

9.2 COMPONENTS/MODULES
0
Computer Unit (ABL500/505/510/520)
A 855-l 24 Rubber Foot
A 855-l 31 Rail Bottom
B 855-l 44 Foot
A 885-924 PaneLBottom
A 885-926 Panel, Top
A 885-954 Hinge, Bottom
A 885-955 Hinge, Top
B 888-272 Panel Bottom
A 901-782 Main Computer PCB M
B 902-i 46 Main Computer PCB M
430-l 20 Battery for RAM and Watch
A 901-783 Main Memory PCB, Without EPROMS
905-251 EPROM Kit for ABL500 Run l-49, English only
a 905-252 EPROM Kit for ABLSOO Run l-49, English/German
905-253 EPROM Kit for ABL500 Run l-49, EngtishIFrench
905-254 EPROM Kit for ABLSOO Run l-49, English/Japanese
905-255 EPROM Kit for ABL500 Run l-49, English/Italian
905-256 EPROM Kit for ABL510 Run 1-7, English only
905-257 EPROM Kit for ABL510 Run l-7, English/German
905-258 EPROM Kit for ABL510 Run l-7, English/French
905-259 EPROM Kit for ABL510 Run l-7, English/Japanese
905-261 EPROM Kit for ABL520 Run l-7, English only
905-262 EPROM Kit for ABL520 Run l-7, English/German
905-263 EPROM Kit for ABL520 Run l-7, English/French
905-264 EPROM Kit for ABL520 Run 1-7, English/Japanese
B 978680 Panel Top
CRT Compartment (ABL500/505/510/520)

0 A
065-863
552-015
Frame for Printer Out Button
Keypad for Softkeys
B 552-027 Keypad for Softkeys
636-065 Cable, Flat, W46, Main CPU PCB to CRT Deflection PCB
A 885-927 Panel, Top
A 009-904 Screw, countersunk lens
A 043-210 Washer, outer
042-420 Washer, inner
879-l 06 Spring for 009-904
A 885-928 Panel, Bottom
A 885-943 Panel, Blind for Printer Unit
A 885-964 Panel, Blind for Floppy Disk
886-288 Window for CRT Monitor (perspects window for front of CRT)
B 886-352 Panel, Blind for Floppy Disk
887-483 Bracket for 886-352
B 888-278 Panel Bottom
0
REVISED 93.02.08 9.2 - 1
COMPONENTS/MODULES
A 901-786 Power Supply PCB M

450-025 Fuse 3.2 A Slow 5X20 (Fl , F2 and F3)
450-031 Fuse 1 A Slow 5X20 (F5, F6, F7 and F8)
450-035 Fuse 4 A Slow 5X20 (F4 and F9)
901-822 Gas Mixer, Complete C
636-056 Wiring Harness for Gas Mixer
834-210 Rubber Membrane for Differential Pressure Regulator
840-027 Rubber Tubing EPDM 2X1.5 (0.75 Meter)
840-044 Rubber Tubing EPDM 1.114.0 (0.65 Meter)
840-204 Silicone Tubing 2.5X1.5 (0.20 Meter)
848-018 Air Pump Assembly
580-040 Motor, Stepping d
855-503 Vibration Damper
864-022 Ball bearing for Eccentric J
923-428 Eccentric for Membrane Pump
901-785 Gas Mixer Control PCB
901-797 CO, Flow Regulator W/O Pressure Transducer
835-317 O-Ring 06.1X1.6 mm
835-398 O-Ring 02.5X1.2
835-400 O-Ring 09.25X1.78 mm
991-537 Filter, CO,
901-799 Filter, Air
901-990 Valve, Pure CO, In, VI
901-991 Valve, Pure CO, Out, V2
901-992 Valve, High CO, Out, V4
901-993 Valve, Low CO, Out, V3
91 O-1 76 Transducer, CO, Pressure, (Gas Mixer below run 40)
91 O-1 84 Transducer, Air Flow
91 O-201 Transducer, CO, Pressure, (Gas Mixer Run 40 and onwards)
The tubing for the Gas Mixer must be cut in accordance with drawing 22520-A4, Section
10.1 page 3. The length shown in parenthesis is the total requirement for one Gas Mixer.
450-035 Fuse 4 A Slow 5X20 (F4 and F9)

902-224 Main Computer PCB (ABL50)
A 923-506 Left Hook for Gas Cylinder
A 923-507 Right Hook for Gas Cylinder
B 923-606 Rail for CO, Cylinder and Short Form
B 978-682 Panel, Left Side
978-683 Panel, Terminal for ABL500
B 978-690 Panel, Terminal for ABL520
978-757 Panel, Terminal for ABL50/500
9.2 - 4 REVISED 93.02.08

COMPONENTS/MODULES
0
B 923-626 Stand for MMI Unit
B 978-681 Panel, Top
B 009-910 Screw, countersunk lens
B 042-427 Washer, outer
042-420 Washer, inner
879-l 06 Spring for 009-910
Numerical Keyboard (ABL500/505/510/520)

552-030 Keypad numerical
616-149 Cable for keyboard
852-894 Finger Wheel
855-l 41 Rubber Foot
885839 Panel, Bottom
901-768 Numerical Keyboard PCB
923-423 Base, Black
A 923-594 Panel, Top (smooth)
B 923-614 Panel, Top (textured)
Keypad & Display Unit (ABL50)

617-912 Cable, Keypad & Display Unit to Main Computer PCB
886-378 Cabinet, Bottom Part
902-226 Keypad & Display PCB
902-263 LCD Dot Display with Cable
902-286 Cabinet, Top Part with Keypad
Base Unit
460-033 Line Voltage Selector
617-902 Cable for Software Gate (ABL500/505/51 O/520)
636-050 Cable with 3 plugs W9, Power Supply PCB to Rear Panel,
(ABL500/505/51 O/520)
a
A 636-051 Cable Flat with 6 plugs W6, Power Supply PCB to Ring Net
636-052 Cable Flat with 2 plugs W8, Gas Mixer to Wet Section Control PCB
B 636-l 57 Cable Flat, Power Supply to Wet Section Control
B 636-l 59 Cable Flat, Power Supply to Option Modules in Ring Net
636-301 Main Computer to Power Supply (ABL50)
A 770-728 Power Transformer
B 770-743 Power Transformer
803-208 Jack, Phone, Green
802-218 Line Cord Receptacle with Filter and Switch
855-l 30 Foot, plastic for Measuring Station
885-837 Panel, Left Side
885-842 Cabinet, Base Unit
885-919 Panel, Right Side
885-932 Panel, Blind Cover for Option Slots
888-270 Panel, Blind Cover for Option Slots
888-275 Panel Right side
888-297 Cabinet, Base Unit
REVISED 93.02.08 9.2 - 3

841-759 Tubing, Saline preheater - V4, (ABL501500)
841-760 Tubing for V3 (ABL51 O/520)
842-i 94 Tubing for Pumps (Pl and P2)
844-255 Gas Bushing for Wet Section Panel
844-264 Tubing Adaptor 0.8/l .2x1 1 mm (ABL51 O/520)
844-314 Adaptor for LS3
846- 146 Holder for tubing
855-l 37 Rubber, spacer
846-l 49 Holder for Tubing for Vi
866-663 Coupling for Pumps
879-l 10 Bracket, Decoupling for Monochromator Interface PCB
885-769 Thermostatted Box, Bottom Part (ABL500)
885-770 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL500)
885-827 Mounting Plate for Wet Section Control PCB
885-945 Mounting for Fan
885-948 Cover for Fan
886-252 Light Guide between Lamp and Electrode Chambers (ABL50/500/510/520)
886-345 Light Guide between Lamp and Electrode Chambers (ABL505)
888-273 Cover for Fan
888-316 Thermostatted Box, Bottom Part (ABL50/500/510/520)
901-577 Monochromator Unit (908-237 Run 59 and onwards ABL5101520) M
901-752 Main Valve, Complete
834-612 Main Valve Gasket with Tracks
834-613 Support Disc for Main Valve Gaske
834-620 Gasket for Main Valve Fropt Part t
901-764 J Main Valve Front Part \J -
901-754 Valve Dual V4 and V5
923-l 89 Front Part of V4N5
901-758 Lamp Unit (ABL51 O/520) 0
400-007 Lamp Halogen (ABL5101520)
902-094 Lamp Unit PCB
901-759 Optical fibre Hemolyzer Unit-Monochromator (ABL5101520)
901-760 Monochromator Adaptor (ABL51 O/520)
901-761 Hemolyzer Unit (ABL5101520)
901-762 Inlet Module without Flap and Washer
901-763 Tie Rod for Inlet Module with Wire and Plug
901-774 Wet Section Control PCB M
430-i 20 Battery for p0, electrode
901-775 Monochromator Interface PCB (ABL51 O/520) M
901-788 Reference Well (V6, LS5) Assembly r/
901-789 Valve (Vl ,V2 and V3)
901-790 Liquid Sensor LS3, with Rubber Washer and Ring
901-791 Preheater 2 (Main Valve - Electrode Chamber)
901-792 Electrode Chambers with LSl and LS2 v
9.2 - 6 REVISED 93.02.08

COMPONENTS/MODULES
0
901-773 Data Interface PCB, RSIlOO , Optional M
902-021 RS-232-C Interface PCB, RS150, Optional M
?. 902-132 Software Gate (ABL520)
902-l 47 Data Interface PCB, RSllOO, Optional (not ABL50) M
978-685 Panel, Back
902-l 48 RS-232-C Interface PCB, RSl50, Optional M
978-686 Panel, Back
902-215 Software Gate (ABL500/505(Na+ K+)/510 with Floppy Disk)
902-216 Software Gate (ABL505 Na+e K+, Ca++/CI- with Floppy Disk)
902-217 Software Gate (ABL505 Na+a K+, Ca++/CI- without Floppy Disk)
Wet Section Unit

009-906 Lens Head Screw for Wet Section
A 025-035 Screw for Fan
031-600 Hex Nut for Gas Bushing for Wet Section Panel
039-800 Locking Tie Rod for Inlet Module
042-960 Locking Bushing for V4 and V5, held in place by hex screw
400-008 Lamp, Halogen for Electrode Chamber
400-009 Lamp, Halogen for Electrode Chamber with socket and connector
570-087 Reed Contact for Thermostatted Box
580-039 Motor, Stepping, for Main Valve
580-042 Motor, Stepping, for Pl and P2
580-l 61 Fan
580-l 62 Protection Grill for Fan
636-069 Cable, Flat Wl O/W1 1, Wet Sec. Control PCB - Wet Sec. Distribution PCB
636-097 Cable, Ref connector to Wet Section Control to J23
636-l 19 Cable, Power for Monochromator Interface PCB (ABL51 O/520)
636-l 20 Cable, Monochromator Interface PCB - Lamp Unit (ABL510/520)
655-001 \/Optical Fibre with one Clip for Liquid Sensors, 10 PCS.
816-283 Clip for Optical Fibre for Transceiver End
826-255 Plastic plug for Wet Section Control PCB
834-219 Rubber Membrane for Waste Detector
834-575 Drop Catcher for KCI Well
835-351 O-ring for LS3 and LS4
836-l 47 Inlet Washer
836-l 50 Holder for Electrode Chambers Lamp
837-035 Rubber Washer for Pump Housing
837-l 42 Rubber Washer for Heated Panel
837-472 Soft Rubber Plate for Dual Membrane Valve, V4 and V5
840-043 Rubber tubing, Black 0.9X1.3 (2.5 Meters)
840-227 Silicone tubing, 0 0.8512.6
840-229 Silicone tubing, 0 1.5/3.0
841-727 Rubber tubing, Main valve to Preheater 2
841-738 Rubber tubing, Preheater 2 to Electrode Chambers
841-750 Tubing for V2
841-751 Tubing Gas Mixer - Back of Wet Section
841-757 Tubing for Vl
0
REVISED 93.02.08 9.2 - 5
COMPONENTS/MODULES
923-439 Holder for Waste Assembly

923-515 Lever for Waste
958-l 20 Plastic Ring, Red for Electrode Chambers
958-l 21 Plastic Ring, Blue for Electrode Chambers
958-l 22 Plastic Ring, Green for Electrode Chambers
958-l 29 Plastic Frame for Electrode Chambers
958-l 48 Plastic Ring, Violet for Electrode Chambers (ABL505)
958-l 49 Plastic Ring, Black for Electrode Chambers (ABL505)
958-l 50 Plastic Ring, White for Electrode Chambers (ABL505)
A 978-687 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL510)
B 978-688 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL520)
B 978-717 Panel, Mounting (White Aluminum)
B 978-719 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL50/500)
978-720 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL505 K+ Na+)
978-721 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL505 K+ Na+ Ca++)
978-722 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL505 K+ Na+ Cl)
B 978-728 Thermostatted Box, Top Part (ABL510 only)
The tubings for Wet Section must be cut in accordance with the lengths shown in section
10.1 page 26. Lengths shown in parenthesis are the total lengths used in one Wet Section.
Screws
009-325 Screw, Countersunk M3x25, For Wet Section D
009-904 Screw, Countersunk M4x16, for 901-818
009-906 Screw, Lens head M4x20, for Wet Section
009-910 Screw, Countersunk M4x16, for 902-l 39
011-410 Screw, Hex M4/10
020-327 Screw, Finger for 904-999
021-312 Screw, Selftapping, 3x8
021-407 Screw, Self tapping, 2.9x9.5,CS
021-410 Screw, Self tapping, 3x8
021-411 Screw, for 886-352
025-035 Screw, for Fan
032-905 Nut, Ml 0x1, for 923-320
805-343 Nut, Locking for D25 Connector
Miscellaneous
450-030 Main Fuse, 1.6 A slow for 220 Volt Line Voltage (EU)
450-l 25 Main Fuse, 3.2 A slow for 120 Volt Line Voltage (US)
617-877 Cable WI, between Computer Unit and Base Unit
617-888 Cable for OSM3
617-889 Cable for ICA, KNA, RISl
617-890 Cable, Video for Ext. Monitor NEC.
617-891 Cable for Ticket Printer
836-i 21 Gasket for CO, Cylinder
9.2 - 8 REVISED 93.02.08

COMPONENTS/MODULES
0
A 901-793 Front Panel, Complete
912-081 Magnet for Retainer for Front Shield
923-320 Retainer for Front Shield
923-582 Stand-Off with Connecting Tip for Bottles
923-318 Stand-Off, Holders for Bottles
901-794 Thermistors for Electrode Chambers
901-795 Inlet Flap
901-799 Air Filter
901-811 Wet Section Distribution PCB
A 901-920 Preheater 1 without Inlet Tube and LS4
901-988 Pre-Amplifier Unit p02
902-018 Gear Box 27:1 (Pl) and (P2)
62-023 Inlet Tube and LS4, with O-ring (ABL50/500), color coded red
A 902-053 v Waste Level Detector
&02-l 05 Inlet Tube and LS4, with O-ring (ABL51 O/520), color coded green
B 902-l 36 Front Panel, Complete
912-081 Magnet for Retainer for Front Shield
923-320 Retainer for Front Shield
923-582 Stand-Off with connecting Tip for Bottles
923-318 Stand-Off, Holders for bottles
B 902-i 55 Waste Level Detector 1
835-437 O-ring
902-l 57 Wet Section Control PCB M
430-l 20 Battery for pC, Electrode
888-349 Plate Mounting for 902-l 57
902-l 59 Preheater, passive for ABL505
902-l 65 Inlet tube and LS4, with o-ring (ABL505), color coded clear
902-i 71 Electrode chambers for ABL505
902-l 81 Waste Top with Nipples
902-l 88 Pump Housing with rotor
923-628 Rotor for pump
902-l 99 Unit Lens for Monochromator
902-204 Pre-amplifier Unit pH/pCO~Na/K/Ca.KI
902-212 Preheater 1 without inlet tube and LS4 (ABL505)
912-091 Heating Foil w/Plug
921-320 Infra-Red Heat Absorbance Filter
923-l 77 Holder for Reference Well
923-l 79 Panel, Heated Grey
923-621 Housing for electrode chambers (ABL505)
923-l 85 Housing for Electrode Chambers ABL50/500/51 O/520)
923-l 90 Panel, Mounting (White PVC)
A 923-l 91 Panel, Mounting (White Aluminum)
923-l 95 Prism for Electrode Chambers
923-209 Clamp for Electrode Chambers
923-363 Clamp for Reference Well Assembly
923-437 Bushing for Waste Assembly
923-438 Inner tube for Waste Assembly
REVISED 93.02.08 9.2 - 7

a COMPONENTS/MODULES
886-350 Splash Protection Shield

902-l 01 Front Shield, Dark Grey (ABL520 only)
904-999 Transport Cap for Printer Unit
020-327 Finger screw
835-437 O-ring
923-426 Protecting Cap
940-629 Jacket for p02 and pC0, Electrodes
950-l 86 Soaking Beaker for Electrodes
REVISED 93.02.08 9.2 - 9

Field Spare Parts Kit 904-857
Components
655-001 Optical Fibres with One Clip for Liquid Sensors
816-283 Clip for Optical fibre Transceiver end (10 PCS.)
834-575 Drop Catcher, for KCI Well
834-612 Main valve Gasket with Tracks
834-613 Support disc for Main Valve Gasket
834-620 Gasket for Front part of Main Valve (2 PCS.)
835-351 O-ring for LS3 and LS4 (5 PCS.)
836-l 47 Inlet Washer (2 PCS.)
837-035 Rubber Washer for Pump Housing
837-472 Soft Rubber Plate for Dual Membrane Valve, V4 and V5
840-027 Rubber Tube, EPDM 2X1 5
840-043 Rubber Tube, Black 0.9X1.3
840-044 Rubber Tube, Santoprene l.Oi4.0
840-204 Silicone Tube, 2.5X1.5
840-227 Silicone Tube, pump No.1 to Waste
841-727 Rubber tube, Main valve to Preheater 2 (2 pcs.)
841-738 Rubber tube, Preheater 2 to Electrode Chambers (2 pcs.)
841-750 Tubing for V2 (2~~s.)
841-757 Tubing for Vl
841-759 Tubing, Saline preheater - V4, (ABL500)
841-760 Tubing for V3 (ABL51 O/520)
842-l 94 Tubing for Pump (5 PCS.)
846-l 46 Holder for Tubing
846-l 49 Holder for Tubing for Vl
901-754 Valve, dual, V4 and V5
901-788 Reference Well Assembly (V6, LS5)
901-789 Valve (Vl ,V2)
901-790 Liquid Sensor (LS3) with Rubber Washer and Ring
901-792 Electrode Chambers with LSl and LS2 (ABL500/51 O/520)
901-799 Filter, Air (2 PCS.)
902-023 Inlet Tube with LS4 (ABL500)
902-l 05 Inlet Tube with LS4 (ABLSI O/520)
902-l 65 Inlet Tube with LS4 (ABL505)
902-l 71 Electrode Chambers (ABL505)
923-582 Stand-Off with Connecting Tip for Bottles
923-604 Stand-Off, Holders for Bottles
9.3 - 2 REVISED 92.01.15

9.3 SPARE PARTS KIT
Dealer's Main Spare Parts Kit904-856
Modules
901-775 Monochromator Interface PCB (ABL51 O/520) M
901-822 Gas Mixer, complete C
B 902-l 46 Main Computer PCB M
B 902-l 57 Wet Section Control PCB M
Components
039-800 Locking Tie Rod for Inlet Module
552-030 Numerical Keypad
552-027 Keypad for Softkeys
580-042 Motor, Stepping, for Pl and P2
580-161 Fan
617-877 Cable, Computer Unit - Base Unit
901-752 Main valve
901-758 Lamp Unit (ABL51 O/520)
901-759 Optical Fiber (ABL51 O/520)
901-760 Monochromator Adaptor (ABL51 O/520)
901-761 Hemolyzer Unit with LS3 (ABL51 O/520)
901-762 Inlet Module without Flap and Washer
901-763 Tie Rod for Inlet Module with Wire and Plug
901-768 Numerical Keyboard PCB
901-791 Preheater 2 ,(Main Valve - Electrode Chamber)
901-794 Thermistors for Electrode Chambers
901-795 Inlet Flap
901-811 Wet Section Distribution PCB
901-920 Preheater 1 without Inlet Tube (ABL500/510/520)
901-988 Pre-Amplifier Unit p0,
902-018 Gear Box 27:l (Pl and P2)
902-155 Waste Detector
902-181 Waste Stopper with Nipples
902-185 Video Amplifier PCB
902-188 Pump Housing with Rotor
902-204 Pre-Amplifier Unit pH/pCO,
902-212 Preheater 1 without inlet Tube (ABL505)
910-199 Therm0 Printer
912-091 Heating Foil for Heated Panel, with Cable and Plug
REVISED92.01.15 9.3 - 1
SOFTWARE VERSIONS
Printer Control PCB EPROM (QD3) part No. 368-935
Wet Section Control software version 5.45 (5.39, 5.40, 5.43 and 5.44 fully compatible)
Wet Section Control PCB EPROM (QD3) part No. 368-858
RSl50/100 Interface software version 2.01

RSl50/100 PCB EPROM (QD3) part No. 368-940
Main Processor software version, 7.10

Operating System 1.73
Wet Section Programs 3.22
Main Computer program disk:
Part No. 913-179 English/German

913-180 English/French
913-199 English/Japanese
913-181 English/Italian
English/Spanish (not yet released)
I/U rrocessor sonware verstori

I,h n___-_--_ --XL..-_- ..-__:__ 1 n.
4.~4
Main Computer PCB EPROM (QDll) part No. 368-934
Printer Control software version 1.41

Wet Section Control software version 5.45


ABL510 below run 8

Main Memory PCB EPROMs:
QDl part No. 368-998

QD2 368-999
QD3 367-000
9.4-2 Revised 93.01 .15

a 9.4 SOFTWARE VERSIONS
INTRODUCTION
This section lists the latest released software. For ABL500 below run 50 and ABL51 O/ABL520 below run
8 the main processor software, the operating system and the wet section program software are stored in
EPROMs on the main memory board.
For ABL500 run 50 onwards, ABL510/ABL520 run 8 onwards and ABL505 run 01 onwards, the main
processor software, the operating system and the wet section program software are stored in electrical
erasable FLASHPROMs on the main computer board.
The software is bilingual, i.e. all ABL5xx delivered from factory have English as their second language
(German/English, French/English etc.). In EPROM versions, languages other than English are defined in
main memory EPROMs QD5 and QD6 without which the ABL speaks English only.
ABLSOO below run 50

QDl part No. 368-968

r\r\n *#?rI nEn
UUL .xJo-YPY
QD3 368-970
QD4 368-994
QD5 Not mounted English only
368-995 German
368-951 French
368-953 Japanese
Spanish (not yet released)
368-893 Italian
QD6 Not mounted English
368-996 German
368-952 French
368-954 Japanese
368-894 Italian
QD7 368-888
QD8 368-997
QD9 368-890
I/O Processor version 4.04

Revised 93.01 .15

SOFTWARE VERSIONS

R!XO/iOO Interface software version 2.01

ABL520 below run 8 (ABL510 upgraded in the field)
Main Processorsoftware version, 7.10

Wet section Programs 3.15
CID1 part No. 367-003

QD2 367-004
QD3 367-005
QD4 367-006
367-007 German
368-955 French
368-957 Japanese
368-927 Italian
367-008 German
368-956 French
368-958 Japanese
368-928 Italian (not yet released)
QD7 368-922
QD8 367-009
QD9 368-924
.*r.
UO Processor so&are vef-sh 4.M L
Main Computer PCB EPROM (QDl 1) part No. 368-934

Wet Section Control software version 5.45 (5.40, 5.43 and 5.44 fully compatible)
9.4-4 Revised 93.01 .15 .

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
l
QD4 367-001
368-960 German
368-963 French
368-965 Japanese
368-910 Italian
368-961 German
368-964 French
368-966 Japanese
368-911 Italian (not yet released)
QD7 368-905
QD8 367-002
QD9 368-907
I/O Processor software version 4.04


Wet Section Control software version 5.45 (5.40, 5.43 and 5.44 fully compatible)


Main Computer Program Disk:

913-200 English/Japanese
I/O Processor software version 4.04

Revised 93.01 .I 5 9.4-3

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
a
913-188 K, Na, Cl English/French

913-204 K, Na, Cl English/Japanese
913-194 K, Na, Cl English/Italian
K, Na, Cl English/Spanish (not yet released)
I/O processor software version 4.04



ABL50 run 1 onwards
Main software version, all languages 1.Ol

WS program software version 3.22 (also compatible with Main software Vl .OO)
Memory Cards
Part No.: 914-001 English/Japanese (Vl .Ol J)
914-006 English/German (Vl .Ol G)
Keypad software version 1.09 (also compatible with Main software Vl .OO)
Keypad & Display PCB EPROM (QD) part No. 367-010
WS control software version 5.45 (also compatible with Main software Vl .OO)
RSl50 software version 2.01

RSl50 PCB EPROM (QD3) part No. 368-940
9.4-6 Revised 93.06.17

SOFTWARE VERSIONS



913-201 EnglisNJapanese
0
-
I/O processor software version 4.04

Main Computer PCB EPROM (CID11) part No. 368-934



a Main Processor software version, K-Na, K-Na-Ca, and K-Na-Cl 7.10


Part No. 913-183 K, Na English/German
913-186 K, Na English/French
913-202 K, Na English/Japanese
913-l 92 K, Na English/Italian
K, Na English/Spanish (not yet released)
913-184 K, Na, Ca English/German
913-187 K, Na, Ca English/French
913-203 K, Na, Ca English/Japanese
913-193 K, Na, Ca English/Italian
K, Na, Ca English/Spanish (not yet released)
913-185 K, Na, Cl English/German
Revised 93.01 .15

IO. DRAWINGS
0
Survey of Mechanic Drawings
Page
Mechanics 10.1
Electronics 10.2
Revised 91.03.18 10-l

10.1. MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Survey of Mechanic Drawings
Drawing Page
Gas Mixer Assembly 22520-A4 10.1-2
Wet Section Front View (ABL500) 22523-A4 10.1-4
Top of Waste Stopper and Front of Main Valve 22577-A4 10.1-6
Electrode Chamber and Main Valve with Inlet tube and
Preheaters, Right View 22589-A4 10.1-8
Wet Section Rear View (ABL500) 22595-A4 10.1-10
Main valve 22599-A4 10.1-12
Wet Section Front View (ABL51 O/520) 23674-A4 10.1-14
_.. ._-. _._ .___. --_-- _
Wet Section Rear View (ABL51 O/520) 23675-A4 io.i-16
Hemolyzer and Lamp Unit (ABL5101520) 2374 1-A4 10.1-18
Monochromator Adapter (ABL51 O/520) 23742-A41 10.1-20
Wet Section Front View (ABL505) 24395-A4 10.1-22
Wet Section Rear View (ABL505) 24396-A4 10.1-24
Tabel for Tubing in Wet Section 10.1-26
Revised 91.03.18 10.1 - 1

0 MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 22520-A4 Gas Mixer
Tubing EPDM Rubber L= 150mm 840-027
Tubing Silicone L= 88mm 840-204
Tubing Santoprene L= 200 mm 840-101

\/=l\ra
“cl1151
Da IVP rn7
“15b”L
In
IIl,
\I1
Y I 90!-990
Tubing Santoprene L= 20 mm 840-101

Filter, Air 90 l-799
Tubing EPDM Rubber L= 160mm 840-027
- 8 Tubing EPDM Rubber L= 187mm 840-027
0 9 Clamp for Air filter

10 Gas Mixer Control PCB 901-785
11 Differential Pressure Regulator
12 Tubing Santoprene L= 38mm 840-101

15 Transducer, CO2 Pressure 910-176
16 CO2 Flow Regulator w/o Pressure Transducer 90 l-797
17 Tubing Santoprene L= 30 mm 840-101
18 Valve Pure CO2 Out, V2 901-991

20 Valve High CO2 Out, V4 901-992
21 Valve Low CO2 out, V3 901-993
0 22
23
Tubing Santoprene
Tubing Santoprene (2 PCS)
L=
L=
24 mm
32 mm
840-101
840-101
Y..k_I__ ~__*-___-_ ,rn
24 I wing Banroprene Lz IP _-
11,111 0nn ,A,
0-+-1I
25 Air Pump Assembly 848-O 18

26 Membrane Pump 848-O 17
27 Gas Mixer output nipple
Notes: A. Black tube on black nipple.

B. Test nipples for differential pressure measurement.
Revised 91.10.04 10.1-3

Drawing 22523-A4 Wet Section Front view (ABLSOO)
Front Panel 901-793

Mounting Panel White Aluminium 923-191
Heated Panel Grey 923- 179
Stand-Off Holders for Bottles 923-3 1B

Stand-Off with Tip forcleaning solution 923-323
SBS Solution 923-323

Cal 1 Solution 923-323
8 Cal 2 Solution 923-323
9 Rinse Solution 923-323
IO Inner Tube for Waste 923-438

11 Brushing for Waste 923-437
12 Lever for waste 923-s 15
13 Waste Top with Nipples 901-923

14 Pump Housing w. Rotor 901-753
15 Holder for Tubing 846- 146
-__ -__
i6 Tie Rod for iniet Moduie w. WirelPiug 90 l-763
17 Locking Tie Rod for Inlet Module 039-800

18 Reference Well (V6, LSS) Assembly 90 l-788
19 Housing for Electrode Chambers 923-183

20 Prism for Electrode Chambers 923-195
21 Spring for Prism
l 22
23
Valve Vl, V2
Liquid Sensor 3 Housing

901-789
24 Liquid Sensor 3 mounting Clamp

25 Valve Dual, V4 and V5 901-754
26 Fan 580-161
26 Protection Grill for Fan 580- 162
27 Pre-Amplifier Unit pH 902-204
28 Pre-Amplifier Unit PC02 901-987
29 Pre-Amplifier Unit PO2 90 l-988
30 Magnetic Holders for Front Shield
31 Inlet Preheater w. Inlet Tube and LS4 901-920

32 Main Valve 90 l-752
33 Waste Level Detector 902-053
34 Holder for Waste Assembly 923-439

0
Revised 91.10.04 10.1-S
MECHANIC DRAWINGS
0
Drawing 22577-A4 Top of Waste Stopper and Front of Main valve
34 Gas from Gas Mixer

35 Gas to Main Valve
36 Pump No. 1
37 Valve No. 5
38 Waste from Main Valve
39 Cleaning Solution
40 Cal 1 Solution
41 Rinse Solution from Inlet Preheater
42 Tube for Rinse Solution
43 Cable for Inlet Preheater

44 Rinse Solution from V4 T-junction
45 Inlet Rinse from P2
46 Gas input from Waste

47 Waste output to Waste
48 Cal 2 Solution
Revised 91.03.18 10.1-7

0 MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 22589-A4 Electrode chamber and Main valve with Inlet Tube and Prehea-
ters Right View
1 Preheater 1 w. Inlet Tube and LS4 901-920
2 Main Valve Front Part 90 1-764

3 Main valve Housing
4 Inlet tube w. LS4 902-023
5 Motor Stepping for Main Valve 580-039
6 Holder, Lamp for Electrode Chambers 836- 150
7 Housing for Electrode Chambers 923- 183
8 Clamp for Electrode Chambers 923-209
9 Prism for Electrode Chambers 923- 195
IO Spring for Prism
11 Preheater 2 901-791
12 Spacer for Preheater 2
13 Panel Heated Grey 923- 179
14 Panel Mounting (White PVC) 923- 190
15 Rubber Washer for Heated Panel 837- 142
16 Mounting Plate for Main Valve
17 Panel Mounting (White Aluminium) 923-191
18 Thermistor 901-794
19 Electrode Chambers 90 l-792
20 Light Guide 886-252
21 Air Guide Screen
Revised 91.03.18 10.1-g

0 MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 22595-A4 Wet Section Rear View (Al3L500)

Mounting Panel (White PVC) 923-190
DUAL, V4 AND VS 90 l-754
Thermistor, Part of Thermistors for

Electrode Chambers 901-794
4 Valve V2 90 l-789
L
J Tb.~r...:..+~r
III~:II,II>LI 0..w+
TQI LIA-FTherm:r+rrrr 4-c
lllF111113LV13
I1
Electrode Chambers 90 l-794
7 Valve VI 901-789
8 Gearbox (27: 1) for P2 902-O 18
0 9 Motor Stepping, for P2 580-042
10 Motor Stepping, for Main Valve 580-039
11 Gearbox (27: 1) for PI 902-O 18
12 Wet Section Distribution PCB 901-811
14 Hole for Optical fibre LS2

17 Hole for Optical fibre LSI
18 Hole for Optical fi bre LS1

20 l”lF f-r
ILlnln ,“I nnt;rd
“yrmL.cll fihvn
ll”l F ILad
c2
0 22
23
Hole for Optical fibre LS4
Hole for Optical fibre LS4
Revised 91.03.18 10.1-l 1

Drawing 22599-A4 Main valve
1 Main valve Front Part 901-764
2 Gasket for Front Part of Main Valve 834-620
3 Main Valve Gasket with Tracks 834-612
4 Support Disc for Main Valve Gasket 834-6 13
5 Cup for Gaskets

6 Motor Stepping 580-039
7 Screws for Front part
8 Slot for Removal of Gasket with Tracks
Revised 91.03.18
0 MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 23674-A4 Wet Section Front view (ABLSl O/520)

Front Panel 90 l-793
Mounting Panel White Aluminium 923-191
Heated Panel Grey 923-l 79
Stand-Off Holders for Bottles 923-318
Stand-Off with Tip forcleaning solution 923-323
SBS Solution 923-323
Rinse Solution 923-323
Inner Tube for Waste 923-438
Brushing for Waste 923-437
12 Lever for waste 923-515
13 Waste Top with Nipples 901-923
14 Pump Housing w. Rotor 901-753
15 Holder for Tubing 846- 146
16 Tie Rod for Inlet Module w. Wire/Plug 90 l-763
18 Reference Well (V6, LS5) Assembly 90 1-788
19 Housing for Electrode Chambers 923-l 83
20 Prism for Electrode Chambers 923-l 95
21 Spring for Prism
22 Valve V 1, V2 and V3 901-789
23 Hemolyzer Unit 901-761
24 Hemolyzer mounting Clamp
26 Fan 580-161
26 Protection Grill for Fan 580- 162
28 Pre-Amplifier Unit PC02 901-987
29 Pre-Amplifier Unit PO2 90 l-988
31 Inlet Preheater with Inlet Tube and LS4
32 Main Valve 901-752
35 Optical Fibre 90 l-759
Revised 91.10.04 10.1-l 5

a MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 23675-A4 Wet Section Rear View (ABL51 O/520)

Mounting Panel (White PVC) 923-190
DUAL, V4 AND V5 901-754
Thermistor, Part of Thermistors for

4 Valve V2 90 l-789
5 Thermistor Part of Thermistors for

7 Valve VI 90 l-789
8 Gearbox (27: I) for P2 902-018
0 9 Motor Stepping, for P2 580-042
IO Motor Stepping, for Main Valve 580-039
11 Gearbox (27: 1) for PI 902-018
15 Hole for Optical fi bre LS2

24 Valve V3 90 I-789
25 Lamp Unit 901-758
26 Monchromator Unit 901-577
27 Monochromator Adapter 901-760
Revised 91.03.18 10.1-17

a MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing No. 23741-A4. Hemolyzer and Lamp Unit. right View (ABL51 O/520).
Screw holding Optical fibre
Clamp holding Optical fibre
Hemolyzer mounting clamp
Screw holding Lamp Unit
Adjusment screw flamp.
Adjustment screw for diaphragm (Factory set, do not adjust)
Cable Connectror
Photodiode
Retaining sprin for lamp
Halogen Lamp 400-007
Kuvette
12 Optical Fibre 901-759
Revised 91.03.18 10.1-19

l MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing No. 23742-A4. Monochromator Adapter (ABL51 O/520).

1 Adjustment screw for mi ror
2 Miror
3 Optical Fi bre
Revised 91.03 18 10.1-21

a MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 24395A4 Wet section front view (ABL505)
1 Front Panel 962-l 36

2 Mounting Panel, White Aluminium 978-717
3 Heated Panel, Grey 923-l 79
4 Stand-Off Holders for Bottles 923-318
5 Stand-Off with Tip for Cleaning solution 923-323
6 SBS solution 923-323
7 Call solution 923-323
8 Cal2 solution 923-323
9 Rinse solution 923-323
10 Inner Tube for Waste 923-438
11 Bushing for Waste 923-437
12 Lever for waste 923-515
13 Waste Top with Nipples 902-l 81
14 Pump Housing with Rotor 902-l 88
15 Holder for Tubing 846-l 46
16 Tie Rod for Inlet Module with Wire/Plug 901-763
18 Reference Well (V6, LS5) Assembly 901-788
19 Housing for Electrode Chambers 923-621
20 Prism for Electrode Chambers 923-l 95
21 Spring for Prism
22 Valve Vl , V3 901-789
26 Fan 580-l 61
26 Protection Grill for Fan 580-l 62
28 Pre-Amplifier Unit PC02 90 1-987
29 Pre-Amplifier Unit PO2 901-988
31 Inlet Preheater (without Inlet Tube and LS4) 902-212
32 Main Valve 90 l-752
36 Preheater, passive 902-l 59
0
WRITTEN 92.02.14 10.1 - 23
MECHANIC DRAWINGS
0
Drawing 24396-A4 Wet section rear view (ABL505)
1 Mounting Panel (White PVC) 923-l 90

2 Valve, Dual, V4 and V5 901-754
3 Thermistor holder 90 l-794
4 Valve V2 90 l-789
5 Thermistor holder 901-794
7 Valve Vi 90 l-789
8 Gearbox (27:l) for Pl/P2 902-018
9 Motor, Stepping, for Pi/P2 580-042
10 Motor, Stepping, for Main Valve 580-039
14 Hole for optical fibre, LS2
17 Hole for optical fibre, LSl
18 Hole for optical fibre, LSI
24 Valve V3 901-789
0
WRITTEN 92.02.14 10.1 - 25
MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Table for Tube Lengths in Wet Section
Numbers in () refer to drawing 22523-A4. Numbers in [] refer to drawing 22577-A4. The

tubes listed below have no individual code numbers, but are cut from the type of tubing
listed to the specified lengths.
Tube From To Length in

No. Destination Destination Millimeters
Tubing Type 840-043 Viton

1 Bottle No. 1 Nipple (5) Main valve Nipple [39] 265
2 Bottle No. 2 Nipple (6) LS5 280
5 Bottle No. 5 Nipple (9) V4 180
6 V4 Inlet Preheater [44] 180 (ABL500/51 O/520)
7 V4 Inlet Preheater [44] 228 (ABL505)
8 Inlet Preheater [42] Main valve Nipple [41] 35
9 Gas Nipple on panel Waste [34] Blue 65
10 Waste [35] Orange Main valve Nipple [46] 105
11 Reference Well Electrode Chamber 25
12 Electrode Chamber Preheater 3 20 (ABL505)
Tubing Type 840-227 Silicone 00.85/2_6

13 v5 Pump No.2 35
14 Pump No.2 Inlet Rinse [45] 145
15 v5 Waste [37] 115
16 Main valve Nipple [47] Waste [38] 115
17 Pump No.1 Waste [36] 250
18 Tubing for Waste Nipples 10
Tubing Type 840-229 Silicone 0 1.5/3.0

19 Tubing for Waste gas overflow nipple 30
Tubings with Individual Code Numbers: Code No.

20 Gas Mixer Back of Wet Section 841-751
21 Main valve Middle Nipple Preheater No.2 841-727
22 Preheater 2 Electrode Chamber LS2 841-738
23 Tubing Valve 2 841-750
24 Pump No. 1 Electrode Chamber LSl 841-757
25 Rinse Preheater v4 841-759 (ABL500)
26 Tubing Valve 3 841-760 (ABL51 O/520)
27 Tubing Valve 3 841-761 (ABL505)
Specie1 tubings: Tubing Type 840-l 04 00.8/2.0 for older ABL500s with narrow grove in
thermostted plate ( see Service Note 917-282)
Lenght in millimeters:
28: Bottle No. 2 Nipple (6) LS5 280
29: Rinse preheater v4 205
10.1 - 26 REVISED 93.06.11

l MECHANIC DRAWINGS
Drawing 24396-A4 Wet section rear view (ABL505)
1 Mounting Panel (White PVC) 923-l 90

2 Valve, Dual, V4 and V5 901-754
4 Valve V2 901-789
7 Valve Vl 901-789
9 Motor, Stepping, for Pl/P2 580-042
0
10 Motor, Stepping, for Main Valve 580-039
0 24 Valve V3 901-789
0
WRITTEN 92.02.14 10.1 - 25
ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS
e
10.2-2 Revised 91.03.18

10.2.ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS
a
Survey of Electronic Drawings
Page
Block Diagrams 10.2-l
Revised 9 1.03.18 10.2-l

ABL 50&5000&505&510 &520dd PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABL 50&5000&505&510 &520dd PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABLSO0

Blood Gas System

CHECKOUT AND ADJUSTMENT, concerning

e 4 DISMANTLING AND REPLACEMENTS, concer-

5 MAINTENANCE, which include the mainte-

6 PROGRAMS, which gives details about the

ELECTRONICS DESCRIPTION, which describes

9 SPARE PARTS LIST, which gives a list of the

1. General Information Section Page

2. Checkout and Adjustment

4. Dismantling and Replacements

Revised 92.02.14 Contents-l

9. Spare Parts List

Contents-2 Revised 92.02.14

1. General Information Section Page

Qjgtkw\ aw3 fwX+rne~~

4. Dismantling and Replacements

Revised 92.02.14 Contents-l

Service Policy (repair level) In General

Exceptions From The Service Policy

ABLTM500 IS a trademark of Radiometer A/S, Denmark and is registered in the USA.

PHA860 pH Meter Tester 390-079

DMM - Digital Multi Meter, 4+ digits Any

Temperature Measuring Unit 901-239

Loop-back and Pass-through Test Plug for 9 pole D-connectors 902-028

Loop-back Test Plug for 5 pole connectors 902-029

Dummy Electrode (pHlpCO2) for connection to PHA860 902-049

Dummy Electrode (pOz), 100 MQ 9&+050

Nozzle for Air Flow Adjustment of Gas Mixer 920-7 10

Mounting Tool for Main Valve Gaskets 920-709

Tubing tweezers, 920-627

6k100, 0.05 % resistor 152-332

Gas Mixer Tester, A7303 904- 177

Spring for mechanical alignment of Printer Unit 920-7 13

Spanner for Hemolyzer adjustment 013-926

Adjustment dial (ABL510/520) 920-700

Boot PCB 902- 198

Program disk kit, English/German 905-048

Program disk kit, English/French 905-049

Program disk kit, English/Italian 905-050

Program disk kit, English/Spanish 905-05 1

Revised 91.07.29 Test Equipment and Tools -1

l Code Subject Inserted by Date

REVISED 93.06.17 SERVICE NOTES - 1

917-240 Informations on pumps and tubing.

917-245 Update the Service Manual to include New DesignCRT Monitor.

917-279 Inclusion of Section 2.12 CRT adjustment procedures.

917-281 Replacement Instructions for Gas Mixer Membrane Pump.

917--283 Software revision for ABL50 - four errors corrected.

SERVICE NOTES - 2 REVISED 93.06.17

SUBJECT: Service manual update

Section 4 has been extended to comprise Mechanical alignment of printer

Section 2, Checkout and Adjustment. All pages.

Section 3, Troubleshooting. Page 3-16 through 3-41.

Section 4, Dismantling and Replacements. Page 4-10 through 4-12

Section 5, Maintenance. Page 5.2-6.

Section 6, Programs. All pages.

Section 9, Spare Parts List. All pages.

Section 10, Drawings. Page 1 O-2 through 1 O-5.

l MEDICAL SERVICE NOTES

Subject ABL510 Service Information

Documentation Please discard the following existing sheets:

In addition, please add the following new Sections: